RAPL 3LanguageReferenceGuide

RAPL-3
Language Reference Guide

UMI-R3-210
ii RAPL-3 Reference Guide
RAPL-3 Language Reference Guide
Revision Revision History Date
001 Initial release as UMI-R3-210 for C500C.
CROS 1.16.
99-05
001a CROS 2.0.1080. Recent revision information is in the release notes on
the diskettes.
99-09
001b
Replaced references to the Application Development Guide with
references to the Robot System Software Documentation Guide.
00-11
Copyright 2000 CRS Robotics Corporation
RAPL-3 and RAPL are trademarks of CRS Robotics Corporation and may be used to describe only CRS
Robotics products.
All brand names and product names used in this guide are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names
of their respective holders.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CRS Robotics Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. CRS Robotics Corporation
assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. CRS Robotics Corporation makes
no commitment to update nor to keep current the information contained in this document.
CRS Robotics Corporation software products shall remain the property of CRS Robotics Corporation.
Questions about the RAPL-3 programming language can be directed to the Customer Support Department.
RAPL-3 and robot training courses are offered at CRS Robotics in Burlington, Ontario, Canada, or can be
conducted at your facility. For additional information contact the Customer Support Department.
Additional copies of this guide, or other CRS Robotics literature, may be obtained from the Sales Department
or from your distributor.
CRS Robotics Corporation
Mail/Shipping:
5344 John Lucas Drive, Burlington, Ontario L7L 6A6, Canada
Telephone:
1-905-332-2000
Telephone (toll free in Canada and United States):
1-800-365-7587
Facsimile:
1-905-332-1114
E-Mail (General):
info@crsrobotics.com
E-Mail (Customer Support):
support@crsrobotics.com
Web:
www.crsrobotics.com
RAPL-3 Reference Guide iii
CRS Licence Agreement
IMPORTANT! READ CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING SOFTWARE PACKET(S)
By opening the sealed packet(s) containing the software, you indicate your
acceptance of the following CRS Licence Agreement.
A. CRS LICENCE AGREEMENT
This is a legal binding agreement between you, the end user, (either an individual
or an entity) and CRS Robotics Corporation (CRS). By opening the sealed
software packages and/or by using the SOFTWARE program you agree to be
bound by the terms of this Agreement. If you do not agree to the terms of this
Agreement, promptly return the unopened software and the accompanying items
(including printed materials and binders or other containers) to CRS for a full
refund.
If you are acting on behalf of a corporation, you represent to CRS that you are
authorized to act on behalf of such organization and that your assent to the
terms of this Agreement creates a legally enforceable obligation on your
organization. As used herein, you and your refers to you and any
organization on behalf of which you are acting.
This Agreement together with any applicable CRS Agreement embodies the entire
understanding between the parties with respect to, and supersedes any prior
understanding or agreement, oral or written, relating to the SOFTWARE.
B. CRS ROBOTICS CORPORATION (CRS) SOFTWARE
LICENCE
1. GRANT OF LICENCE: This Licence Agreement permits you to use one copy of
the enclosed CRS POLARA software program (SOFTWARE) on a single
computer. The SOFTWARE is in use on a computer when it is loaded into
temporary memory (ie. RAM) or installed into permanent memory (e.g. hard disk,
CD-ROM, or other storage device) of that computer. However, installation on a
network for the sole purpose of internal distribution shall not constitute use for
which a separate licence is required, provided you have a separate licence for
each computer which the SOFTWARE is distributed. In no event may the total
number of users on a network exceed the number of licences acquired for a
network.
If you make additional copies of the SOFTWARE or its accompanying
documentation contrary to this Agreement, or if the number of users is greater
than that for which you have paid a licence fee, CRS may require that you
immediately make payment to CRS for such copies and/or such use at the
current list price. This remedy is in addition to any other remedies that CRS may
have against you.
2. UPGRADES: Upgrades to SOFTWARE may be provided by CRS at a 20%
annual cost of the original price of the software. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade
from another software product licensed to you, whether a CRS product or a third-
party product, the SOFTWARE must be used and transferred in conjunction with
the upgraded product, unless you destroy the upgraded product. You are
authorized to use the SOFTWARE only if you are an authorized user of a
qualifying product as determined by CRS.
3. COPYRIGHT: The SOFTWARE (including any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music and text incorporated into the SOFTWARE is
owned by CRS and is protected by copyright laws and international treaty
provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted
iv RAPL-3 Reference Guide
material except that you may make up to two archival copies of the SOFTWARE
for the sole purpose of protecting your investment from loss. You may not copy
the documentation accompanying the SOFTWARE.
4. OTHER RESTRICTIONS: You may not rent or lease the SOFTWARE. You may
not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE. This licence
does not grant you any right to any enhancement or update to the SOFTWARE.
Any enhancements and updates, if available, may be obtained from CRS at
current pricing, terms and conditions.
5. TERMINATION: The licence will terminate automatically if you fail to comply
with the limitations described herein.
6. GOVERNING LAWS: If you acquired this product in Canada, this Agreement
is governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario. Each of the parties hereto
irrevocably attorns to the jurisdiction of the courts of Ontario and further agrees
to commence any litigation which may arise hereunder in the courts located in
the Judicial District of York, Province of Ontario.
If you acquired this product in the United States, this Agreement is governed by
the laws of the state of Washington.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the
Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraphs (a) through (d) of
the Commercial Computer-Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-10 when
applicable, or in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, and in similar clauses in the NASA FAR
Supplement. Contract/manufacturer is CRS Robotics Corporation, 5344 John
Lucas Dr. Burlington, ON Canada L7L 6 A6.
C. LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY: CRS warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform
substantially in accordance with the accompanying materials for a period of 60
days. The liability of CRS and your exclusive remedy shall be limited to the
amount paid by you for the SOFTWARE and its accompanying documentation.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES: The SOFTWARE is provided on an as is basis. To
the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. CRS disclaims all other
warranties, express or implied, including, but not limited to, implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with regard to the
SOFTWARE and the accompanying printed materials.
The entire risk as to the results and performance of the SOFTWARE is assumed
by you. In particular, CRS does not accept any responsibility for any portions of
the SOFTWARE which have been modified by you or on your behalf.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES: In no event shall CRS or its
distributors be liable for any damages whatsoever (including but not limited to
damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business
information or other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use or inability to use the
SOFTWARE or its accompanying documentation, even if CRS has been advised of
the possibility of such damages. The entire liability of CRS under this Agreement
with respect to the SOFTWARE shall be limited to the amount paid by you for the
SOFTWARE and its accompanying documentation.
RAPL-3 Reference Guide v
External Copyright Notices
CROS and RAPL-3 contain portions of code that are copyrighted by other
organizations. CRS Robotics Corp. acknowledges the following copyrights.
The Regents of the University of California
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted,
provided that this notice is preserved.
Carnegie Mellon University
Mach Operating System
Copyright (c) 1992, 1991 Carnegie Mellon University
All Rights Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation is hereby granted, provided that both the copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the software, derivative works or
modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both notices appear in
supporting documentation.
vi RAPL-3 Reference Guide
CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS "AS IS"
CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND
FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
Winning Strategies, Inc.
Copyright (c) 1993
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
RAPL-3 Reference Guide vii
Contents at a Glance
Preface..................................................................................... 1
Chapter 1
General Program Format........................................................... 5
Chapter 2
Data Types and Variables ....................................................... 13
Chapter 3
Expressions, Assignment, and Operators ................................ 35
Chapter 4
Constants .............................................................................. 41
Chapter 5
Control Flow........................................................................... 47
Chapter 6
Subroutines, Functions and Commands ................................. 57
Chapter 7
Preprocessor Directives........................................................... 69
Chapter 8
Structured Exception Handling............................................... 77
Chapter 9
Library Subprograms.............................................................. 81
Subprograms: Category Listing ............................................... 91
Subprograms: Alphabetical Listing........................................ 139
APPENDICES
Signals................................................................................. 341
viii RAPL-3 Reference Guide
RAPL-3 Reference Guide ix
Contents
Preface..................................................................................... 1
Documentation Conventions ............................................... 2
Text and Programming Code.......................................... 2
Commands and Keywords.............................................. 3
name_of_command/keyword ......................................... 3
Related Resources............................................................... 4
Chapter 1
General Program Format........................................................... 5
Example 1: Basic Program in RAPL-II Style .................... 6
Example 2: Basic Program in Preferred RAPL-3 Style...... 7
The Main Program............................................................... 8
main............................................................................. 8
Lines of a Program.............................................................. 9
Comments ........................................................................ 10
Labels............................................................................... 11
Keywords.......................................................................... 12
Chapter 2
Data Types and Variables ....................................................... 13
Basic Data Types .............................................................. 14
int............................................................................... 14
float ............................................................................ 14
string.......................................................................... 14
cloc............................................................................. 14
ploc............................................................................. 14
void............................................................................. 15
Identifiers ......................................................................... 16
Character Set .............................................................. 16
Case ........................................................................... 16
Length ........................................................................ 16
Examples .................................................................... 16
Declarations ..................................................................... 17
Explicit Declarations ................................................... 17
Implicit Declarations ................................................... 17
Implicit with Explicit ................................................... 18
Identifiers.................................................................... 18
Strings ............................................................................. 19
String[number] ............................................................ 19
String[ ] ...................................................................... 19
Notes: ......................................................................... 19
Termination ................................................................ 20
Concatenation............................................................. 20
Arrays .............................................................................. 21
Teachables........................................................................ 23
Use ............................................................................. 23
Variable (v3) File.......................................................... 23
Declarations................................................................ 23
Limitations.................................................................. 24
Defaults and Unteachables.......................................... 25
User-Defined Types........................................................... 26
Pointers............................................................................ 27
Dereferencing.............................................................. 27
Address-of Operator .................................................... 27
x RAPL-3 Reference Guide
Enumerated Types.............................................................28
Record Structures .............................................................29
Unions ..............................................................................30
Initializers .........................................................................31
Named Constants ..............................................................32
Sizeof() Function................................................................33
sizeof() .........................................................................33
Dimof() Function................................................................34
dimof() .........................................................................34
Chapter 3
Expressions, Assignment, and Operators .................................35
Variable References ...........................................................36
Assignment statements......................................................37
Operators..........................................................................38
Type Casts ........................................................................40
Chapter 4
Constants ...............................................................................41
Numeric Constants............................................................42
Integer Constants ........................................................42
Alphanumeric Constants..............................................42
Floating Point Constants ..............................................42
String Constants ...............................................................43
Location Constants............................................................45
Chapter 5
Control Flow ...........................................................................47
break...........................................................................48
case.............................................................................48
continue ......................................................................49
do................................................................................50
for ...............................................................................50
goto .............................................................................51
if .................................................................................52
loop .............................................................................54
while ...........................................................................54
Chapter 6
Subroutines, Functions and Commands ..................................57
Subprograms.....................................................................58
Kinds of Subprograms .......................................................59
subs ............................................................................59
funcs ...........................................................................59
commands...................................................................60
Parameters........................................................................62
Restrictions on Parameters...........................................62
Func, Sub, and Command Prototypes ................................64
Libraries............................................................................65
Variable and Subprogram Scope ........................................66
A Scope Example .........................................................66
Relevant Statements..........................................................67
with.............................................................................67
return..........................................................................67
RAPL-3 Reference Guide xi
Chapter 7
Preprocessor Directives........................................................... 69
File Inclusion.................................................................... 70
Macro Substitution...................................................... 71
Conditional Compilation.............................................. 72
Preprocessor Directives in General .................................... 73
The Preprocessor Directives............................................... 74
.define......................................................................... 74
.error .......................................................................... 74
.ifdef ........................................................................... 74
.ifndef ......................................................................... 74
.include....................................................................... 75
.number filename ...................................................... 75
.undef ......................................................................... 75
Using the Compiler from the Command Line...................... 76
Chapter 8
Structured Exception Handling............................................... 77
try-except Construct ......................................................... 78
Syntax ........................................................................ 78
Related Keywords and Subprograms.................................. 80
Chapter 9
Library Subprograms.............................................................. 81
General............................................................................. 82
Libraries ..................................................................... 82
Return Values and Errors............................................ 82
Subprogram Names..................................................... 82
RAPL-II to RAPL-3........................................................... 84
Subprograms: Category Listing ............................................... 91
Analog Input..................................................................... 94
Calibration ....................................................................... 95
Configuration File Handling .............................................. 96
Date and Time .................................................................. 97
Device Input and Output................................................... 98
Digital Input and Output................................................... 99
Environment Variables.................................................... 100
Error Message Handling.................................................. 101
File Input and Output ..................................................... 105
Flags......................................................................... 105
Field width................................................................ 105
.precision.................................................................. 105
x or X........................................................................ 105
Unformatted Input .................................................... 105
Formatted Input ........................................................ 106
Unformatted Output.................................................. 106
Formatted Output ..................................................... 106
File and Device System Management ............................... 107
Front Panel..................................................................... 109
Status Window.......................................................... 109
Panel Button Subprograms........................................ 110
Gripper........................................................................... 111
Home.............................................................................. 112
Location ......................................................................... 113
Kinematic Conversion................................................ 113
Data Manipulation .................................................... 113
xii RAPL-3 Reference Guide
Flags .........................................................................113
Math...............................................................................114
Memory...........................................................................115
Motion.............................................................................116
Pendant...........................................................................118
Pendant Library Commands .......................................118
Pointer Conversion and Function pointers........................120
Robot Configuration.........................................................121
Signals............................................................................124
Stance.............................................................................125
Status .............................................................................126
String Manipulation.........................................................127
System Process Control ...................................................129
Single and Multiple Processes.....................................129
Operating System Management ..................................130
Point of Control and Observation................................130
Tool Transform and Base Offset .......................................131
v3 Files ...........................................................................132
Background ...............................................................132
Architecture for v3 Subprograms................................133
Parameters ................................................................133
Subs, Funcs, and Commands.....................................134
Win 32 ............................................................................136
Win 32 Commands.....................................................136
Types Used With Win 32 Commands ..........................136
Subprograms: Alphabetical Listing ........................................139
Reading Subprogram Entries......................................140
Using Subprograms ...................................................141
abort .........................................................................142
accel_get ....................................................................142
accel_set ....................................................................142
accels_get ..................................................................143
accels_set ..................................................................143
access........................................................................144
acos...........................................................................145
addr_decode...............................................................145
addr_to_file................................................................146
addr_to_line...............................................................146
align..........................................................................146
analogs_get ................................................................147
app_close...................................................................148
app_open...................................................................148
appro.........................................................................149
appros .......................................................................149
argc...........................................................................150
argv...........................................................................150
armpower ..................................................................151
asin...........................................................................151
atan2.........................................................................152
axes_get.....................................................................152
axes_set.....................................................................153
axis_status ................................................................153
base_get.....................................................................154
base_set.....................................................................154
boardtemp_get ...........................................................155
build_cloc ..................................................................155
build_ploc..................................................................156
calibrate ....................................................................156
RAPL-3 Reference Guide xiii
call_ifunc .................................................................. 156
calrdy ....................................................................... 157
calzc ......................................................................... 157
cfg_load..................................................................... 158
cfg_load_fd ................................................................ 159
cfg_save .................................................................... 160
cfg_save_fd................................................................ 160
chdir......................................................................... 161
chmod....................................................................... 161
chr_is_lower .............................................................. 162
chr_is_upper ............................................................. 162
chr_to_lower.............................................................. 162
chr_to_upper............................................................. 163
clear_error ................................................................ 163
close ......................................................................... 164
closenp ..................................................................... 164
conf_get .................................................................... 165
confirm_menu........................................................... 165
connectnp................................................................. 166
cos............................................................................ 166
cpath ........................................................................ 166
ctl_get ....................................................................... 167
ctl_give...................................................................... 167
ctl_rel........................................................................ 168
ctpath....................................................................... 168
ctpath_go .................................................................. 169
deg............................................................................ 169
delay......................................................................... 170
depart ....................................................................... 170
departs ..................................................................... 171
disconnectnp............................................................. 172
dup........................................................................... 172
dup2......................................................................... 172
environ ..................................................................... 173
err_compare.............................................................. 174
err_compose.............................................................. 175
err_get_b1................................................................. 176
err_get_b2................................................................. 176
err_get_code .............................................................. 177
err_get_subsys .......................................................... 177
error_addr................................................................. 178
error_code................................................................. 178
error_line .................................................................. 179
error_file ................................................................... 179
execl ......................................................................... 179
execv......................................................................... 180
exit ........................................................................... 182
fabs .......................................................................... 182
finish ........................................................................ 183
flock.......................................................................... 183
fprint ........................................................................ 184
fprintf ....................................................................... 185
freadline.................................................................... 186
fstat .......................................................................... 187
ftime ......................................................................... 188
gains_get................................................................... 188
gains_set................................................................... 189
get_ps ....................................................................... 189
getenv ....................................................................... 191
xiv RAPL-3 Reference Guide
getopt ........................................................................191
getpid ........................................................................193
getppid ......................................................................193
grip............................................................................193
grip_cal......................................................................194
grip_close...................................................................194
grip_finish .................................................................195
grip_open...................................................................195
gripdist_get ................................................................196
gripdist_set ................................................................196
gripisfinished.............................................................197
gripper_stop...............................................................197
griptype_get ...............................................................198
griptype_set ...............................................................198
halt ...........................................................................199
heap_set ....................................................................199
heap_size...................................................................200
heap_space ................................................................200
here...........................................................................201
home .........................................................................201
homezc ......................................................................201
hsw_offset_get............................................................202
iabs ...........................................................................202
input .........................................................................203
inputs........................................................................203
ioctl ...........................................................................204
jog_t ..........................................................................205
jog_ts.........................................................................207
jog_w.........................................................................208
jog_ws........................................................................209
joint...........................................................................210
joint_to_motor............................................................210
joint_to_world ............................................................211
jointlim_get ................................................................211
jointlim_set ................................................................212
limp...........................................................................212
linacc_get...................................................................213
linacc_set...................................................................213
link............................................................................214
linklen_get .................................................................214
linklen_set .................................................................215
linspd_get ..................................................................215
linspd_set ..................................................................215
ln ..............................................................................216
loc_cdata_get .............................................................216
loc_cdata_set .............................................................217
loc_check...................................................................217
loc_class_get ..............................................................217
loc_class_set ..............................................................218
loc_flags_get...............................................................218
loc_flags_set...............................................................219
loc_machtype_get .......................................................219
loc_machtype_set .......................................................220
loc_pdata_get .............................................................220
loc_pdata_set .............................................................220
loc_re_check ..............................................................221
lock ...........................................................................221
log .............................................................................221
MAJOR......................................................................222
RAPL-3 Reference Guide xv
malarm..................................................................... 222
maxvel_get ................................................................ 223
maxvel_set ................................................................ 223
maxvels_get............................................................... 224
maxvels_set............................................................... 224
mem_alloc................................................................. 225
mem_free .................................................................. 225
memcopy .................................................................. 226
memset ..................................................................... 226
memstat.................................................................... 227
MINOR...................................................................... 227
mkdir........................................................................ 227
mknod ...................................................................... 228
module_name_get...................................................... 228
motor........................................................................ 229
motor_to_joint ........................................................... 229
motor_to_world.......................................................... 230
mount....................................................................... 230
move......................................................................... 231
moves ....................................................................... 232
msleep ...................................................................... 232
mtime ....................................................................... 233
net_in_get ................................................................. 233
net_ins_get................................................................ 234
net_out_set ............................................................... 234
net_outs_get.............................................................. 234
net_outs_set .............................................................. 235
nolimp ...................................................................... 235
obs_get...................................................................... 235
obs_rel ...................................................................... 236
onbutton................................................................... 236
online ....................................................................... 237
open ......................................................................... 238
opennp...................................................................... 240
output....................................................................... 240
output_get................................................................. 241
output_pulse............................................................. 242
output_set................................................................. 242
outputs..................................................................... 242
outputs_get ............................................................... 243
outputs_set ............................................................... 244
panel_button............................................................. 244
panel_button_wait ..................................................... 244
panel_buttons ........................................................... 245
panel_light_get .......................................................... 246
panel_light_set .......................................................... 246
panel_lights_get......................................................... 247
panel_lights_set......................................................... 247
panel_status.............................................................. 247
pdp_get ..................................................................... 248
pdp_set ..................................................................... 248
pendant_bell ............................................................. 248
pendant_chr_get........................................................ 249
pendant_close ........................................................... 249
pendant_cursor_pos_set ............................................ 250
pendant_cursor_set ................................................... 250
pendant_flush........................................................... 250
pendant_home........................................................... 251
pendant_home_clear.................................................. 251
xvi RAPL-3 Reference Guide
pendant_open ............................................................251
pendant_write............................................................252
pipe ...........................................................................252
pitch..........................................................................253
pitchs ........................................................................254
pos_axis_set...............................................................255
pos_get ......................................................................255
pos_set ......................................................................256
pow ...........................................................................256
print ..........................................................................256
printf .........................................................................257
rad ............................................................................258
rand ..........................................................................259
rand_in......................................................................259
rcv.............................................................................260
read...........................................................................261
readdir.......................................................................262
readline .....................................................................263
reads .........................................................................263
readsa .......................................................................264
ready .........................................................................265
rmdir .........................................................................265
robot_abort ................................................................265
robot_cfg_save............................................................266
robot_error_get...........................................................266
robot_flag_enable .......................................................267
robot_info ..................................................................267
robot_mode_get ..........................................................267
robot_move ................................................................268
robot_odo...................................................................268
robot_servo_stat.........................................................269
robot_type_get............................................................269
robotisdone................................................................269
robotisfinished...........................................................270
robotishomed.............................................................270
robotislistening ..........................................................271
robotispowered...........................................................271
roll ............................................................................271
rolls...........................................................................272
rotacc_get ..................................................................273
rotacc_set ..................................................................273
rotspd_get..................................................................274
rotspd_set..................................................................274
seek...........................................................................274
select_menu...............................................................275
sem_acquire...............................................................276
sem_release ...............................................................276
sem_test ....................................................................277
send ..........................................................................277
server_get ..................................................................278
server_info.................................................................279
server_protocol...........................................................279
server_set ..................................................................280
server_version............................................................280
setenv........................................................................280
setprio .......................................................................281
shift_t ........................................................................282
shift_w.......................................................................283
shutdown ..................................................................284
RAPL-3 Reference Guide xvii
sig_arm_set ............................................................... 284
sig_mask_set ............................................................. 285
sigfifo........................................................................ 285
sigmask .................................................................... 286
signal........................................................................ 286
sigsend ..................................................................... 287
sin ............................................................................ 287
size_to_bytes ............................................................. 287
sizeof ........................................................................ 288
snprint...................................................................... 288
snprintf..................................................................... 289
socketpair ................................................................. 289
speed ........................................................................ 290
speed_get .................................................................. 290
speed_set .................................................................. 291
split .......................................................................... 291
sqrt........................................................................... 292
srand........................................................................ 293
stance_get ................................................................. 293
stance_set ................................................................. 294
startup...................................................................... 295
stat ........................................................................... 295
statfs ........................................................................ 296
statusnp ................................................................... 297
str_append................................................................ 298
str_chr_find............................................................... 298
str_chr_get ................................................................ 299
str_chr_rfind ............................................................. 299
str_chr_set ................................................................ 300
str_cksum................................................................. 300
str_dup ..................................................................... 300
str_edit ..................................................................... 301
str_error.................................................................... 301
str_len ...................................................................... 302
str_len_set................................................................. 302
str_limit .................................................................... 303
str_limit_set .............................................................. 303
str_scanf ................................................................... 304
str_signal .................................................................. 305
str_sizeof................................................................... 305
str_substr ................................................................. 306
str_subsys................................................................. 306
str_to_float ................................................................ 306
str_to_int .................................................................. 307
str_to_lower............................................................... 307
str_to_upper.............................................................. 308
sync.......................................................................... 308
sysconf...................................................................... 308
sysid_string............................................................... 309
tan............................................................................ 309
teach_menu .............................................................. 310
time .......................................................................... 310
time_set .................................................................... 310
time_to_str ................................................................ 311
tool_get ..................................................................... 311
tool_set ..................................................................... 312
tx.............................................................................. 313
txs ............................................................................ 313
ty.............................................................................. 314
xviii RAPL-3 Reference Guide
tys.............................................................................315
tz...............................................................................316
tzs .............................................................................316
units_get....................................................................317
units_set....................................................................318
unlink .......................................................................318
unlock .......................................................................319
unmount ...................................................................319
unsetenv....................................................................319
utime.........................................................................320
v3_save_on_exit .........................................................320
v3_vars_save..............................................................321
va_arg_get..................................................................321
va_arg_type................................................................322
var_teach...................................................................323
vars_save...................................................................323
verstring_get ..............................................................323
waitpid ......................................................................324
WEXITSTATUS...........................................................325
WIFEXITED ...............................................................325
WIFSIGNALED...........................................................325
world_to_joint ............................................................326
world_to_motor ..........................................................326
write..........................................................................327
writeread ...................................................................327
writes ........................................................................328
WTERMSIG................................................................328
wx .............................................................................329
wxs............................................................................329
wy .............................................................................330
wys............................................................................330
wz .............................................................................331
wzs............................................................................331
xpulses_get ................................................................332
xpulses_set ................................................................332
xratio_get...................................................................333
xratio_set...................................................................333
xrot ...........................................................................333
xrots..........................................................................334
yaw............................................................................335
yaws..........................................................................335
yrot ...........................................................................336
yrots..........................................................................337
zero ...........................................................................338
zrot............................................................................338
zrots ..........................................................................339
APPENDICES
Signals..................................................................................341
Preface
This guide is a reference manual to the RAPL-3 programming language. It
contains a comprehensive description of the language including subroutines,
functions, and commands in the standard libraries.
This guide is for users who have a basic understanding of RAPL-3 or a good
understanding of programming concepts.
2 Preface
Documentation Conventions
This guide uses the following documentation conventions.
Text and Programming Code
Example Description Explanation
ready()
grip_close()
finish()
evenly
spaced
computer
font
Programming code. In syntax
sections, required characters that
must be included.
gripdist_set(distance)
motor(axis,pulses,c)
if expression
italics User supplied item. Can be simple
(integer, variable) or complex
(expression, statements)
align_X|align_Y
M_READ|M_WRITE
X|Y|Z
vertical pipe
or bar
A choice between two or more
items. One must be chosen unless
it is optional (in square brackets).
place[3]
message[2,2]
data[10,4,7]
square
brackets
in arrays
Required characters of array
syntax. Must be included.
grip_close([force])
home([axis][,axis])
...[flags] [x|X]...
square
brackets
in any other
part of code
Optional items in code. Can be
included or omitted depending on
the needs of the program.
lock(7)
...
unlock(7)
three dots
on one line
or
on three
lines
Omitted code of the example. A
place for additional material which
is not specified.
\ (backslash)
_ (underscore)
" (double quote)
character(s)
with
description(s)
in
parentheses.
Characters referred to in the text
which need to be clearly identified.
use with
to end
when here
bold Names of commands, functions,
keywords, etc. used in the text
which could be confused.
RAPL-3 Reference Guide 3
Commands and Keywords
The following documentation conventions are used for
all subroutines, functions, and commands in libraries
all flow control statements
other keywords (main, return, comment, sizeof)

name_of_command/keyword
Description A description of the functionality of this subroutine, function, command, control
statement, or keyword.
Details of usage.
Caution Any characteristics that could create a problem.
Syntax Required characters are in non-italic monospace font. Programmer-
supplied identifiers and constructs are in italics. Optional items are in [square
brackets]. Long lines may carry over onto a second line on the printed page, but
in a program must be written either on one line or with a \ (backslash) line
continuation character.
Subroutines, functions, and commands are given in declaration form.
Parameters
Arguments
A list with explanations and types.
Where a parameter is a standard-library defined enum or struct, the members
are listed.
Returns The return value of the function or command which also indicates success or
error.
Example An example of use in a program.
Result The example's result, if applicable.
See Also Any related RAPL-3 commands, functions, subroutines, statements, keywords, or
topics, described in this Reference Guide.
System Shell
Application Shell
An equivalent command in the CROS/RAPL-3 system shell or application shell,
described in the Robot Systems Sof.tware Documentation Guide.
RAPL-II Any similar RAPL-II commands.
Category The category of this and related commands which are listed in the category
section.

4 Preface
Related Resources
Related material can be found in these documents.
Release notes on the diskettes.
Robot Systems Software Documentation Guide
A guide for developing your robotic application using all components of your
robot system: arm, controller, teach pendant, personal computer, Robcomm3,
RAPL-3 programs, application shell, and system shell.
F3 Robot System Installation Guide
A465 Arm and C500 Controller User Guides
A255 Arm and C500 Controller User Guides

C H A P T E R 1
General Program Format
All RAPL-3 programs follow the same general format. Some elements are
required. Other elements are optional depending on the complexity of the
program.
6 General Program Format
Example 1: Basic Program in RAPL-II Style
A basic program can contain
only a main function
and follow a style similar to RAPL-II
implicit declarations of variables
familiar RAPL-II command names
main function
main ;; begin program
fast = 50 ;; implicitly declare and initialize integers
slow = 25
z = 1
speed(fast) ;; set speed
move(_safe) ;; move and implicitly declare cartesian location
do ;; begin do loop
appro(_a,5) ;; pick from location a, implicitly declare location
grip_open(100)
grip_finish()
move(_a)
finish()
grip_close(100)
grip_finish()
depart(5)
move(_safe) ;; move to safe location between pick and place
appro(_b,5) ;; place at location b, implicitly declare location
move(_b)
finish()
grip_open(100)
grip_finish()
depart(5)
move(_safe) ;; move to safe location between place and pick
z = z + 1 ;; increment counter in loop
until z == 10 ;; condition to end do loop
end main ;; end program
Example 2: Basic Program in Preferred RAPL-3 Style
A basic program can contain
a main function
a subroutine
and follow the preferred style of RAPL-3
explicit declarations of variables, including teachables
subroutine
main function
sub io(int out_channel, int out_state, int in_channel)
int in_state
output(out_channel, out_state)
do
delay(250)
input(in_channel, in_state)
until (in_state) == 1
end sub
main
int i ;; explicitly declare variables
teachable int fast, slow, cycles ;; explicitly declare teachable variables
teachable cloc safe, a, b ;; explicitly declare teachable locations
move(safe)
speed(fast)
for i = 1 to cycles ;; use a for loop
;; cycles is teachable, set outside
appro(a,5)
grip_open(100)
io(1,1,2)
speed(slow)
move(a)
grip_close(100)
depart(5)
speed(fast)
move(safe)
appro(b,5)
io(3,1,4)
speed(slow)
move(b)
grip_open(100)
depart(5)
speed(fast)
move(safe)
end for
end main
The Main Program
Every RAPL-3 program contains a main function.

main
Description A required function for each program. Requires main and end main to indicate
the beginning and the end of the main function.
main is the place in the program where execution begins.
The main function may not call itself.
Syntax
main
statement(s)
end main
Returns Main does not have to explicitly return a value. By default, 0 (zero) is returned.
Any integer could be returned.
Example
main
teachable cloc pick, place
move(pick)
grip_close()
move(place)
grip_open()
end main
RAPL-II RAPL-II did not have a function or structure similar to main. RAPL-II's STOP
command had a purpose similar to end main.

Lines of a Program
A RAPL-3 program consists of a number of lines of ASCII text. Statements and
declarations are terminated by the line end.
Line Continuation
To continue on the next line, end a line with the \ (backslash) character. For
example
a = b + c + d \
+ e + f
is read as one statement.
Without the continuation character
a = b + c + d
+ e + f
the first part of the statement ends at the end of the first line and is read as a
statement. The second part is a fragment which causes a syntax error when
compiling.
Lines that end with , (a comma) are automatically considered to be continued.
For example,
printf(The coordinates are {}, {}, {}\n,
x, y, z)
Comments
A comment starts with ;; (two semicolons) and extends to the end of the line. A
comment can start at the beginning of a line or after some program code. For
example:
;; calculate the position error:
x_error = x_pos - desired_x_pos ;; for the x-axis
y_error = y_pos - desired_y_pos ;; for the y-axis
z_error = z_pos - desired_z_pos ;; for the z axis
Labels
A statement can be marked with a special identifier called a label. The label has ::
(two colons) after the identifier. A labels is used as the target of a goto statement.
Syntax
label_identifier:: statement
where
label_identifier is the name of the label and follows the rules for identifiers,
and
statement is the statement line being labelled.
The statement can be an empty line.
Examples
my_label:: current_location = num
start_again::
Keywords
The following identifiers are keywords of RAPL-3. They are reserved for the RAPL-
3 language and cannot be redefined. In particular, the following keywords
cannot be used as the name of any variable, subroutine, function, or command:
and
break
_builtin
case
cloc
command
comment
const
continue
do
else
elseif
end
enum
except
export
float
for
func
global
gloc
goto
if
ignore
import
int
libversion
loop
main
mod
not
of
or
ploc
private
proto
raise
resume
return
retry
sizeof
static
step
string
struct
sub
teachable
then
to
try
typedef
union
unteachable
until
var
void
volatile
while
with
C H A P T E R 2
Data Types and Variables
RAPL-3 programs can work with many different types of data and also permits
user-defined data types. This chapter presents the basic data types supported by
RAPL-3, and goes on to look at the kinds of user-defined types that can be
constructed.
14 Data Types and Variables
Basic Data Types
RAPL-3 supports the following basic data types.
Name Description Size (bytes)
int
32-bit signed integer
(Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647)
4
float
IEEE single precision floating point
(Range: 1.7 x 10
38
)
4
string
variable length string
(Range: 0 to 65535 8-bit characters)
4 + number of
characters
cloc
cartesian location 36
ploc
precision location 36
void
used for forming generic pointers

int
An int, or integer, is a signed number without any decimal or fractional part.
Examples: 0, 1, 23, 456, -7, -89
float
A float, or floating point number, is a number with a decimal or fractional part
and an optional exponent. A float has up to seven significant digits.
Examples: 4.75, -99.99, 1.0, 3.141593, 1.0e10
string
A string is a set of characters: uppercase or lowercase letters, digits,
punctuation and other graphic characters, and the blank space. In a string, a
digit is a character and does not have numeric value as it does in a number (int
or float). RAPL-3 does not have a character data type.
cloc
A cloc, or cartesian location, represents a point in the robot arm workspace
defined by cartesian co-ordinates. Coordinates have three translational elements
(along axes) x, y, and z, and three rotational elements (around axes) z, y, and x.
The values of a cloc are independent of arm position and arm type.
ploc
A ploc, or precision location, represents a point in the robot arm workspace
defined by increments of rotational movement, specifically encoder counts, of
each joint of the arm and any additional axes (j1, j2, j3, j4, j5, j6, j7, j8). The
values of a ploc are dependent on the robot.
gloc [Not for general user]
void
The void type is used to form void pointers (pointers that can point to any type).
void@ x
Void pointers are assignment compatible with all other types of pointers.
Identifiers
An identifier is used for the name of a variable, type, subroutine, function, or
command.
Character Set
An identifier begins with a letter. This may be followed by zero or more letters,
digits, or _ (underscore) characters.
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
_
Case
Letters may be either uppercase (ABCDE), lowercase (abcde), or mixed (AbCdE).
RAPL-3 is case-sensitive with identifiers. For example, the following are all
different identifiers.
x ;; lowercase
X ;; uppercase
symbol ;; lowercase
SYMBOL ;; uppercase
sYmBoL ;; mixed
SyMbOl ;; mixed
Length
An identifier may be any length, but only the first 32 characters are significant.
For example, the following are not different identifiers.
location_sensor_data_collection_1
location_sensor_data_collection_2
Examples
There are many possibilities of valid identifiers.
Valid
a ;; a single letter
num ;; several letters
my_symbol ;; letters with underscore
MySymbol ;; letters of different cases
x3 ;; letter with digit
rack_loc_12 ;; letters, underscores, digits
Invalid
3a ;; begins with a digit, not a letter
my$symbol ;; uses a character not in the valid character set
&num ;; uses a character not in the valid character set
;; and does not begin with a letter
Declarations
This section details the declaration of: int, float, string, cloc, and ploc. For the
declaration of arrays of these types, see the Arrays section. For const, see the
Initializers section.
Each variable must be declared as one specific type of variable (int, float, string,
cloc, ploc, const). A declaration states the type of variable and the name of the
variable.
You can declare a variable explicitly or implicitly. It is good programming practice
to explicitly declare all variables.
Explicit Declarations
When you declare a variable explicitly, you list it in a declaration statement
before you use it in the program.
Variables being declared as the same type can be listed in the same declaration,
separated by commas.
Syntax
type identifier
type identifier, identifier, identifier ...
where
type is the data type, and
identifier is the name of the variable and follows the rules for identifiers.
Examples
Type Example Description
int
int i
i is an integer
float
float a,b
a and b are floats
string
string[10] message
message is a string that can hold 10 or fewer
characters
cloc
cloc pick_1,
place_1
pick_1 and place_1 are cartesian locations
ploc
ploc pick_2,
place_2
pick_2 and place_2 are precision locations

Implicit Declarations
When you declare a variable implicitly, you indicate the variable's type with a
prefix before its name when you use it in the program for the first time.
If a variable is used without having been explicitly declared, the compiler looks
for an implicit declaration prefix character on the variable name to determine the
type of variable. If there is no prefix character, the compiler defines the variable
as the default type, an int, and issues a warning.
In general, implicit declarations should be avoided. You should always explicitly
declare variables.
Syntax
[prefix_character]identifier
where
prefix_character is the character indicating the data type, and
Implicit Declaration Prefix Characters
Prefix Character Type Example
none int
a = 2
% percent sign float
%b = 10.25
$ dollar sign string[64]
$m = "Robot working.\n"
_ underscore cloc
here _z
# number sign ploc
here #y
Examples
Type Example Description
int
e = c + d
e is defined as an int, if it has not been seen before.
float
%h = f * g
h is defined as a float.
string
$notice9 =
"stop"
notice9 is defined as a string[64].
cloc
here(_place22)
place22 is defined as a cloc.
ploc
here(#material3
3)
material33 is defined as a ploc.
Implicit with Explicit
If an implicit declaration prefix is used in an explicit declaration statement, the
implicit prefix is ignored by the compiler. For example,
float %b ;; the variable b is declared as a float
float $c ;; the variable c is declared as a float
float #d ;; the variable d is declared as a float
Identifiers
The prefix character indicates the type of declaration. It is not part of the
identifier, the variable's name. For example, if _m was used in a statement, a cloc
with the name m was defined. A later statement with #m causes an error, the
same way that cloc m followed by ploc m causes an error.
Scope
Two variables with the same scope cannot have the same name. For definitions of
scope, see the Scope section of the Subprogram chapter.
Teachables
Teachable variables that are declared inside a sub, func, or command must not
have the same name as any teachable outer-frame variable.
Strings
The string type is essentially a character array with a fixed size.
The string type must always have a subscript, indicated by [ ] (square brackets).
String[number]
Usually, the subscript contains a number to specify the maximum length of
string that can be stored in it, such as string[10] or string[64].
Syntax
string[number] identifier
where
string and the square brackets are required,
number is the character size of the string, and
String[ ]
In some circumstances, the subscript can be empty.
string[]
This undimensioned string declaration can be used only in the following
circumstances.
A simple single string being initialized. When string[] is used, the compiler
determines the size of the string. In this example, the compiler makes notice9
a string[18].
string[] notice9 = End of work cycle.
A function formal parameter or var parameter.
func int strlen(string[])
sub str_append(var string[] dst, string[] src)
The target of a pointer.
string[]@ sptr
For a table of pointers to strings of unknown length, use
string[]@[5] greek = {alpha, beta, gamma, delta,
epsilon}

Notes:
A RAPL-3 string is actually stored as a length, a limit, and an array of
characters. The length value indicates how many characters are actually valid.
Strings can be created with at most space for 65,532 characters. The limit value
indicates how many characters there is actually room for. For example, if we
have a variable:
string[10] s
then s is initially created with its length set to 0 (no characters; the empty string)
and its limit set to 12. The limit is 12 because RAPL-3 always allocates storage in
units of 1 word (or 4 characters); string[10] actually needs 1 word for the length
and limit, and an additional 3 words for the characters (which actually is 3 * 4 or
12 characters in size.) After this statement:
s = hello!
the length of s is set to 6, and the characters h, e, l, l, o and ! have been
stored in the character part of the string.
Termination
RAPL-3 does not use any string termination character. The variable is declared
and the string of characters is packed into the variable.
Concatenation
To concatenate (link together to form a longer string), use the str_append
subroutine with string variables. The + (plus) operator can be used to
concatenate string constants.
Arrays
An array is a collection of data objects where all are the same data type and all
use the same identifier but each has a unique subscript.
Syntax
base_type[ subscript_list ] identifier
where
base_type is the data type of each element in the array,
subscript_list is a comma-separated list of one or more constant expressions
defining each dimension, and
A subscript must be a constant expression, such as a simple integer constant.
The compiler must be able to compute the value of each constant expression at
compile time.
Types
You can have an array of any type or an arrays of arrays.
Dimensions
There is no limit on the number of dimensions allowed, except for teachable
arrays. See Teachables.
Numbering
In RAPL-3, numbering begins with 0.
Declaration Number of
Elements
Numbering
int[4] a
4 a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3]
int[10] a
10 a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4], a[5], a[6], a[7], a[8], a[9]
int[20] a
20 a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4], a[5], a[6], a[7], a[8], a[9],
a[10], a[11], a[12], a[13], a[14], a[15], a[16], a[17], a[18], a[19]
int[100]
a
100 a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4], a[5], a[6], a[7], a[8], a[9],
through to
a[90], a[91], a[92], a[93], a[94], a[95], a[96], a[97], a[98], a[99]
Review of Strings
Example Description
string[30] z
a string that can hold 30 or fewer characters
One Dimensional Arrays
Example Description
int[5] a
an array of 5 integers
a[0], a[1], a[2], a[3], a[4]
float[10] b
an array of 10 floats
b[0], b[1], b[2], ... b[9]
ploc[20] c
an array of 20 precision locations
c[0], c[1], c[2], ... c[19]
string[30] [10] d
an array of 10 strings
d[0], d[1], d[2], ... d[9]
each can hold 30 or fewer characters
Two Dimensional Arrays
Example Description
int[5,10] e
a 2-dimensional array of 50 integers
e[0,0] ... e[0,9]
... ...
e[4,0] ... e[4,9]
float[10,20] f
a 2-dimensional array of 200 floats
f[0,0] ... f[0,19]
... ...
f[9,0] ... f[9,19]
ploc[5,10] g
a 2-dimensional array of 50 precision locations
g[0,0] ... g[0,9]
... ...
g[4,0] ... g[4,9]
string[20][5,10]
h
a 2-dimensional array of 50 strings
h[0,0] ... h[0,9]
... ...
h[4,0] ... h[4,9]
int[10] [5] i
a 2-dimensional array of 50 integers
same as int[5,10] e
brackets are applied from left to right
float[20][10] j
a 2-dimensional array of 200 floats
same as float[10,20] f
brackets are applied from left to right
string[20] [10]
[5] k
a 2-dimensional array of 50 strings
same as string[20] [5,10] h
string[50][23 +
7] m
an array of 30 strings,

Multi Dimensional Arrays
Example Description
int[2,2,2] n
a 3-dimensional array of integers
n[0,0,0], n[0,0,1],
n[0,1,0], n[0,1,1],
n[1,0,0], n[1,0,1],
n[1,1,0], n[1,1,1]
float[5,5,5,5] p
a 4-dimensional array of integers
p[0,0,0,0] to p[4,4,4,4]

Declarations
You cannot implicitly declare an array.
However, if you use the implicit declaration syntax in a statement with an array,
you will not cause a problem, if the array is previously declared and the implicit
declaration character matches the base type of the array. For example,
ploc[16,16] a
...
here(#a[1,1])
Teachables
A variable that is teachable is accessible from outside the program.
Use
Teachables provide an easy way, outside the program, to modify a value for a
variable, store that value, and use the value in a program. Using this feature
avoids writing (hard-coding) values in the program and having to re-write the
program to change the values. It also avoids storing the values in a custom user-
designed file and having to carefully edit the file to change values and include a
routine in the program to read that custom data file.
Data about teachable variables and their values are stored in the variable file.
When you run a program, the operating system takes the programs variable file
and uses its values to initialize the variables in the program just before running.
Variable (v3) File
Data about teachable variables are stored in the variable file (also known as a v3
file). You modify data, or teach locations and other variables, using the teach
pendant or the application shell.
You can create a variable file in a number of ways.
Refreshing from the Program. When your program file is in a CROS directory
(in CROS-500 or CROSnt), ashs refresh command reviews the program and
adds any teachable variables of the program to ashs database. After
assigning values (including teaching locations) to the teachables in the
database, this new data is saved to the variable file. This method is used if
you write your program before teaching your locations.
Building Independently. You can build a variable file completely in a CROS
directory (in CROS-500 or CROSnt) using ash or the teach pendant. With
ashs or the teach pendants database, you create variables and assign values
to them. When you are finished this data is saved to in the variable file. This
method is used if you teach your locations before writing your program.
See the Robot System Software Documentation Guide chapters on the application
shell.
Declarations
You make a variable teachable by adding the keyword teachable before the data
type at declaration. Teachables are not initialized.
Syntax
teachable type identifier
teachable type identifier, identifier, identifier ...
where
teachable is a necessary keyword
type is the data type, and

Examples
Example Description
teachable int cycles
cycles is an teachable integer
teachable float a, b, c
a, b, and c are teachable floats
teachable string[10] note
note is a teachable string that can hold 10 or fewer
characters
teachable cloc pick_1,
place_1
pick_1 and place_1 are teachable cartesian
locations
teachable ploc pick_2,
place_2
pick_2 and place_2 are teachable precision
locations
teachable int[3] step
step is a teachable array of 3 integers: step[0],
step[1], step[2]
teachable float[5,5]
delta
delta is a teachable two-dimensional array of
floats: delta[0,0] ... delta[4,4]
teachable ploc[2,10] spot
spot is a teachable two-dimensional array of
precision locations: spot[0,0] . . . spot[1,9]
Limitations
Data Types
There are limits on which data types are teachable. Simple, scalar variables can
be teachable. One-dimensional arrays of variables can be teachable. Two-
dimensional arrays, except string[n], can be teachable. Three-dimensional and
higher dimensional arrays cannot be teachable. The void type cannot be
teachable.
= can be teachable
= cannot be teachable
int float string[n] cloc ploc gloc void
simple

one-dimensional
array

two-dimensional
array

three-dimensional
or higher array

Not Initialized
A variable cannot be both teachable and initialized. You cannot write
teachable int a = 5
teachable string[64] message_12 = Error recovery underway..
Storage Class: Static
Variables which are declared as teachable are static. They should not be used in
recursive routines except as read only.
Defaults and Unteachables
Scope and Declaration Defaults
The following variables are teachable by default.
Local (within a subprogram or main) and Implicitly Declared
clocs, and plocs
sub
...
here(_point)
end sub
main
...
here(_place)
end main
Outer-Frame (outside all subprograms and main) and Explicitly Declared
clocs, and plocs
1-dimensional and 2-dimensional arrays of clocs, and plocs
ploc start_point
cloc[10] point
sub
...
end sub
main
...
end main
All other variable types are unteachable by default.
Unteachable Declaration
A variable can be declared as unteachable with the unteachable keyword. This
can be used to make an outer frame location that is not teachable, for example
unteachable cloc[10] point
sub
...
end sub
main
...
end main
User-Defined Types
A type can be called by a user-specified name. Typedefs can only be global,
imported, or outer-frame. There are no local typedefs. Typedefs within a
subprogram are available to sections outside of that subprogram.
Syntax
typedef identifier type
where
typedef is required,
identifier is the name of the type and follows the rules for identifiers, and
type is the keyword indicating the data type.
Examples
Example Description
typedef alpha
int[10]
...
alpha a,b,c
.
.
.
alpha[3] x
alpha is an array of 10 ints
a, b and c are all int arrays
a[0], a[1], a[2],...a[9]
b[0], b[1], b[2],...b[9]
c[0], c[1], c[2],...c[9]
x is an array of 3 alphas
x[0,0], x[0,1], x[0,2],...x[0,9]
x[1,0], x[1,1], x[1,2],...x[1,9]
x[2,0], x[2,1], x[2,2],...x[1,9]
Pointers
A pointer is a variable that holds the address of another variable. A pointer is
declared to point to a specific data type.
Syntax
basetype@ identifier
where
basetype is the keyword indicating the data type.
@ is required and immediately follows the basetype, and
identifier is the name of the type and follows the rules for identifiers.
Examples
Example Description
int@ a
a is a pointer to an int
float@ b, c
b and c are pointers to floats
string[20]@ d
d is a pointer to a 20 character string
cloc@ e
e is a pointer to a cloc
int[10]@ f
f is a pointer to an array of 10 ints
int[3,2]@[4] g
g is an array of 4 pointers, each of which points to a two-
dimensional array of ints
Note that in all cases, complex declarations are applied from left to right.
Dereferencing
Pointers can be dereferenced with the @ operator. For example, if the variable xp
is of type int@, then xp@ refers to the value that the pointer xp points to.
Address-of Operator
A pointer to a data object can be constructed using the & (address-of) operator.
For example, if x is an integer, then &x is an int@ which points to the value of x.
Enumerated Types
It is often convenient to refer to the values of a variable by name, rather than by
number. For example, when referring to the colour of a test-tube, we can define:
enum
red,
orange,
yellow,
green,
blue
end enum colour_type
This defines type colour_type as type int, and creates the special constants red,
orange, yellow, green and blue, which will have values 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4,
respectively. These constants can be used anywhere a numerical constant would
be appropriate.
This allows a particular value to be associated with an identifier in the list.
Syntax
enum
item_list
end enum enum_identifier
where
enum and end enum are required,
enum_identifier is the name of the enum,
and
item_list is a comma-separated list of items, where each item can be a simple
identifier
identifier
or a statement
identifier = constant_expression
Examples
Example Description
enum
num_a,
num_b,
num_c
end enum x
x is an int
num_a is the constant 0
num_b is the constant 1
num_c is the constant 2
enum
bit_0 = 1,
bit_1 = 2,
bit_3 = 4
end enum y
y is an int
bit_0 is the constant 1
enum
x,
y,
z
end enum letters
This is illegal after the previous two declarations. The
constant identifiers must be unique within the same
scope.
Record Structures
Records structures (like structs in C) are declared as:
struct
field_list
end struct
Where field_list is a list of 1 or more entries of the following form. Struct
fieldnames can be anything except a type name.
type identifier_list
For example:
typedef Colour struct
float red, green, blue
end struct ;; declares a type called
;; Colour with fields called
;; red, green and blue
typedef my_record struct
int i ;; values in a linked list
my_record@ next ;; a pointer to this structure
;; itself, for creating a
;; linked list
end struct
Unions
Unions (like unions in C) are possible.
union
field_list
end union
Where field_list is a list of declarations which can include int, float, string[], cloc,
ploc, or a complex type like struct or union.
union
int a
float b
end union xxx
typedef omega union
int a
float b
end union
Unions are referenced like structures, but have one important difference. All of
the fields of a structure are located in distinct locations in memory, allowing all
fields of a structure to hold values at the same time. However, in unions, all
fields are located at the same memory location. Hence in variable xxx above,
writing into field a of the union also alters the value of field b. Unions are
typically used where a block of information may hold more than one kind of data.
Initializers
You can declare RAPL-3 variables and initialize their values at the same time.
Initialization is useful for building tables of data needed by a program during its
execution.
The general format of a declaration with an initializer is:
type identifier = initializer_expression
For simple variables, initializer_expression is a simple constant expression.
More complex variables can also be initialized, as shown in the examples below.
Array and structure initializers are delimited by { } (braces). Note the use of { }
(braces) for constructing each dimension of an array and the contents of each
structure. Initializers must exactly match the size of the variable being initialized.
int a = 3 ;; a is an int
;; with initial value 3
int a = 3, b = 4, c = 5 ;; a, b, and c are ints
;; with initial values 3, 4, and 5
;; respectively
float d = 2.0 ;; d is a float
;; with initial value 2.0
int[2] e = { 0, 1 } ;; e is an array of ints
;; e[0] = 0 and e[1] = 1
string[16][3] f_string = { \
No error(s),
Warning error(s),
Fatal errors(s) \
} ;; f_string is an array of 3 strings
;; f_string[0] contains No error(s)
;; f_string[1] contains Warning error(s)
;; f_string[2] contains Fatal error(s)
struct
int a
float b
end struct stv = { 1, 2.7182 }
;; stv is an initialized struct
float[2,3] fa = { \
{ 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 },
{ 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 } \
} ;; two dimensional array initialization
The compiler accepts initializers like:
string[]@[2] list = { yes, no }
and correctly generates the required data structures, but does not accept:
int@[2] list2 = { 1, 2 }
For initializing clocs and plocs with cloc{} and ploc{}, see the Location Constant
section of the Constants chapter.
An initialized entity cannot be teachable.
Named Constants
It is frequently useful to be able to define a named constant in a program.
RAPL-3 provides a const keyword for this purpose. The format of a constant
definition is:
const identifier = value
Note that it is not necessary to specify a type for a const definition; the compiler
is able to deduce what type you are referring to by looking at the specified value.
Examples of const definitions are:
const x = 123 ;; an integer constant
const y = 10.3 ;; a floating point constant
const z = hello ;; a string constant
Only integer, floating point and string constants may be defined in this way. You
may use a named constant anywhere it would be legal to use the actual constant
itself. For example, if the following definitions are in your program, then this
section of code:
print(hello, 123, 10.3)
is exactly the same as this section of code:
print(z, x, y)
Typically, named constants are used for setting configurable values in a program.
For example, if a robot program rinses a dispense head some number of times in
between operations, one might have a const definition like this at the top of the
program:
const NUMBER_OF_RINSES = 3
This way the behaviour of the program can be changed by just changing the
constant, and code that refers to this number can use NUMBER_OF_RINSES,
which is much more obvious than just 3.
Sizeof() Function
The sizeof() function determines the size of a type or a variable. The size of any
type (even complex types) can be determined. As a built-in, sizeof is a keyword.
sizeof()
Description Returns the number of words that the type or variable occupies.
(Note that 1 word = 4 bytes = 32 bits.)
Used to determine the size of a type or variable.
Syntax sizeof( type )
sizeof( variable )
Parameters
Arguments
type a data type
variable any variable
Returns Returns an integer of the number of words occupied.
Example
int ia = 1, ib = 9999
string[] sa = "a", sb = "Characters in this string are 32"
struct
float red, orange, yellow
int green, blue, violet
string[50] brown, black
end struct color
print("int size is ", sizeof(int), "\n")
print("ia size is ", sizeof(ia), "\n")
print("ib size is ", sizeof(ib), "\n")
print("string[] size is ", sizeof(string[]), "\n")
print("sa size is ", sizeof(sa), "\n")
print("sb size is ", sizeof(sb), "\n")
print("color size is ", sizeof(color), "\n")
Result
int size is 1
ia size is 1
ib size is 1
string[] size is 1
sa size is 2
sb size is 9
color size is 34
See Also sizeof_str number of words to store a string
str_len number of characters in a string
Dimof() Function
dimof()
Description Returns the dimensionality of an array.
Syntax
dimof(array)
Parameters
Arguments
array name of array
Example
int [20] x
int [5,10] z
print (dimensionality of x is , dimof(x), \n)
print (dimensionality of z is , dimof(z), \n)
print (dimensionality of z[3] is , dimof(z[3]), \n)
Result
dimensionality of x is 20
dimensionality of z is 5
dimensionality of z[3] is 10
C H A P T E R 3
Expressions, Assignment, and
Operators
Consider the following short RAPL-3 program:
[1] main
[2] int x
[3] x = 1
[4] while (x <= 10)
[5] printf(x = {}\n, x)
[6] x = x + 1
[7] end while
[8] end main
This program counts from 1 to 10, printing out the value of x each time through
the while loop (see chapter 5 for more information about while loops.)
This short example has 4 expressions, 5 variable references and 2 assignment
statements.
An expression is a part of a program statement that calculates a value. The
following are the expressions in the above example:
1
x <= 10
x
x + 1
A variable reference is just a point in the program that refers to the value of a
variable or stores a value in a variable. In the above program, there are 2 places
where the value of x is modified or assigned (lines 3 and 6) and 3 places where
the value of x is used (lines 4, 5 and 6).
An assignment statement is one that changes the value of a variable. Once
again, this happens at lines 3 (where the value of x is set to 1) and 6 (where the
value of x is incremented.)
This chapter presents the basic form of a variable reference, looks at how
assignment statements are constructed and discusses the operators (like +. -,
etc.) that are available for constructing expressions.
36 Expressions, Assignments and Operators
Variable References
Variable references have the form:
variable_name [ modifiers ]
Valid modifiers are:
Symbol Operation
[ index-list ] array indexing
.fieldname struct element selection
@ pointer de-referencing
Variable references are read strictly from left-to-right, and modifiers are applied
in that order.
;; declarations for these examples
int i,j ;; an integer
float[10,10] a ;; 2-dimensional array of floats
int@[100] api ;; a 100-element array of pointers to ints
int[100]@ bpi ;; a pointer to a 100-element array of ints
struct ;; st is a simple struct
int a
string[] s
end struct st
;; variable references
... j ... ;; the variable j
... a[i,j] ... ;; element [i,j] of array a
... api[j]@ ... ;; what is pointed to by
;; the jth pointer in the array api
... bpi@[i] ;; the ith integer in the array that
;; is pointed to by bpi
... st.s ... ;; the string part of struct st
Note that because variable modifiers are applied strictly from right to left, the use
of a variable resembles the reverse of its declaration; for example, bpi is declared
as int[100]@ bpi and is used as bpi@[whatever].
Assignment statements
An assignment statement allows the value of a variable to be modified and has
the form:
variable = expression
or
variable simple-op = expression
Where simple-op is a simple binary operator like +, -, *, etc. This second form of
an assignment statement is interpreted to mean:
variable = variable simple-op expression
This allows statements like a = a + 5 to be written more compactly, as a += 5.
In addition, the special operators
++
--
can be used as assignment operators to increment and decrement the value of a
variable. For example,
x++
is a shorthand way of saying
x = x + 1
The ++ and -- operators may not be used inside an expression. Constructs like
a = b++
are not allowed.
You can assign an integer variable a floating-point value. For example
int i
i = 1.6
In this case, the value is truncated back to an integer, and i is assigned the value
1. The compiler warns of float to int truncation (unless warnings are disabled).
Void pointers are assignment compatible with all other kinds of pointers.
All other types (string, ploc, cloc, arrays and structs) must match exactly for an
assignment statement to be legal. For example:
int i,j ;; some variable definitions
int @ip
float a,b
float@ fp
int[100] x,y
string name1,name2
void @vp
...
i = j ;; these are all legal
a = b
a = i
i = a
x = y
name1 = name2
vp = ip
fp = vp
x = name1 ;; these are not legal
y = i
fp = ip
Operators
The following operators are supported, and are listed in order of increasing
precedence. Within one level of precedence, operators are left-associative.
In the table, the Form column indicates whether the operator is a binary operator
("a op b") or a unary operator ("op a"). The Accepts column lists the type of
arguments the operator accepts (I = integer, F = float, S = string, P = ploc, C =
cloc, @ = pointer), and the Yields column lists the type of result the operator
produces. Note that the special character T denotes a value that is either integer
0 or 1, and L denotes anything which can reasonably appear on the left-hand-
side of an assignment statement.
In cases where a binary operator has operands of different types, RAPL-3 will at
most promote an int operand to float. If the types still do not match, the
compiler will signal a type mismatch error. The one exception to this rule is that
pointers may be compared for equality with zero.
Care must be taken in the use of mixed types. For example:
int i ;; variable declarations
float f
... i/2 ... ;; gives an integer result
... f/2 ... ;; gives a floating point result
... i/f ... ;; gives a floating point result
... f/i ... ;; gives a floating point result
Sub, func, and command parameters are also checked for type match. As for
expressions, arguments can be automatically converted from int to float. Also,
cloc and ploc parameters can be automatically converted to glocs.
It is legal to compare pointers to 0 (NULL). It is also legal to compare pointers of
the same type, and pointers of any type to void pointers.
Symbol Form Accepts Yields Definition
||, or binary IF@ T logical OR
&&, and binary IF@ T logical AND
| binary I I bitwise boolean OR
^ binary I I bitwise boolean exclusive-OR
& binary I I bitwise boolean AND
== binary IFS@ T is equal to
!= binary IFS@ T is not equal to
> binary IFS T greater than
>= binary IFS T greater than or equal to
< binary IFS T less than
<= binary IFS T less than or equal to
<< binary I I logical shift left
>> binary I I logical shift right
+ binary IFS same addition,
string concatenation of constant strings
- binary IF same subtraction
* binary IF same multiplication
/ binary IF same division
mod binary I I remainder
~ unary I I bitwise boolean NOT
!, not unary IF@ T logical NOT
- unary IF same negation
& unary L @ address of
(expr) - - - parenthesized expression
func_id(args) - - - function call
Type Casts
Type casts explicitly force the compiler to convert an expression of one type into
another type, and take the form
< type > expression
For example, if we have
int a
and
float b
then
a = <int> b
does not give a truncation warning, since we have told the compiler explicitly to
convert b to an integer.
Note that not all type casts are possible. For example, the compiler cannot be
forced to convert a cartesian location into an integer. In general, you can cast:
From To
an int or a float an int or a float
any pointer type any other pointer type
any location type a generic location (gloc)
a generic location (gloc) any location type
C H A P T E R 4
Constants
For the most part, constants in RAPL-3 expressions are represented very
straightforwardly. For example, the number 123 can be written exactly as it
looks in the code of a RAPL-3 program. However, RAPL-3 also allows
hexadecimal integer constants, exponential notion for floating point constants,
string constants and location constants. This chapter presents the way in which
these various kinds of constants are constructed.
42 Control Flow
Numeric Constants
Integer Constants
Any number that has neither a decimal point nor an exponent is an integer
constant by default. Integer constants must lie in the range -2147483648 to
+2147483647. Examples:
0
1000001
32768
Hexadecimal notation is also permitted. This consists of 0x followed by a
sequence of digits (0 through 9, or a through f). Examples:
0x7fffffff ;; +2147483647
0x1000 ;; 4096
0xffffffff ;; -1
Binary Notation is also permitted. This consists of 0b followed by a sequence of
binary digits (0 or 1).
Alphanumeric Constants
Alphanumeric constants are really just another form of integer constant. They
permit the value of an ASCII code to be used in an expression by enclosing the
character with the ' (single quote) characters. For example, in
x = 'Z'
x is assigned the ASCII value for uppercase Z which is 90 (or 0x5a).
Floating Point Constants
A floating point numeric constant takes the form:
mantissa [ E|e [ +|- ] exponent ]
The mantissa is a set of digits which may contain a decimal point. The base and
exponent are optional. The base may be uppercase or lowercase (E or e). If not
defined, the exponent is zero by default. The exponent is 1 or 2 digits. The sign,
+ or , is optional. If not defined, the sign is + (positive) by default.
Examples:
0.0
1.
.2
1231.232
1e10
1E-5
.2e+6
1.5e+38
String Constants
String constants begin and end with the " (double quote) character and can be
any length.
Within the string, the \ (backslash) character is used to form a sequence to
represent the " character and other special ASCII codes. The following \ escape
sequences are defined:
Sequence Represents
\
" the double quote character
\\
\ the backslash character itself
\a
BELL ASCII BELL (bell, character 7).
\b
BS ASCII BS (backspace, character 8)
\e
ESC ASCII ESC (escape, character 27)
\f
FF ASCII FF (form feed, character 12)
\n
LF the end-of-line character. RAPL-3 uses the ASCII LF
(linefeed, character 10) as the end of line character. For
character output this is usually automatically converted into a
CR-LF (carriage return line feed) sequence.
\r
CR ASCII CR (carriage return, character 13)
\t
TAB ASCII TAB (horizontal tab, character 9)
\v
VT ASCII VT (vertical tab, character 11)
\ddd the ASCII code represented by the three decimal digits ddd
Examples:
"This is a test. \n"
A string with a LF at the end, which causes the cursor to move to the next line at
the beginning.
"This is \007 a test."
A string with a BELL character (ASCII code 7) in the middle which causes the
terminal emulator to beep.
"\\He said, \"The robot moves!\""
A string with the backslash sequence and two double quote sequences which
prints as: \He said "The robot moves!"
String constants can be concatenated (linked together to form a longer string)
with the + (plus) operator. Note that the + operator only works on string
constants and cannot be used to concatenate string variables.
Data + Test
is the same as
DataTest
44 Control Flow
String constants can also be used as actual parameters of subprograms. If an
attempt is made to use a string constant as a var parameter to a subprogram,
the compiler will generate a warning (since it is surely wrong to allow writing to a
string constant.)
Location Constants
You can initialize cloc and ploc variables. The RAPL-3 compiler has built-in
functions: cloc{} for generating cloc constants, and ploc{} for generating ploc
constants. All of the arguments to cloc{} or ploc{} must be constant expressions
and the result is a constant expression that can be used in a variable
initialization.
The format of cloc{} is:
cloc{ flags, x, y, z, zrot, yrot, xrot, e1, e2 }
Where flags specifies extra information about the location, x, y, and z are the
translational coordinates along the world axes, zrot, yrot, and xrot are
orientational coordinates around world axes, and e1 and e2 are the coordinates
for extra axes such as track. The argument flags must be an int constant
expression and all other arguments are float constants.
An example of cloc{} is the following definition:
cloc my_tool = cloc{0, 0.0, 0.0, 10.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0}
;; tool transform for use with the tool_set() command.
The format of ploc{} is:
ploc{ machtype, flags, a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7, a8 }
Where machtype is the machine type (each type of machine, F3, A465, A255, ...,
has a different geometry and configuration resulting in different encoder counts
for a given location), flags specifies extra information about the location, and a1
to a8 specify the number of encoder pulses from zero of the desired position for
each axis. The arguments machtype, flags, and a1 to a8 are integer constant
expressions.
An example of ploc{} is:
ploc start_point = ploc{mc_a465, 0, 3500, 2800, 1000, 4000,
2500, 1500}
;; initialized precision location
A word of warning: initialized clocs are useful for specifying tool transforms and
related information. It is, however, very dangerous to hand-construct plocs and
command to robot to move to them. This is because the robot cannot physically
move to any arbitrary joint configuration, and may collide with itself or objects in
the workspace. If you must hand-construct locations, use extreme care.
46 Control Flow
C H A P T E R 5
Control Flow
When a program executes, generally the computer executes one line, then the
next, then the next. In order to make a program do useful things for example,
to repeat a particular task 10 times we must be able to alter the way in which
control passes from line to line of the program.
This section deals with statements that alter the sequence in which the
statements in a program execute, allowing loops and conditional statements.
48 Control Flow
break
Description Exit from a looping construct to the statement immediately following the looping
construct (the statement immediately following until, end while, end for, or end
loop).
Can be used to exit from the following looping constructs: do, while, for, or loop.
Often used with a condition such as an if or if-else statement.
If loops are nested, break exits from only the innermost do, while, for, or loop
statement that encloses the break.
Syntax break
Context while ( expression_1 )
...
if ( expression_2 )
break
end if
...
end while
Example A loop that counts to 10.
int i
i = 0
loop
if i == 10
break
end if
i++
end loop
Break exits from the loop when i equals 10.
See Also continue, do, for, loop, while
case
Description Executes one of several statements, depending on the value of an integer
expression. Note that you can implement any case statement with a series of if
statements; the case statement just provides a compact way to select between
several statements based on a value.
Syntax case expression
[ of constant_1 : ]
[ statement(s) ]
[ of constant_2 to constant_3 : ]
[ statement(s) ]
[ of constant_4,constant_5 : ]
[ statement(s) ]
...
[else
[ statement(s) ]]
end case
Example 1 An example with a single value, a list of values, a range of values, a mixed list,
and an else value.
int tracking
string[64] message_1
...
case tracking
of 1:
message_1 = "success"
of 2, 3, 5:
message_1 = "at maximum limits"
of 6 to 10:
message_1 = "beyond maximum limits"
of 10 to 15, 20 to 23, 99:
message_1 = "failure"
else
message_1 = "unknown"
end case
Example 2 When this code is executed, if z = 1, 2, 3, or 6, then $y is set to hello. If z is 4 or
5, then $y is set to goodbye. If z is 7, then $y is set to right. If z is not equal to
any of these values, then $y is set to unknown.
case z
of 1 to 3, 6:
$y[] = hello
of 4, 5:
$y[] = goodbye
of 7:
$y[] = right
else
$y[] = unknown
end case
RAPL-II No equivalent in RAPL-II.
See Also if
continue
Description By-passes the remainder of the body of a loop and goes to the next iteration of
the loop: the condition in do or while, the step increment in for, or the beginning
of the next iteration in loop.
Can be used to by-pass the body of the following looping constructs: do, while,
for, or loop.
Often used with a condition such as an if or if-else statement.
If loops are nested, continue by-passes the body of the innermost do, while, for,
or loop statement that encloses continue.
Syntax continue
Context while ( expression_1 )
...
if ( expression_2 )
continue
end if
...
end while
Example Print only odd numbers.
for i= 1 to 10
if (i/2)*2==i ;; integer division
continue ;; it is even
end if
print i, \n
end for
Result 1
3
5
7
9
50 Control Flow
See Also break, do, for, loop, while
do
Description A looping construct that tests a condition at the end of the loop.
Flow enters the loop and the statements are executed down to the just before the
until. The control expression following the until (a condition) is tested. If the
expression is true (non-zero), flow goes back to the first statement after do. If the
expression is false (zero), flow proceeds to the statement following the until.
Since the controlling expression is executed after the body of the loop, the loop
body is always executed at least once, even if the first test of the control
expression is false (zero).
A break can be used to exit a do loop and proceed to the line following the until.
A continue can be used to by-pass the remainder of the body of a do loop. A
goto can be used to jump to another position in the subprogram.
do statements can be nested.
Syntax do
statement(s)
until expression
Example A simple do loop.
i = 0
do
move #safe_path[i]
i = i + 1
until i > 4
The loop body executes 5 times, with i having the values 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. On exit
from the loop, i has the value 5.
See Also while, for, loop, break, continue, goto
for
Description A looping construct that executes a loop for a defined number of times.
The for construct controls the number of times the loop is executed by using an
integer variable (a counter) with an initial value, a final value, and the size of step
(increment) from initial to final.
Defining the step is optional. If step is not specified, it is assumed to be +1.
Step can be negative for a decrementing counter. In any event, the specified step
must be a constant expression.
For executes in the following way. The counter variable is initialized to the value
of expression_1. The counter is then tested to see if it is greater than (if step
expression_3 is positive) or less than (if step expression_3 is negative)
expression_2. If so, execution proceeds at the first statement after the end of the
loop (after end for). The statements in the body of the loop are executed. At the
end of these statements the step (expression_3) is added into the counter.
Control then loops back to the condition test and we repeat.
One implication of the way in which the for loop is implemented is that it is
possible that the body of the loop might never be executed. Consider the
following for loop:
for x = 1 to 0
printf(This is never printed\n)
end for
The loop does nothing, since the test (is x > 0) is true initially, causing the body
of the loop to be skipped.
Syntax for variable = expression_1 to expression_2 [step expression_3 ]
statement(s)
end for
Example With an increment of 1.
for x = 1 to 10
move #safe[x]
end for
Step is not specified and is assumed to be + 1. The function move is executed
10 times, with x = 1, 2, 3, ... 10. The arm moves from safe location 1 to 2 to 3 ...
to 10.
With a decrement of 1.
for x = 10 to 1 step -1
move #safe[x]
end for
Step is defined as 1. The function move is executed 10 times, with x = 10, 9,
8, ... 1. The arm moves from safe location 10 to 9 to 8 ... to 1.
With an increment of 3.
for x = 1 to 11 step 3
move #safe[x]
end for
Step is defined as + 3. The function move is executed 4 times, with x = 1, 4, 7,
and 10. The arm moves from safe location 1 to 4 to 7 to 10. Note that even
though the limit expression_2 is 11, this value is never seen by the body of the
loop, since the next value after 10 (13) is in fact beyond the limit.
See Also do, while, loop
goto
Description Jumps to a statement marked with a label.
A label is named with an identifier and follows the rules for identifiers. The label
can be before or after the goto.
52 Control Flow
A goto can jump only to statements within the main program or within the
current subprogram (sub, func, or command). A goto can neither jump between
the main program and a subprogram, nor between subprograms.
Caution Gotos should be used with caution. Overuse of the goto statement can make
code extremely difficult to read and debug. Good use of conditionals, loops,
break, or continue can almost always eliminate the need for a goto.
Syntax The label identifier is followed by two colons. The immediately following statement
may be on the same line or the next line.
identifier:: statement
...
goto identifier
identifier::
statement
...
goto identifier
Example A simple goto.
...
label_1::
...
if(query_another_loc()==Y)
goto label_1
end if
...
The earlier statement declares the label label_1. If the condition in the if
statement is true, the goto directs control to the statement following label_1.
See Also identifiers, break, continue
if
Description A conditional construct which causes a statement to be executed only if a specific
condition is true (non-zero). Optional else and elseif clauses allow 2-way or
multi-way branching.
Begins with if and ends with end if. The use of then is optional. Can be used
with else and with elseif.
You can use if with else, to execute one set of statements if the condition is true,
and execute a different set of statements if the condition is false. This
construction is a two-way branching (see syntax (b)). The elseif keyword allows
an if statement to evaluate several possible conditions in turn creating a multi-
way branch like a case statement (see syntax (c).)
If statements can be arbitrarily nested.
Syntax (a) a simple if statement:
if expression [then]
statement(s)
end if
(b) if with an else clause
statement(s)
else
statement(s)
end if
(c) if-elseif construction
statement(s)
elseif expression
statement(s)
elseif expression
statement(s)
else
statement(s)
end if
Example (a) This is a simple if statement.
if (curr_locnum <= num_safe_path_locs) then
move #safe_path[curr_path_locnum]
end if
If the condition is true (curr_locnum is less than or equal to num_locs), the move
statement executes. If the condition is false, the program flow proceeds to the line
following end if.
(b) This is an if and else construction.
if (curr_locnum <= num_locs)
move #safe_path[curr_locnum]
else
curr_locnum = curr_locnum - 1
end if
If the condition is true (curr_locnum is less than or equal to num_locs), the move
statement executes. If the condition is false, the statements following else
execute (curr_locnum is decremented by 1).
(c) This is one example of nested statements. Inner statements must end before
outer statements.
if (num==num_locs+1)
print_msg_screen(Teach new power loc.)
teach(#power_loc[num])
num_locs++
if(num_locs<10)
if(query_another_power_loc()==Y)
goto labl
else
num_locs=0
end if
end if
end if
54 Control Flow
(d) An elseif construction.
if(t==123)
elseif(t<10)
elseif(t>200)
else
end if
See Also case
loop
Description A looping construct with no condition.
Begins with loop and ends with end loop.
Since there is no control expression, the loop continues forever until a break or
if necessary, a goto, causes flow to proceed out of the loop.
loop statements can be nested.
Syntax loop
statement(s)
end loop
Example In this example, the program prompts and gets a number to identify a location.
The prompting and getting continues indefinitely until the user enters a valid
number.
[1] loop
[2] printf(Enter location number >)
[3] readline($str, 10)
[4] if str_to_int(num, $str) < 0
[5] print(Invalid number\n)
[6] continue
[7] end if
[8] if((num<0)or(num>20))
[9] printf(Number is out of range\n)
[10] continue
[11] end if
[12] break ;; if we get here, we are DONE
[13] end loop
Line 2 displays a prompt asking the user to enter the number of the desired
location. Lines 3 to 7 read in a string typed by the user and try to convert the
string to an integer. If this fails, an error message is printed and a contine
sends control back to the start of the loop. Lines 8 to 11 verify that the number
is in the expected range, displaying an error message and sending control back to
the start of the look if it is not. Lastly, line 12, which is reached only if the
number is valid and in range, exits the loop.
See Also do, while, for, break, continue, goto
while
Description A looping construct that tests a condition at the beginning of the loop.
Begins with while and ends with end while.
The control expression (a condition) is tested. If the control expression is true
(non-zero), then flow enters the loop and the statements are executed. At the
end, flow goes back to the control expression for the next test. If the expression is
false (equals zero), flow proceeds to the statement following end while.
If the initial test is false (zero), flow never enters the body of the loop and the
statements are never executed.
If the control expression never evaluates to zero, or is a non-zero constant, for
example while(1), the loop continues indefinitely.
A break can be used to exit a while loop and proceed to the line following the end
while. A continue can be used to by-pass the remainder of the body of a while
loop. A goto can be used to jump to another position in the program.
While statements may be arbitrarily nested.
Syntax while expression
statement(s)
end while
Example A simple while statement.
i = 0
while i < 5
move #safe_path[i]
i = i + 1
end while
The loop body executes 5 times, with i having the values 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. On exit
from the loop, i has the value 5.
See Also do, for, loop, break, continue, goto
56 Control Flow
C H A P T E R 6
Subroutines, Functions and
Commands
RAPL-3 has three distinct kinds of executable objects: subroutines (subs),
functions (funcs), and commands (commands). Collectively, subs, funcs, and
commands are referred to as subprograms. main itself is a special case of a
command subprogram.
58 Subroutines, Functions and Commands
Subprograms
One way to understand the concept of subprograms is to look at a brief example:
[1] sub sayhello()
[2] int x
[3] x = 0
[4] printf(Hello!\n)
[5] end sub
[6]
[7] sub say_n_plus_1(int n)
[8] printf(n + 1 = {}\n, n + 1)
[9] end sub
[10]
[11] func int a_plus_b(int a, int b)
[12] return a + b
[13] end func
[14]
[15] main
[16] int x, y
[17] x = 10
[18] sayhello()
[19] say_n_plus_1(x)
[20] y = a_plus_b(1, x)
[21] printf(x + 1 = {}\n, y)
[22] end main
This example defines two subs (called sayhello() and say_n_plus_1()) and one func
called a_plus_b().
Program execution starts in main. Line 16 declares two variables that belong only
to main (local variables) called x and y; in line 17, x is set to have the value 10.
When line 18 is reached, the subroutine sayhello() is executed. sayhello() has its
own local variable x, which it sets to have a value of 0 in line 3. sayhello() then
executes line 4 which prints a message out on the console. When the end of
sayhello() is reached, control returns to main to line 19.
The fact that sayhello() has set its variable x to be 0 does not change the value of
mains variable x at all. Any variable declared inside a subprogram is local to
that subprogram and cannot be changed by any outside means. Variables that
are declared outside of any subprogram are accessible to all subprogram and are
called program scope or simply program variables. This concept of local and
program variables is part of variable scope.
After sayhello() is executed (called) by main, main calls the sub say_n_plus_1().
One difference between the call to sayhello() and the call to say_n_plus_1() is that
the latter has an expression (x) inside the brackets next to the sub name. This is
an argument (or actual parameter) to say_n_plus_1(). The value of x is given (or
passed) to the subprogram.
Subprogram say_n_plus_1() then executes with its variable n initially set to 10,
since that was the value passed to it by main. n is a special local variable of
say_n_plus_one() called a formal parameter. formal parameters get initial values
that are given by the caller of the subprogram, in this case, main.
At line 8, say_n_plus_one now prints out the value of n + 1, which is 11 in this
case. Control returns to main at line 20.
In line 20, main sets y equal to a_plus_b(1, x). This is an example of a function
call; the func a_plus_b() is called with the two arguments (1 and 10 (x)) just like a
sub is called. Line 12 is the only line in a_plus_b(), and is a return statement.
For a function, the return statement indicates that a value (in this case a + b or
11) is to be returned to the calling subprogram. The effect in this example is that
y gets set to the value that a_plus_b() returns, or 11.
This result is printed out at line 21, and the program ends. The rest of this
chapter explains in detail the elements of RAPL-3 that deal with subprograms.
Kinds of Subprograms
subs
A sub (subroutine) is the simplest kind of RAPL-3 subprogram. A sub can take
any number of arguments (including none), but does not return any value to the
calling subprogram. As a result, a sub cannot appear inside an expression.
Declaration Syntax
sub sub_identifier ( parameter_list )
[ declarations and statements... ]
end sub
Calling Syntax
sub_identifier(actual_parameter_list)
Note that the actual_parameter_list must match the parameter list in the sub
declaration. That is, there must be the same number of parameters as those
declared, and the types of the expressions must be compatible.
funcs
A func is similar to a sub in that it can accept any number of arguments.
However, a func returns a value to the calling subprogram. In RAPL-3, funcs
can return any int, float, cloc, ploc, gloc or pointer type of value (a func cannot
return a string or structure, but can return a pointer to a string or structure.)
For example, a = sin(x) + cos(y) calls the sin() function to compute the value
of the sine of variable x, calls the cos() function to compute the cosine of variable
y, adds the two and then stores the result in variable a.
Declaration Syntax
func type func_identifier ( parameter_list )
return value
end func
Note that there must be at least one return statement that returns the value of
the correct type somewhere in the body of the function. Functions can return
only int, float, location, or pointer types.
Calling Syntax
There are two ways to call a function. As part of an expression:
... func_identifier(actual_parameter_list)...
or by itself as a statement:
func_identifier(actual_parameter_list)
In the latter form, the compiler will warn that the return value of the function is
being ignored (unless warnings are disabled.)
Once again, the actual_parameter_list must match the parameter list in the func
declaration.
commands
A command is in many respects identical to a func int. Commands must return
an integer value, and can appear in expressions just like a func. The difference
lies in the way that a command behaves when it is called as a statement by
itself. In this case, the compiler generates code that checks the return value of
the command, and if that value is less than zero (negative) it causes an exception
to be raised with the error code equal to the returned value. This provides a
default way of handling errors; commands that fail should return a negative
number describing the error (and error descriptor). The system can then handle
the error, even if only by aborting the program and issuing an error message.
The section on structured exception handling deals with exceptions, and with how
to handle them, in more detail.
Note that this automatic error check is not performed when the command is used
as a function in an expression. This allows the code to look for and handle errors
explicitly.
Declaration Syntax
command cmd_identifier ( parameter_list )
return value
end command
Note that there must be at least one return statement that returns an integer in
the body of the command.
Calling Syntax
There are two ways to call a command. As part of an expression:
... cmd_identifier(actual_parameter_list)...
or by itself as a statement:
cmd_identifier(actual_parameter_list)
The latter form is the more usual. Unlike functions, the compiler does not warn
about the return value being ignored, since code is automatically generated to
check the return value and act upon it if it is negative.
Once again, the actual_parameter_list must match the parameter list in the
command declaration.
Example
Most of the robot and CROS operations are, in fact, commands. A program can
move the robot to a given location using the move() command like this:
move(#this_loc)
In this case the system handles any errors that move() reports (by means of its
return value.) In the following example, we examine and act on the error
explicitly:
r = move(#this_loc)
if (r < 0)
;; take action...
...
end if
Where main fits in
The main part of a RAPL-3 program is actually a special type of command. It
differs from a normal command in three respects:
(1) It is declared with main and end main
(2) It need not contain a return statement; the compiler automatically
inserts a return 0 at the end of main. The user is free, however, to
return some other value instead.
(3) When the program is run, the main section is called by the startup code.
Parameters
In func, sub and command declarations, the parameter_list part is a comma
separated list of individual parameter_declarations, possibly empty. Each
parameter_ declaration takes the form:
[var] [ type_declaration ] identifier
If type_declaration is omitted then int is the default.
To the subprogram, the parameter looks like an ordinary local variable. However,
its value is set to the actual parameter value provided by the caller.
The special optional keyword var indicates whether or not changes to the
parameter value inside the subprogram change the value of the parameter in the
calling subprogram. The default (var keyword omitted) does not change the
variable outside the subprogram. For example:
sub this_routine(float x)
x = 2.71828 ;; will have no effect on the
;; calling subprogram
end sub
sub that_routine(var float y)
y = 1.0
end sub
... ;; in the calling subprogram
this_routine(t) ;; t is unchanged after this call
that_routine(t) ;; t is 1.0 after this call
Restrictions on Parameters
Function formal parameters (appearing in declarations) that are complex entities
like strings, arrays, or structs are treated by the compiler exactly as if they had
been declared var. (Internally, this is done by passing where the object is
instead of the passing the value of the object itself.)
If this kind of complex parameter is not actually declared var, then the compiler
will generate warnings about any code in the subprogram that modifies the
variable. This protects the programmer from inadvertently changing the
variables value in the calling routine.
The compiler also generates a warning if a string constant is used as the actual
parameter of a formal var string[] parameter.
Var parameters can be of any type, but non-var parameters may be only int,
float, cloc, ploc, gloc, or any pointer type. Furthermore, when calling a
subprogram, var actual parameters must be expressions that might reasonably
occur on the left-hand-side of an assignment. For example:
sub alpha(var float x) ;; note the var parameter
...
end sub
... ;; in another subprogram
alpha(a[j*i+1]) ;; this is OK
alpha(q) ;; this is OK
alpha(q+1) ;; but this is not OK
...
sub beta(int[10] a) ;; this is taken to be
... ;; var int[10] a
end sub
sub gamma(int[10]@ a) ;; this is OK
...
end sub
sub delta(var int[10] a) ;; this is OK
...
end sub
Func, Sub, and Command Prototypes
Funcs, subs and commands must always be defined before they are used in a
program. Since it is not always convenient to rearrange a program so that
definitions precede uses, a mechanism for prototyping subprograms has been
provided. A prototype takes the form:
proto func_sub_or_command_header
For example:
proto func int myfunc(int x, float y) ;; prototypes
proto command qq(int a)
x = myfunc(t,1.5) ;; use of myfunc
qq x ;; and qq
...
func int myfunc(int a, float b);; actual definition
... ;; of myfunc
end func
command qq(int i) ;; actual definition
... ;; of qq
end command
Note that the names of the arguments of myfunc and qq need not match the
names in their prototypes, but the number of arguments and their types must
match exactly.
Libraries
When a RAPL-3 source file (or set of source files) is compiled, the result is a
RAPL-3 module. If a module has a main section then it can be run as a program.
However, some modules do not have main sections, and instead serve as
libraries.
A library is a compiled RAPL-3 module that contains subprograms and variables
that can be accessed by other modules Many of the subprograms commonly
used in writing RAPL-3 programs are in fact contained in one of several libraries.
For example, the move() command is actually contained in the robot library
(robotlib.r), and the printf() command is actually defined in the system library
(syslib.r). Libraries are used whenever it is likely that a subprogram or variable
will be needed by many different programs. The calling programs need only know
the names and types of each element in the library in order to use it. This allows
details of how the library works to be hidden which is actually good, since this
means that subroutines in the library can be revised and improved without
affecting the programs that use it.
The only differences between a library and a normal program are:
(1) the library usually has no main section, and is generally never run by
itself.
(2) the library makes some of its variables and/or subprograms visible to
other modules by declaring them as global or export. This will be
discussed in more detail in the next section.
To use a library with your program, there are three requirements:
(1) At compile time the compiler must be told which libraries you want to
use and must have access to the compiled libraries. See the L option in
the compiler documentation. We say that your program was compiled
with reference to the library.
(2) the library must be installed where the runtime system can find it. It
must either be in the same directory as your program or must be in the
/lib directory.
Variable and Subprogram Scope
A Scope Example
Suppose we have the following declarations in two RAPL-3 programs.
In program1.r3: In program2.r3:
int test_value
...
int test_value
global int intglob
export int intexp
func int factorial(int n)
if n == 0 then
return 1
else
return factorial(n-1)*n
end if
end func
export func plusone(x)
;; default types are float
return x+1
end func
global sub do_something()
...
end func
... ;; more code
Any subprogram in program1 can use and modify the program variable test_value
in program1. Furthermore, any subprogram in program2 can use and modify the
program variable test_value in program2. These are, however, two separate
variables and the value of the one in program1 has no connection to the value of
the other in program2.
Any subprogram within program1 can call the factorial function. For example, a
subprogram of program1 might have:
a = factorial(10) ;; compute the factorial of 10
;; and store it in a
The factorial function is not visible to program2, and cannot be called from
program2.
Program2's variable intglob and sub do_something can be used by any other
program in the system, providing they are compiled with reference to program2.
For example, any subprogram in program1 can modify intglob and call
do_something, since these objects are both global.
Program1 can also access intexp and plusone(), provided that it specifies where
these functions are to be found. For example, in program1, one could execute the
following code:
a = program2:plusone(b)
program2:intexp = program2:intexp + 1
Alternatively, one can use the with statement to avoid having to specify which
program to find plusone and intexp in:
with program2
a = plusone(b)
intexp = intexp + 1
end with
Relevant Statements
with
Description The with construction allows the search path of the scanner to be changed to
search an imported module first, before normal processing.
with statements may not be nested.
Syntax with modulename
...statements...
end with
Example See the scope example.
return
Description The return statement causes control to return to the func, sub, or command that
called the current subprogram. Inside a sub, the return statement takes the
form:
return
Funcs and commands each return a value, which must be specified in the return
statement:
return value_expression
main can return an integer value. If it does not, a zero value is returned
automatically.
Syntax return ;; in a sub
return value ;; in a func or command
Example
C H A P T E R 7
Preprocessor Directives
When a RAPL-3 program is compiled, it actually goes through two distinct stages:
(1) Preprocessing
The source code is interpreted by the preprocessor, which produces a
temporary file for stage (2). This temporary file has had all comments
removed, all .include directives replaced by the included files, all macros
(defined by .define) replaced and all conditional compilation directives
(.ifdef and .ifndef) carried out.
(2) Translation
The actual compiler takes the temporary file prepared by stage (1) and
converts it into RAPL-3 object code.
Breaking the compilation into two stages allows a great deal of flexibility. These
are the kinds of operations that can be performed by taking advantage of the
preprocessing stage:
70 Preprocessor Directives
File Inclusion
It is often inconvenient for a program to be located entirely in one source file. For
example, it might make sense to break the program up into a section dealing with
moving the robot, a section dealing with the user interface and a section dealing
with communication to another machine. The .include directive makes this kind
of split very simple. For example consider the following 4 source files:
In file robot.r3:
;; These routines deal with moving the robot
...
;; end of robot.r3
In file user.r3:
;; These routines deal with the user interface
...
;; end of user.r3
In file comm.r3:
;; These routines deal with communications
...
;; end of comm.r3
In file main.r3:
;; Main program
.include robot.r3
.include user.r3
.include comm.r3
;; Mains stuff goes here
...
;; end of main.r3
What the actual compiler sees, after the preprocessing step has been run, is this:
(we have left comments in for the purposes of this example; in reality, the
preprocessing step also deletes all comments.)
.1 main.r3
;; Main program
.1 robot.r3
;; These routines deal with moving the robot
...
;; end of robot.r3
.3 main.r3
.1 user.r3
;; These routines deal with the user interface
...
;; end of user.r3
.4 main.r3
.1 comm.r3
;; These routines deal with communications
...
;; end of comm.r3
.5 main.r3
;; Mains stuff goes here
...
;; end of main.r3
What has happened is that every time a .include directive was encountered, the
.include was replaced by the entire file that was named in the .include
preprocessor directive. As far as the compiler is concerned, it sees only one input
file.
You will note the rather odd constructions on the 1
st
, 3
rd
, 7
th
, 8
th
, etc. lines which
are of the form:
.number filename
These are understood by the compiler to mean that the next line of text actually
comes from the given line of the given file. This allows error messages during
compilation to match up with the actual lines in your source files. Note that the
preprocessor generates these automatically for us.
Macro Substitution
The preprocessor provides a macro substitution facility that has a similar effect to
the named constant (const) capabilities of the language. However, preprocessor
macros work by direct string replacement, allowing a symbol to be replaced with
any arbitrary string. (RAPL-3 does not presently support macros with
parameters.) Consider this example:
.define NAME Joe
.define NUMBER 1234
.define WHICH func1
...
printf(The name is {}, and the number is {}\n, NAME, NUMBER)
WHICH(NUMBER)
...
After being run through the preprocessor, this sample looks like this to the
compiler:
...
printf(The name is {}, and the number is {}\n, Joe, 1234)
func1(1234)
...
The .define lines are replaced by blanks; the preprocessor strips them out of the
file. Since the symbol NAME has been defined to be the characters Joe
(including the quotes), everywhere NAME appears it gets replaced by this string.
Note that while something similar to the printf() in the 7
th
line could have been
done using name constants (via const), the call to func1() in the 8
th
line could
not.
Note also the symbols that were .defined are never seen by the translation part
of the compilation. As far as the RAPL-3 language is concerned, these symbols
do not exist; they are relevant only to the preprocessor.
Conditional Compilation
The preprocessor can be used to effect conditional compilation, allowing one set of
source code to produce several different versions of program. This is often useful,
particularly for debugging purposes. Consider this example:
;; Define this to enable debugging code:
.define DEBUG
...
main
.ifdef DEBUG
printf(Debugging version\n)
.else
printf(Normal version\n)
.endif
... lots of code here ...
.ifdef DEBUG
printf(debug: result was {}\n, n)
.endif
... more code here ...
After the preprocessing stage, this looks like this:
...
main
printf(Debugging version\n)
... lots of code here ...
printf(debug: result was {}\n, n)
... more code here ...
The .ifdef directive allows code to be selectively included in the output of the
preprocessor if a symbol is defined that is, if there has been a .define for that
symbol before the .ifdef in the source code. Note that the first printf() was
included in the output because the symbol DEBUG had been defined in the 2
nd
line. The second printf() is not included because it is in the .else clause of the
.ifdef DEBUG.
Using this technique it is possible to simply leave debugging code in your
program and turn it off (by commenting out the .define DEBUG, for example)
once the program has been debugged. If problems occur later with the program,
the debugging code is still there and can be easily turned back on.
Preprocessor Directives in General
Placement
Preprocessor directives can be interspersed with other parts of the program.
Syntax
.preprocessor_directive [arguments]
On a line, a preprocessor directive cannot be preceeded by anything except blank
spaces. Each preprocessor directive begins with a dot. The entire line is
processed by the preprocessor. Definitions may not extend over more than one
line.
Comments
Comments are stripped from the input file.
Strings
The preprocessor recognizes that and (double quotes) delimit strings. No
macro expansions will be performed on text within and .
Special Symbols
The following two macros are always defined by the preprocessor, and will be
replaced by their appropriate values:
__LINE__ the current line # in the current source file
__FILE__ the current source file as a quoted string
For example, if you place this in your program:
printf(I am at line {} of file {}\n, __LINE__, __FILE__)
the effect will be to have the program print out a message giving what source line
and source file the printf() was located on.
The Preprocessor Directives
.define
Description Creates a preprocessor symbol. If no value is specified for the symbol, the
preprocessor will set the value of the new symbol to be 1 (without the quotes.)
Syntax .define [ symbol ]
.define [ symbol ] [ value]
Examples .define TRUE 1
.define DEBUG
.error
Description Forces the preprocessor to issue an error message
Syntax .error [ message ]
Example .ifndef IMPORTANT
.error The symbol IMPORTANT must be defined!
.endif
This can be used to make sure that a particular preprocessor symbol (like
IMPORTANT in the above example) is actually defined.
.ifdef
Description Conditionally includes source if symbol is defined.
Can be used with an.else clause.
Syntax .ifdef [ symbol ]
lines of source code to be included if symbol is defined
.endif
.ifdef [ symbol ]
lines of source code to be included if symbol is defined
.else
lines of source code to be include if symbol is not defined
.endif
Example See the introduction.
.ifndef
Description Conditionally includes source if [symbol] is not defined.
Can be used with .else clause.
Syntax .ifndef [ symbol ]
lines of source code to be included if symbol is not defined
.endif
.ifndef [ symbol ]
lines of source code to be included if symbol is not defined
.else
lines of source code to be include if symbol is defined
.endif
.include
Description The .include directive inserts text contained in one source file into the current
source file at compile time.
Around the filename (double quotes) are required. The filename is identified
by the programmer. When the program is compiled, the contents of the file
filename replace the .include line.
This form searches the current dir first.
Syntax .include filename
Example see the introduction
.number filename
Description Forces a line to be recognized as line number of file filename.
Syntax .number filename
Example see the introduction
.undef
Description Deletes a preprocessor symbol definition.
Syntax .undef [ symbol ]
Using the Compiler from the Command Line
It is often useful to be able to run the RAPL-3 compiler from a command line
instead of from ROBCOMM3. This is particularly useful for large projects with
many source files, where tools like make are used to build the project.
The compiler is typically located, for example, in C:\Program Files\CRS
Robotics\RAPL-3\bin, and is called r3c. (RAPL-3 Compiler.)
Command line syntax r3c [-options] input_file_name
Options -o output_file_name
send output to a particular file; the default is r.out
e error_file_name
send all error messages to the specified file
-?
print a help message
h
same as -?
fstack=number
set the running stack size of the program to number words
Wall
enable all reasonable warnings
Wmax
enable even possibly unreasonable warnings
Wnone
disable all warnings
v
be verbose; print lots of information about what is happening
Dsymbol
make the preprocessor act as if symbol had been .defined
Dsymbol=value
make the preprocessor act as if symbol had been .defined
O0
dont perform any code optimization
O1
perform basic optimizations (default)
s
reduce compiled code size by stripping out any symbols
x
exclude all symbols except global and export symbols
C H A P T E R 8
Structured Exception Handling
RAPL-3 commands provide a means of automatically handling errors. If a
command is called like this:
thecommand(x, y, z)
then the RAPL-3 compiler generates code that automatically checks the
commands return value. If the value is negative (less than zero) an exception has
occurred.
When an exception occurs, the default way of handling it is for the program to
stop and an error message to be printed out. This message typically looks like:
Exception raised at line 123 of myprog.r3: file not found
Note that the system typically can report the source line and file where the
exception occurred. It also attempts to interpret the return code as an error
descriptor, and reports the error as the equivalent descriptive string.
One way of explicitly dealing with exceptions in a program is to simply check the
return value of all commands. For example:
t = thecommand(x, y, z)
if (t < 0)
...error recovery...
end if
This can be very tedious and can make the code quite difficult to read, as every
command will tend to have at least 3 extra lines of code after it to handle possible
errors.
78 Structured Error Handling
try-except Construct
Structured Exception Handling provides a much neater and simpler way of
handling exception in program execution. Consider this short example:
try
...
thecommand(x, y ,z)
thatcommand(z, y)
thiscommand()
...
except
...error recovery code...
end try
The try-except construct allows the way the system reacts to exceptions to be
changed in the region between the try and the except. If one of the commands
in this section fails (returning a ve number) then control is immediately
transferred into the except part of the construct. The program can then find out
what the error code was and even where it happened, and can take corrective
action. (Note that the except part is only executed if an exception happens. If
the program reaches the end of the try section successfully, then execution
continues after the end try.)
There are, in fact, four things the except part of the try-except construct can do:
1. Simply do nothing, and allow control to pass to the statement following the
end try.
2. Force the program to go back and execute the entire try section from the
start, using the special retry keyword.
3. Force the program to execute the failing statement over again from its start
using the resume keyword. For example, if thatcommand() had failed, then
resume would go back and continue execution at thatcommand() again.
4. Force the program to continue execution at the statement following the one
that failed using the ignore keyword. For example, if thatcommand() had
failed, then ignore would force execution to continue from the next line, at
thiscommand().
Syntax
The syntax of a structured exception handling section is:
try
statements
except
exception_handling_statements
end try
On entry to the block, statements are executed in the usual way. If an exception
occurs (a command fails) then execution is transferred to the except section.
A subprogram can have at most one active try block at a time. That is, try
blocks cannot be nested within a subprogram, although from within a try block,
one subprogram can call another one which also uses try blocks.
Gotos are not allowed inside try-except blocks. You can, however, break,
continue, return or raise to get out of the block.
You cannot define a label inside a try-except block, consequently cannot goto
into the middle of the block.
If an exception occurs inside the except part of the try-except block, then the
exception is handled by the next level up of try-except block, or by the system
(aborting with an error message) if there is no next level up.
Within the except section, the following special keywords are valid:
retry
go back to the start of the try block and do the entire block over again.
resume
go back to the statement that caused the exception and continue execution.
This allows the offending statement to be re-executed.
ignore
go back to the statement following the one that caused the exception and
continue execution
80 Structured Error Handling
Related Keywords and Subprograms
The following keywords and subprograms are related to exception handling:
Keywords:
raise
Functions:
error_code(), error_addr(), error_line(), error_file()
addr_to_line(), addr_to_file()
Commands:
abort()
C H A P T E R 9
Library Subprograms
The libraries contain predefined subroutines, functions, and commands used to
perform common programming tasks.
This chapter contains
General
general information about libraries, return values, and naming conventions
RAPL-II to RAPL-3
a mapping of functionality from RAPL-II to RAPL-3 for users who are familiar
with RAPL-II
Subprograms: Categories
a description of each category, material common to subprograms in that
category, and a list of each subprogram in that category
Subprograms: Alphabetical
a detailed description of each subprogram, listed alphabetically

82 Library Subprograms
General
Libraries
The subprograms are contained in several CRS-supplied libraries. Since these
subprograms have global scope, you do not have to explicitly include a CRS-
supplied library to use one of these subprograms, except for the teach pendant
library.
Teach Pendant Library
Subprograms in the teach pendant library have export scope. You must explicitly
name the teach pendant library when using a teach pendant subprogram. Details
are with those subprograms.
Return Values and Errors
Return values less than 0 indicate an error condition. Error codes are listed in
the Error Handling section.
Subprogram Names
Names of subroutines, functions, and commands follow these conventions.
Naming Conventions
The first component is the general family of item, such as string or location.
The second component is the specific sub-family, often the object being dealt
with, such as character, length, limit, cartesian data, or precision data.
The last component is the operation, such as get, set, find, or reverse find.
The _ (underscore) character is used as a separator.
str_chr_get()

str_chr_set()

str_chr_find()

str_chr_rfind()

str_len()

str_len_set()

str_limit()

str_limit_set()

loc_cdata_get()

loc_cdata_set()

loc_pdata_get()

loc_pdata_set()

Exceptions
Where there is only one operation of interest, such as a query, there is no
operation named.
str_len()

str_limit()

Where a family, sub-family, or operation is obvious, it is not included. Instances
include all arm motion commands and all math functions.
depart

move

jog

yaw

ln

sin

sqrt

mem_alloc

mem_free

time_set

Where there is only one sub-family, the underscore may be omitted.
griptype_set

gripdist_get

Where the name is an alias for another subprogram, components may be
changed or omitted.
jog_w(JOG_X,D) xw(D)

RAPL-II to RAPL-3
The following are the equivalent RAPL-II and RAPL-3 commands.
In some cases functionality is identical. In other cases functionality is different.
Some RAPL-II commands have been split into two or more RAPL-3 commands.

RAPL-II RAPL-3 ash system
shell

ABORT abort() kill
ABS fabs(), iabs()
ACOS acos()
ACTUAL
[cartesian or precision]
pos_get(POSITION_ACTUAL)
(precision)
actual
ALIGN align() align()
ALLOC
[allocates, repartitions, sorts, verifies, ...]
mem_alloc()
[only allocates, clears memory]

ANALOG
[value of voltage on analog input channel]
analog()
AOUT
[manipulates analog output]
aout()
APPRO appro()
appros()
appro
ARM
[enables, disables arm power relay]
robot_flag_enable()
open( \dev\estop
abort()
enable
ASIN asin()
ATAN2 atan2()
CIRCLE circle() circle
CLOSE grip_close() gripclose
COMP
XCOMP
YCOMP
ZCOMP
OCOMP
ACOMP
TCOMP
loc_cdata_get()
loc_pdata_get()

CONFIG ioctl() [put options] siocfg
COPY cp, copy
COS cos()
CPATH cpath() cpath
CTPATH ctpath() ctpath
CUT
[only deletes characters]
str_edit()
[deletes or inserts characters]

DECODE str_to_int()
DEG deg()
DELAY delay()
msleep()

DELETE, DEPROG unlink() rm, del
DEPART depart()
departs()
depart
DIR ls, dir
DISABLE robot_flag_enable() disable
DLOCN erase
eraseall

DO do [flow control]
DVAR erase
eraseall

EDIT editor of
Robcomm3

ELBOW
[A255]
stance_set(... elbow ...)
testing
pose/
setstance
pose/
setstance

ENABLE robot_flag_enable() enable
ENCODE
[int to string for printing]
snprintf(), sprintf()
END [flow control]
EXECUTE execl()
execv()
run
filename
filename
FINISH finish() finish
FREE heap_space()
[longest contiguous free area in
heap]
mem [in
memory]
df [on file
system]

GETCH
[returns character code at serial input]
read()
getch()

GOPATH ctpath_go() gopath
GOSUB [call to sub, func, or command]
GOTO goto [flow control]
GRIP gripdist_set(), grip() grip
HALT halt()
HERE here() here
HOME home() home
HOMEGRIP homegrip() homegrip
HOMESEQ seekswitch() seekswitch
HOMEZC homezc() homezc
IF if [flow control]
IFPOWER if robotispowered()
IFSIG if input()
IFSTART fpstart(),
front panel library

IFSTRING if [comparing string variables or
constants]

INBOUNDS
[is location in bounds]
inbounds()
INPUT input()
read() [with stdin or other
parameter]
reads()
readsa()
input
INT
[returns closest integer value]

INVERT
[invert Z, leave X and Y, of coord system]]
invert() invert
JOG jog_w()
wx(), wy(), wz(), xrot(), yrot(),
zrot()
jog_ws()
wxs(), wys(), wzs(),xrots(),
yrots(), zrots()
jog
JOINT joint() joint
KBHIT
[character exists, to be read from serial input]
kbhit()
LIMP limp() limp
LISTL, LLOC list [in .v3]
print [in .v3]

LISTP, LPROG ls, dir
LISTV, LVAR list [in .v3]
print [in .v3]

LN ln()
LOCK lock() lock
LOG log()
MA
[move to absolute angles]
moveabsolute() moveabs
MAGRIP
[force applied by magnetic gripper]
grip() grip
MI
[move by increments of angles]
moveincrement() moveinc
MOD [function] mod [operator]
MOTOR motor() motor
MOVE move()
moves()
move
NOLIMP nolimp() nolimp nolimp
NOTRACE abort()
OFFSET base_set()
base_get()

ONLINE online() online
ONPOWER loop ... if ... robotispowered() ...
delay()

ONSIG loop if input() delay()
ONSTART read( \dev\buttons
front panel library

OPEN grip_open() gripopen open
OUTPUT output() output
PASTE
[only inserts characters]
str_edit
[deletes or inserts characters]

PAUSE signal() ... input() ... if ...
PENDANT [gives and takes control] pendant
PITCH pitch()
jog_t(TOOL_PITCH, ...)
pitchs()
jog_ts(TOOL_PITCH, ...)
pitch
POINT loc_cdata_set()
loc_pdata_set()
point()
set [location
= location]

POSE
[A465,G3000]
stance_set() pose
setstance

POW pow()
PRINTF printf()
RAD rad()
RANDOM
[returns random number]
random()
REACH
[A255]
stance_set() pose
setstance

READY ready() ready ready
RENAME mv, move
RETURN return [from sub, func, or
command]

ROLL roll()
jog_t(TOOL_ROLL, ...)
rolls()
jog_ts(TOOL_ROLL, ...)
roll
RUN
[default is last program executed]
run filename
SERIAL ioctl() [get options] siocfg
SET = [assignment]
operators
set
SHIFT
[alter X, Y, Z of cartesian location]
get/change/move
translations only
shift
SHIFTA
[alter all 8 coordinates of cartesian loc.]
shift_w() shift
SIN sin()
SPEED speed_set(), speed()
speed_get(), speed(-1)
speed speed
SQRT sqrt()
SRANDOM
[returns random number and reseeds]
seed()
(reseeds)

STATUS status
servostat
sysstat

STRPOS
[finds substring in string]
str_chr_find
[finds character in string]

SYSTEM sysstat
TAN tan()
TEACH pendant
TIME mtime()
time()
delay()
date
TOOL tool_set()
tool_get()
tool tool
TRIGGER
[activate output at location]
settrigger() ?? trigger
TRUNC
[truncates and returns integer]
(int)
typecast

UNLOCK unlock() unlock
UNTIL do ... until [flow control]
W0 pos_get(), xforms w0 w0
WAIT while input()
WE1 w1 w1
WE3 w3 w3
WGRIP gripdist_get() wgrip
WHILE while [flow control]
WITH
X movex() movex movex
XREADY ready() ready
XZERO zero() zero
Y movey() movey movey
YAW yaw()
jog_t(TOOL_YAW, ...)
yaws()
jog_ts(TOOL_YAW, ...)
yaw yaw
Z movez() movez movez
@ACCEL accel_get(), accels_get()
accel_set(), accels_set()
accel
@@CAL calibrate() cal
@@CALGR grip_cal() calgrip
@@CALSEQ homeseq() homeseq
@@CALZC calzc() calzc
@CALRDY calrdy() calready
@CLINACC linacc_get()
linacc_set()
linacc
@CLINSPD linspd_get()
linspd_set()
linspd
@CROTACC linacc_get()
linacc_set()
linacc
@CROTSPD linspd_get()
linspd_set()
linspd
@@DIAG diagnostics
@GAIN gains_set()
gains_get()
gain
@LOCATE pos_set() locate
@MAXSPD maxvel_set(), maxvels_set()
maxvel_get(), maxvels_get()
maxvel
@SEEK seek()
@SERVERR get_servoerr_params()
set_servoerr_params()

@@SETUP split into relevant sections
@TRACK track_spec_set() setnoa
@XLIMITS jointlim_get()
jointlim_set()
limits
@XLINKS linklen_get(), linklen_set() linklen
@XMAXVEL maxvel_set()
maxvel_get()
maxvel
@@XNET transputernet()
@XPULSES xpulses_get(),
xpulses_set()

@XRATIO xratio_get()
xratio_set()

@ZERO zero()
pos_set()
zero

Subprograms: Category Listing
These lists give an overview of subprograms by category and can be helpful for
comparing related subprograms. Since a category is focussed on one set of tasks,
some subprograms are listed under more than one category.
In these category listings, the descriptions of the subprograms are very brief. For
a complete description, see the subprogram listing under the alphabetical listing.
On the following pages, subprograms are grouped under the following categories.
Analog Input
Calibration
Calibrating arm and gripper.
Configuration File Handling
Date and Time
Current time and date. Elapsed time in milliseconds.
Device Input and Output
Digital Input and Output
Environment Variables
Error Message Handling
Subprograms for handling error descriptors returned from subprogram calls.
File and Device System Management
Creating and deleting directories and objects in the file system. Mounting another
file system on a directory.
File Input and Output
Input and output for files and devices: opening, closing, reading, writing, both
unformatted and formatted with format specifiers listed. Input and output for
other objects is under Device Input and Output. Input and Output for sockets is
under Multi-tasking.
Subcategories include:
Formatted Input
Unformatted Input
Formatted Output
Unformatted Output
Front Panel
Configuring the front panel for custom operation.
Gripper
Operating the gripper.
92 Subprograms:Category Listing
Home
Homing the robot (for A465 and A255).
Location
Packing data from a location to an array and from an array to a location.
Converting one type of location to another. Shifting locations in world or tool
frame.
Kinematic Conversion
Data Manipulation
Flags
Math
Trigonomic, logarithmic, and other math functions. Converting radians to degrees
and degrees to radians.
Memory
Allocating and freeing memory. Determining and setting heap.
Motion
Subprograms designed to initiate robot motion.
Pendant
Reading characters and writing strings at the pendant. Manipulating the cursor
and screen. Manipulating variables from the teach pendant.
Pointer Conversion and Function Pointers
Special subprograms to convert pointers to variables and to call functions using a
pointer.
Robot Configuration
Configuring the arm: number of axes, velocities, accelerations, gains, travel
limits, link lengths. etc.
Signals
Sending signals. Setting actions dependant on signals. Determining and setting
signal masks.
Stance
Subprograms to adjust the robot stance. RAPL-3 uses the term stance for a
specific set of joint angles used when reaching a location.
Status
String Manipulation
Editing, appending, copying, etc. of strings. Determining and converting case of
characters and strings. Converting strings to other data types and other types to
strings.
System Process Control
Single and Multiple Processes
Operating System Management
Point of Control and Observation
ToolTransform and Base Offset
Base offsets and tool transform.
V3 Files
The v3 subprograms allow a program to modify a v3 file.
Win 32
These Win 32 commands allow a CROSnt process to communicate with a process
in the Windows NT environment.
Analog Input
analogs_get
Retrieves the values of the eight analog inputs on the
C500C controller.
boardtemp_get
Retrieves the C500C main board temperature, in degrees
Celsius.

Calibration
calibrate
Calibrates axes.
calrdy
Moves the arm to the calibrate position.
calzc
Calibrates at next zero cross.
grip_cal
Calibrates the gripper.
hsw_offset_get
Returns the offset between homing switch and calibration
position.
motor
Rotates a motor by a specified number of encoder pulses.
pos_get
Gets the position of the arm
pos_set
Sets the position of the arm
ready
Moves the arm to the READY position.
zero
Sets current motor position registers to 0.

Configuration File Handling
cfg_load
Loads a text configuration file for the current application.
cfg_load_fd
Loads a configuration information from a file that is
already open.
cfg_save
Re-writes a configuration file for the current application.
cfg_save_fd
Re-writes a configuration file for the current application.
Date and Time

mtime
Obtains the time since system start-up.
time
Returns the current time.
time_set
Sets the current time.
time_to_str
Converts a system time code to an ASCII string.

chmod
Changes access mode information about a file or device.
fprint
Writes the specifies data to the file associated wth file
descriptor fd.
fprintf
Converts and writes output to a device or file.
freadline
Reads (interactively) a line of characters from a file and
echoes to a file.
ioctl
I/O control operation. Used to configure and control a device.
mknod
Makes a special node.
open
Opens a file or device and returns a file descriptor.
rcv
Receives words from a socket.
send
Sends specified number of words into the socket
sigfifo
Sends a signal to all of the readers at the other end of a fifo
socketpair
Gets a pair of file descriptors for a private client and server
socket

Digital Input and Output

input
Returns the state of an input.
inputs
Returns an int that represents the bitmapped state of the
digital inputs.
net_in_get
Reads input data from the F3 end of arm I/O boards.
net_ins_get
Reads all input data from the F3 end of arm I/O boards.
net_out_set
Sets a specified F3 end of arm output to a specified value.
net_outs_get
Gets the current state of a set of F3 end of arm outputs.
net_outs_set
Allows several F3 end of arm outputs to be set to a specified
state at the same time.
output_get
Queries an output channel for its state. Returns the state.
output_pulse
Sets an output channel to one state, waits, and then sets the
channel to the opposite state.
output
output_set
Sets an output channel to a state.
outputs
outputs_set
Sets the entire bank of output channels to states of a
bitmapped value.
outputs_get
Queries the bank of output channels. Returns an int that
represents the bitmapped state of the outputs.

Environment Variables

environ
Allows to retrieve each individual string from its
environment.
getenv
Allows to retrieve the value of a specified environment
string.
setenv
Creates/redefines an environment variables value.
time_to_str
Converts a system time code to an ASCII string.
unsetenv
Deletes the selected environment string.
Rapl-3 commands always return a value. A positive return value indicates that
the command completed successfully. A negative return value indicates an error.
Errors are designated by _error_descriptors_. Commands upon failure return the
negative value of the specific error descriptor.
For example:

int t
t = open(....) ;; t is assigned the return value from the open command
if (t < 0)
;; it FAILED
printf("The error descriptor is {}\n", -t) ;;Print error descriptor
printf("And it means '{}'\n", str_error(-t)) ;; Print error message
end if

The error descriptor (-t) is a 32 bit value, divided into 4 fields, with the following
bit description.
msb lsb
[ subsystem:7 ] [ b2:8 ] [ b1:8 ] [ code:8 ]

The Subsystem field defines the part of the system where the error originated.
For example, the kernel is subsystem 0, the robot library is subsystem 1 and the
robot server is subsystem 2.
Code identifies the specific error code for the given subsystem. Each subsystem
has associated with it a specific list of error codes. For example, code 1 is
"general error" for the kernel subsystem, and is "illegal straight line move" for the
robot library subsystem.
The error codes (and their translations) are located in a set of files in the
/lib/errors directory. The file names are of a standard form, "sysNNN.err", where
NNN is a 3-digit 0-padded decimal number defining the subsystem. For example,
kernel errors are contained in the sys000.err file, robot library errors in
sys001.err, robot server in sys002.err.
The format of these files are standard. As a result given the error descriptor the
error code can be determined. The first line of the subsystem sysNNN.err file
contains the subsystem name. The subsequent lines contain, in sequence, the
error code number EEE and an error translation.
Line 1: Subsystem name
Following lines: EEE error translation string
Where EEE is a 3-digit zero-padded decimal number corresponding to the specific
code of the error descriptor. Within the error translation string, the system
recognizes two special sequences: "$1" and "$2". On printing errors containing
these strings, the system will replace the $1 and $2 with the decimal values of b1
and b2, respectively. For example, consider the following hypothetical error
translation file, say, sys064.err:

This_Demo System
001 Idiotic error
002 Not-so idiotic error
003 Error on robot axis $1 (I think)
004 Error on axis $2 from module $1
005 Oops!

When an error descriptor corresponding to the This_Demo System error 004
[0x04060504] is translated using the function str_error(), the error result is
"Error on axis 6 from module 5".
Given the error descriptor returned from a failed function call the specific error
code can be determined using the error handling functions. As a consequence a
listing of the subsystems and their error codes are not explicitly listed. The list of
errors can be obtained from sysNNN.err files in the /lib/errors directory.
The Kernel subsystem (subsystem 0) error code are specifically returned in some
subprograms to denote errors. An enum type error_code_t defines the kernel
subsystem errors as follows:
EOK = 0 no error
ENOENT = 2 no such file or directory
ESRCH = 3 no process with that pid number
EINTR = 4 interrupted system call
EIO = 5 input/output error
ENXIO = 6 no device
E2BIG = 7 too many arguments or too long an argument area
ENOEXEC = 8 file is not an executable
EBADF = 9 bad file descriptor
ECHILD = 10 no child process
EPERM = 11 permission denied
ENOMEM = 12 not enough memory
EACCESS = 13 access denied
EBUSY = 16 resource busy
EEXIST = 17 file exists
EXDEV = 18 link across devices attempted
ENODEV = 19 operation not supported by device
ENOTDIR = 20 tried to search a non-directory
EISDIR = 21 tried to open a directory for writing
EINVAL = 22 invalid argument
ENFILE = 23 too many open files on the system
EMFILE = 24 too many open files for this process
ENOTTY = 25 inappropriate ioctl()
ETXTBSY = 26 executable text file busy
ENOSPC = 28 device out of space
ESPIPE = 29 illegal operation on fifo or socket
ERANGE = 34 result out of range
EAGAIN = 35 resource temporarily unavailable
ETIMEOUT = 37 timed out
ENOTSOCK = 39 tried to send/rcv on a non-socket
ENOSERV = 40 tried to access a socket with no server
ENOCLIENT = 41 server tried to talk to a client that no longer exists
or has closed the socket.
ERESET = 42 device is being reset
ENOTEMPTY = 43 attempted to delete a non-empty directory
EOPNOTSUPP = 45 operation not supported
The fields b2, b1 define extra data required to report specific errors. The fields b1
and b2 are not used for all (or even many) error descriptors. If not used each of
the bits is set to 0. As an example, when an "axis N out" error is reported, b1
carries the number of the axis that is out.
Error Descriptors Command Summaries
The following subprograms exist for handling error descriptors:
addr_decode
Looks up the address specified in the line number tables
and decodes it into a line and file.
addr_to_file
Converts an address to a file name string.
addr_to_line
Converts an address to a line number.
err_compare
Compares two error descriptors for matching subsystem
and error code fields.
err_compose
The function reconstructs and returns the original error
descriptor
err_get_b1
Given a +ve error descriptor, returns the value of b1.
err_get_b2
Given a +ve error descriptor, returns the value of b2.
err_get_code
Given a +ve error descriptor, returns the value of the
errorcode.
err_get_subsys
Given a +ve error descriptor, returns the number of the
subsystem originating it.
error_addr
Returns the address where the current exception
occurred.
error_code
Get the current exceptions error code
error_file
Returns the name of the file where the current error
resides.
error_line
Gets the line number of the current error.
str_error
Returns a pointer to a string that describes an error code.
str_subsys
Returns a string giving the name of the subsystem
originating a given error code.
Warning: The str_error() and str_subsys() routines share a static string variable
for storing their return values. They cannot be called in the same print() or
printf(). For example:
printf(".....", str_subsys(...), str_error(...))
will NOT work as expected; always break these function calls into separate
printf() statements.

File Input and Output
Input and output for files: opening, closing, reading, writing, both unformatted
and formatted with format specifiers listed. Input and output for devices such as
sockets, pipes and fifos is found in the Device Input and Output category.
Format Specifiers The format string may consist of two different objects, normal characters which
are directly copied to the file descriptor, and conversion braces which print the
arguments to the descriptor. The conversion braces take the format:
{ [ flags ] [ field width ] [ .precision ] [ x | X ] }
Flags
Flags that are given in the conversion can be the following (in any order):
(minus sign) specifies left justification of the converted argument in its field.
+ (plus sign) specifies that the number will always have a sign.
0 (zero) in numeric conversions causes the field width to be padded with
leading zeros.
Field width
The field width is the minimum field that the argument is to be printed in. If the
converted argument has fewer characters than the field, then the argument is
padded with spaces (unless the 0 (zero) flag was specified) on the left (or on the
right if the (minus sign) was specified). If the item takes more space than the
specified field width, then the field width is exceeded.
.precision
The precision number specifies the number of characters in a string, the number
of significant digits in a float, or the maximum number of digits in an integer to
be printed.
x or X
This is the hexadecimal flag which specifies whether or not an integer argument
should be printed in hexadecimal (base 16) or not. The lowercase x specifies
lowercase letters (abcde) are to be used in the hexadecimal display and the
uppercase X specifies uppercase letters (ABCDE)..
A character sequence of {{ means to print the single { (opening brace) character.
Unformatted Input
freadline
Reads (interactively) a line of characters from a file and echoes to a
file.
read
Reads a number of words (4 byte entities) from a file descriptor.
readline
Reads (interactively) a line of characters from the standard input
device, normally the terminal keyboard. Echoes to the standard
output device, the terminal screen.
reads
Reads a string from a file.
readsa
Reads a string from a file and appends it to the end of another string.
seek
Provides a method to move through a file arbitrarily rather than
sequentially.
Formatted Input
str_scanf
Separates the contents of a string according to a specified
format and places them into a list of pointers.
Unformatted Output
fprint
Writes data to a file, exactly as given.
print
Writes data to the standard output device, normally the
terminal screen, exactly as given.
snprint
Writes data to a string, exactly as given.
write
Writes words (4 byte entities) to a file descriptor.
writeread
Atomically writes words to a file descriptor and reads
words from a file descriptor.
writes
Writes a string to a file.
Formatted Output
fprintf
Writes data to a file under a specified format.
printf
Writes data to the standard output device, normally the
terminal screen, under a specified format..
snprintf
Writes data to a string, under a specified format.
File and Device System Management
access
Checks whether a file can be accessed in the mode
specified.
chdir
Changes the current working directory to path.
chmod
Changes access mode of an file or device.
close
Closes file. Breaks the connection between a file
descriptor and an open file.
dup
Duplicates an existing file descriptor.
dup2
Duplicates an existing file descriptor.
flock
Sets and releases advisory locks on a file.
fstat
Obtains information about a particuar open object in the
file system.
ftime
Changes the modification time of an open filesystem
object.
ioctl
I/O control operation. Used to configure and control a
device.
killfifo
Sends a signal to all readers at the other end of the fifo.
link
Makes a hard link to an existing file or directory. Useful
for renaming files, moving files, or sharing data.
MAJOR
Extracts the major number from a device.
MINOR
Extracts the minor number from a device.
mkdir
Creates a new empty directory.
mknod
Makes a special node (device, fifo, socket).
mount
Mounts a file system
open
Opens a file and returns a file descriptor.
pipe
Creates a single stream pipe.
rcv
Receives (reads) words from a socket.
readdir
Reads a directory entry and stores the structure in buf.
rmdir
Deletes an empty directory.
seek
Moves the starting position in a file to read or write.
server_get
For use with multiple robot systems - Gets the name of
the current server name.
server_info
For use with multiple robot systems - Gets information
about the current server.
server_protocol
Returns the protocol designator from the robot server.
server_set
For use with multiple robot systems - Sets the current
server.
server_version
Specifies the robot server version.
sigfifo
Sends a signal to readers of a fifo.
socketpair
Gets a pair of file descriptors for a client and server
socket.
stat
Obtains information about a particular object in the file
system.
statfs
Gets information about a mounted filesystem.
send
Sends (writes) words to a socket.
sync
Flushes all the file system buffers of their contents.
unlink
Removes a link to a file.
unmount
Unmounts a file system
utime
Changes the modification time of a filesystem object.
Front Panel
There are five front panel buttons on the controller, two of which can be
programmed using RAPL 3 subprograms designed for reading or setting the
button status. The ARM POWER button cannot be controlled using the RAPL-3
subprograms. However, the robotispowered function can be used to determine,
but not set, the status of the arm power.
The other buttons do not have switch position settings on or off, instead they are
momentarily set buttons that only register ON (high) when they are pressed. The
status of a button is high (ON) only while it is actually pressed. After it is released
the status returns to 0 (OFF). The buttons are labeled with one of the following
set of labels.
CYCLE START F1
PROGRAM RESET F2
PAUSE CONTINUE PAUSE CONTINUE
HOME HOME
ARM POWER ARM POWER
The function of the buttons are identical, only the labels on the buttons are
changed. The F1, F2, (CYCLE START PROGRAM RESET) buttons are user
programmable. They can be programmed to have specific meanings for different
applications. For instance an application can be programmed to require that one
or both buttons must be pressed in order to initiate a robot movement.
The PAUSE CONTINUE button if pressed while the robot is in motion causes the
robot motion to pause. For example if robot motion is initiated from the
command line and then terminated from the keyboard (ALT-A or ALT_E) the
operating system takes control, stops the robot, and flashes the PAUSE
CONTINUE button. To initiate robot movement again the PAUSE CONTINUE
button must be pressed. A message appears on the terminal requesting that the
button be pressed.
Each of the buttons has an indicator light. In the case of the ARM POWER
button, the light indicates the ARM POWER status. If the light is illuminated, the
ARM POWER is ON. Correspondingly if the light is not illuminated, the ARM
POWER is OFF. The HOME light is used to indicate that the A series robot is
homed or, that the F3 robot is calibrated. The HOME button however does not
cause the either robot to be homed or calibrated.
The remaining lights are programmable and have no relationship to the button
status. Like the buttons the light function can be programmed using the RAPL 3
subprograms. They can be programmed to indicate certain conditions, or to
illuminate when the robot is in a certain position.
Status Window
The status window on the controller, can display two hexadecimal digits. The
subprogram panel_status can be used to set and test the status window. The
function changes the window display but does not change the system status.
Panel Button Subprograms
The following subprograms can be used to control the front panel:
onbutton
Waits for one of the buttons to be pressed. The light can
be made to blink while waiting for the light to be pressed.
The light is left in the same state as when we found it.
panel_button
Returns True if the button is pressed.
panel_button_wait
Waits for a particular button to be pushed.
panel_buttons
Returns the setting of the panel buttons as a bit vector.
panel_light_get
Gets the status of a particular light.
panel_light_set
Sets the status of one particular light.
panel_lights_get
Gets the status of the controller front panel buttons.
panel_lights_set
Sets the status of the controller front panel buttons.
panel_status
Sets the front panel status display to show a specified
value
Button_enum type
A global enumerated type variable button_enum is defined for the buttons as
follows:
global typedef button_enum enum
BF_1 =1,
BF_2 =2,
B_PAUSE_CONT =4,
b_HOME =8
end enum
Gripper
grip
gripdist_set
Moves servo-gripper fingers to a specified distance apart.
grip_cal
Calibrates the gripper.
grip_close
Closes the gripper.
grip_finish
Holds program execution until gripper motion is finished.
grip_open
Opens the gripper.
gripdist_get
Gets the current distance between servo-gripper fingers.
gripisfinished
Determines if the gripper is finished moving.
gripper_stop
Stops the gripper motion
griptype_get
Gets what the robot gripper type is currently set to.
griptype_set
Sets the gripper type to correspond to the gripper in use:
air or servo-motor.
Home
home
Homes specified axes.
homezc
Homes.
hsw_offset_get
Returns the offset between homing switch and calibration
position.
robotishomed
Returns current home state.
zero
Sets all the current motor position registers to 0.
Location
Kinematic Conversion
joint_to_motor
Converts a location from joint angles to motor pulses.
joint_to_world
Converts a location from joint angles to world coordinates.
motor_to_joint
Converts a location from motor pulses to joint angles.
motor_to_world
Converts a location from motor pulses to world coordinates.
world_to_joint
Converts a location from world coordinates to joint angles.
world_to_motor
Converts a location from world coordinates to motor pulses.
Data Manipulation
here
Stores the current commanded location in a location
variable.
loc_cdata_get
Packs cartesian data from a location into a float array.
loc_cdata_set
Packs cartesian data from a float array into a location.
loc_check
Tests the checksum of a location.
loc_class_get
Returns the class of a location.
loc_class_set
Sets the class of a location.
loc_pdata_get
Packs precision data from a location into an integer array.
loc_pdata_set
Packs precision data from an integer array into a location.
loc_re_check
Recalculates and resets the checksum of a location.
pos_axis _set
Sets the specified axis to a position.
pos_get
Gets the position of the robot.
pos_set
Sets all axes to a specified position.
shift_t
Alters cartesian location in tool frame of reference.
shift_w
Alters cartesian location in world frame of reference.
Flags
loc_flags_get
Returns the flags of a location.
loc_flags_set
Sets the flags of a location.
loc_machtype_get
Returns the machine type code of a location.
loc_machtype_set
Sets the machine type code of a location.
Math
These functions perform common mathematical calculations. All math functions
take floating point arguments.
acos
Calculates the arc cosine.
asin
Calculates the arc sine.
atan2
Calculates the arc tangent.
cos
Calculates the cosine.
deg
Converts radians to degrees.
fabs
Finds the absolute value of a float.
iabs
Finds the absolute value of an int.
ln
Calculates the natural logarithm.
log
Calculates the common logarithm.
pow
Calculates a value raised to a power.
rad
Converts degrees to radians.
rand
A function for generating random numbers (integers).
rand_in
A function for generating random numbers (integers)
which fall in the range specified.
sin
Calculates the sine.
sqrt
Calculates the square root.
str_to_float
Converts a string to a float.
str_to_int
Converts a string to an integer.
tan
Calculates the tangent.
Memory
heap_set
Sets the heap size of the current process.
heap_size
Returns the number of words in the heap.
heap_space
Returns the length of the longest contiguous free area in
the heap.
mem_alloc
Allocates an area of memory and clears it by initializing it
to zeros..
mem_free
Frees an allocated area by returning it to the pool of free
space.
memcopy
Copies a block of words (4 byte entities).
memset
Sets a block of words to contain a value.
memstat
Gets information about current memory status.
pdp_get
The function gets the private data area pointer for the
current thread.
pdp_set
A subroutine to set the private area memory for the
current thread.
str_sizeof
Returns the number of words of memory to store a string.
sync
Flushes file system buffers.
Motion
align
Aligns approach/depart axis to a world axis.
appro
Moves the tool centre-point to an approach position, not in
straight-line mode.
appros
Moves the tool centre-point to an approach position in
straight-line mode.
calrdy
Moves the arm to the calibrate position.
cpath
Calculates and immediately executes a path.
ctpath
Creates and stores a continuous path through an array of
locations with triggers for gpio (general purpose
input/output).
ctpath_go
Runs a path previously stored by ctpath.
depart
Moves the tool centre-point to a depart position in joint
interpolated mode.
departs
Moves the tool centre-point to a depart position in
straight-line mode.
finish
Forces a command to finish before the next command is
initiated.
grip
gripdist_set
Moves the fingers of the servo-gripper to a specified
distance apart from each other.
grip_close
Closes the gripper.
grip_finish
Holds program execution until gripper motion is finished.
grip_open
Opens the gripper.
gripper_stop
Stops the gripper motion
halt
Stops the robot motion
jog_t
tx, ty, tz,
yaw, pitch,
roll
Moves the tool centre-point in the tool frame of reference,
not in straight-line mode
jog_ts
txs, tys, tzs,
yaws, pitchs,
rolls
Moves the tool centre-point in the tool frame of reference,
in straight-line mode.
jog_w
wx, wy, wz,
zrot, yrot,
xrot
Moves the tool centre-point in the world frame of
reference, not in straight-line mode
jog_ws
wxs, wys, wzs,
zrots, yrots,
xrots
Moves the tool centre-point in the world frame of
reference, in straight-line mode.
joint
Rotates a rotational joint a specified number of degrees, or
moves a linear joint a specified number of current units.
limp
Disengages the servo control of a motor which limps that
joint.
lock
Locks an axis.
motor
Rotates a motor by a specified number of encoder pulses.
move
Moves the tool centre-point to a specified location, not in
straight-line mode.
moves
Moves the tool centre-point to a specified location, in
straight-line mode.
nolimp
Re-engages the servo motor of a joint previously set limp.
online
Sets the online mode
pitch
In the tool frame of reference rotates (joint interpolated
motion) around the orientation axis.
pitchs
In the tool frame of reference, rotates (straight line motion)
around the orientation axis.
ready
Moves the arm to the READY position.
robot_abort
Stops motion and discards contents of motion queue.
robot_cfg_save
Re-writes the /conf/robot.cfg file with the current robot
configuration information.
robot_info
Returns whether robot is done moving.
robotisdone
Returns the current robot done state
speed
speed_set
Sets or gets the speed of arm motions
speed_get
Sets or gets the speed of arm motions
unlock
Unlocks an axis.
Pendant
The pendant subprograms allow a program to use the teach pendant.
Pendant Library Commands
The following commands are exported from the pendant library and need the
library name (stp) to be specified in the subprogram call.
app_close
Closes a pendant application so that a new one can
be opened.
app_open
Selects the application specified by the argument
name.
clear_error
Clears persistent error bits on the DSP
confirm_menu
Forces the user to confirm an action before it is
carried out.
pendant_bell
Sounds the pendant bell.
pendant_chr_get
Reads a character from the pendant
pendant_close
Closes the pendant in preparation for shutting
down a program or the controller.
pendant_cursor_pos_get
Returns the current position of the pendant cursor.
pendant_cursor_pos_set
Move the cursor to the position specified
pendant_cursor_set
Enables or disables the pendant cursor.
pendant_flush
Flushes any junk characters in the incoming
buffer.
pendant_home
Moves the pendant cursor to the top left side of the
pendant screen (home).
pendant_home_clear
Moves the pendant cursor to the home position and
clears the screen.
pendant_open
Prepares the pendant for access and initializes it to
defaults.
pendant_write
Writes a string to the pendant.
robot_move
Prepares to move the robot using the pendant
select_menu
Displays the three lines s1, s2 and s3 on the
pendant screen.
shutdown
Shuts down the pendant subsystem.
startup
Initializes the pendant i/o in preparation for
invoking menus.
teach_menu
Selects and teaches variables for an application.
teach_var_v
Similar to teach_var with the added feature that
the variable is written in the location pointed to by
a pointer.
var_create
Creates a variable
var_teach
Teaches a location variable.
vars_save
Invokes the v3_vars_save() operation on the
currently open application v3 file.
Pointer Conversion and Function pointers
call_ifunc
Calls an integer function through a pointer.
Robot Configuration
Configuring the robot arm: number of axes, velocities, accelerations, gains, travel
limits, link lengths coordinate systems etc.
Refer also to the Calibrate and Home Categories for specific subprograms for
calibration and homing programs.
The following is a listing of the robot configuration commands. For more detail
about a command refer to the alphabetical command summary listing.
accel_get
Gets the acceleration for one axis.
accel_set
Sets the acceleration for one axis.
accels_get
Gets the accelerations for all axes.
accels_set
Sets the accelerations for all axes.
armpower
Enables and disables the armpower switch.
axes_get
Gets the number of axes.
axes_set
Sets the number of axes.
axis_status
Obtains data on all axes.
conf_get
Gets a list of robot configuration parameters.
gains_get
Gets the gains for an axis.
gains_set
Sets the gains for an axis.
gripisfinished
Determines if the gripper is finished moving.
griptype_set
Sets the gripper type to correspond to the gripper in use: air or
servo-motor.
jointlim_get
Gets limits of travel of axes.
jointlim_set
Sets limits of travel of axes.
linacc_get
Returns the current value of the robots linear acceleration in
metric or English engineering units.
linacc_set
Sets the current value of the robots linear acceleration in metric
or English engineering units to the value specified by the
parameter linacc.
linklen_get
Gets the link length for an axis.
linklen_set
Sets the link length for an axis.
linspd_get
Returns the maximum linear speed for the robot in units of mm
or in. per second depending on the configuration.
linspd_set
Sets the linear speed for the robot in units of mm or in. per
second depending on the configuration.
maxvel_get
Gets the maximum angular velocity for one motor.
maxvel_set
Sets the maximum angular velocity for one motor.
maxvels_get
Gets the maximum angular velocities for all motors.
maxvels_set
Sets the maximum angular velocities for all motors.
online
Sets the online mode.
robot_error_get
Returns the latest error state of the robot.
robot_flag_enable
Enables flags.
robot_info
Returns whether robot is done moving.
robot_mode_get
Gets the current mode of motion.
robot_odo
Gets the current value of the robot arm power odometer.
robot_servo_stat
Returns status of F3 servo controllers.
robot_type_get
Gets the current robot code for the installed kinematics.
robot_type_set
Sets the current robot code for the installed kinematics.
robotislistening
Determines if the robot server is responding to queries.
rotacc_get
Returns the value of the maximum rotational acceleration
parameter.
rotacc_set
Sets the value of the maximum rotational acceleration
parameter.
rotspd_get
Retrieves the current value of the maximum rotational speed
parameter.
rotspd_set
Sets the value of the maximum rotational speed parameter.
server_get
For use with multiple robot systems - Gets the name of the
current server name.
server_info
For use with multiple robot systems - Gets information about
the current server.
server_protocol
Returns the protocol designator from the robot server.
server_set
For use with multiple robot systems - Sets the current server.
server_version
Specifies the robot server version.
units_get
Gets current setting of units: metric or English.
units_set
Sets current units: metric or English.
verstring_get
Gets the current kinematics version string.
xpulses_get
Gets the number of encoder pulses per revolution of a motor.
xpulses_set
Sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution of a motor.
xratio_get
Gets the ratio of conversion from pulses to motion of an axis.
xratio_set
Sets the ratio of conversion from pulses to motion of an axis.
Signals
The 16 signals are listed in the Appendix.
malarm
Requests that the system send the current process a
specified signal after a specified delay.
sig_arm_set
Sets the signal to use to notify in case of an arm state
change.
sig_mask_set
Sets a signal mask and returns the old signal mask.
sigfifo
Sends a signal to all of the readers at the other end of a
fifo
sigmask
Returns the correct mask for a signal.
signal
Sets an action to be performed when a signal is received.
sigsend
Sends a signal to a process.
str_signal
Returns a pointer to a string that describes a signal.
WIFSIGNALED
Determines if the child process was signal-terminated.
WTERMSIG
Returns the actual signal number that signal-terminated a
child process.
Stance
Use of the Term Stance
RAPL-3 uses the term stance for a specific set of joint angles used when
reaching a location. This is a change from RAPL-II that used pose. ISO standard
8373, Manipulating Industrial Robots Vocabulary, reserves pose for a different
meaning.
stance_get
Returns the current stance of the robot.
stance_set
Sets the arm to a specified stance.
Status
robot_error_get
Returns the current (latest) error state of the robot.
robot_odo
Gets the current value of the robot arm power odometer.
robotisdone
Returns the current robot done state.
robotisfinished
Returns the current finished state of the robot
robotishomed
Returns current home state.
robotislistening
Determines if the robot server is responding to queries.
robotispowered
Returns the current state of the robot arm power.
verstring_get
Gets the current kinematics version string.
String Manipulation
chr_is_lower
Determines whether letter character is lower case.
chr_is_upper
Determines whether letter character is upper case.
chr_to_lower
Converts letter character to lower case.
chr_to_upper
Converts letter character to upper case.
sizeof
Returns the size, in RAPL-3 words, of its argument
str_append
Appends one string to another string.
str_chr_find
Finds the first occurrence of a character in a string.
str_chr_get
Returns the ASCII value of a specified character in a string.
str_chr_rfind
Finds the last occurrence of a character in a string.
str_chr_set
Sets the value of a specified character in a string.
str_cksum
Computes a 32-bit bytewise checksum of the characters of a
string.
str_dup
Allocates space for a string, copies it into the allocated space and
returns a pointer to the new string.
str_edit
Replaces a specified part of a string with another string.
str_error
Returns a pointer to a string that describes an error code.
str_len
Returns the length of a string.
str_len_set
Sets the length of a string.
str_limit
Returns the limit on the length of a string.
str_limit_set
Sets the limit on the length of a string.
str_scanf
Separates a string according to a format and places into variables.
str_signal
Returns a pointer to a string that describes a signal.
str_sizeof
Returns the number of words of memory to store a string.
str_substr
Copies a substring (a specified part of a string).
str_subsys
Given a specific error descriptor, the function returns a string
giving the name of the subsystem origination the error.
str_to_float
Converts a string to a float.
str_to_int
Converts a string to an integer.
str_to_lower
Converts string to lower case.
str_to_upper
Converts string upper case.
time_to_str
Converts a system time code to an ASCII string
System Process Control
Single and Multiple Processes
Splitting a program.
abort
Returns its argument value.
argc
Returns the number of command-line arguments to the
program.
argv
Returns a pointer to the nth command-line argument to the
program.
delay
Sleeps for at least the number time specified (millisecond)s.
execl
Loads and executes another program that is given in path.
Use this command when all the command-line arguments are
known.
execv
Loads and executes another program that is given in path.
Use this command when all the command-line arguments are
not known.
exit
Causes normal program termination.
get_ps
Gets the process status information from a process table.
getopt
Provides a mechanism for handling command line arguments
and options.
getpid
Gets the process identification number of the calling program.
getppid
Gets the process identification number of the parent of the
calling program.
memstat
Gets information about the current system memory status.
Returns the number of 64 byte units.
module_name_get
Gets the name of the module performing the subroutine call.
msleep
Sleeps for the time specified and then returns to the main
program.
robot_error_get
Returns the current (latest) error state of the robot.
sem_acquire
Attempts to acquire a semaphore.
sem_release
Releases a semaphore.
sem_test
Tests a semaphore.
setprio
Sets the priority of a process.
split
Creates a duplicate child process of the current process.
waitpid
Waits for a child process to complete.
WEXITSTATUS
Returns the actual exit code of the child process that exited.
WIFEXITED
Determines if the child process has been exited.
WIFSIGNALED
Determines if the child process was signal-terminated.
Operating System Management
Getting and setting process identification and priority.
setprio
Sets the priority of a process
sigsend
Sends a signal to a process.
socketpair
Gets a pair of file descriptors for a private client and server
socket
sysconf
Obtains system configuration information.
sysid_string
Returns a string describing a specified system id.
va_arg_get
Gets the next varargs argument.
va-arg_type
Returns a type descriptor for the next varargs argument.
Point of Control and Observation
These routines get or release point of control or point of observation. Any
command which writes to the robot (moves, re-sets parameters, etc.) requires
point of control. Only one process can have point of control at one time. If one
process has point of control, another process requesting point of control will be
denied point of control (ctl_get() will fail with an EBUSY error condition).
All library functions which require point of control explicitly ask for it, so there is
typically no need for the user to perform this task.
ctl_get
Gets point of control.
ctl_give
Gives control explicitly to the process specified by the pid
parameter.
ctl_rel
Releases point of control.
obs_get
Gets point of observation.
obs_rel
Releases point of observation.
Tool Transform and Base Offset
base_get
Gets the current base offset.
base_set
Sets the base offset.
tool_get
Gets the current tool transform, the redefinition of the
origin point and the orientation of the tool coordinate
system.
tool_set
Sets a tool transform, a redefinition of the origin point and
the orientation of the tool coordinate system.
v3 Files
The v3 subprograms allow a program to modify a v3 file.
These v3 subprograms are the same subprograms that are used by the teach
pendant and the application shell when you use those tools to modify the
teachable variables in a v3 file.
Before modifying a v3 file from a program, ensure that this is necessary.
Background
v3 files have a very specific use.
The v3 File
A v3 file contains the values for the teachable variables of a program. Teachable
variables can include: cartesian locations, precision locations, integers, floats,
and strings, both scalar and array.
Variables are declared teachable so that their values can be stored outside the
program, modified (normally by the teach pendant or the application shell), and
used for initializing.
Teaching Variables
The advantage of having variables in a v3 file is being able to modify values
outside the program. The primary advantage is being able to teach locations.
Using the teach pendant or the application shell, you can move the arm and,
with the teach pendants teach selection or ashs here command, have the data of
the current position packed into the location variable.
Initializing Variables with the v3 File
In the CROS/RAPL-3 environment, a v3 file is used to initialize teachable
variables of a program, at the moment when the program is readied to run. After
that, the v3 file is not used. Any changes made to a v3 file have no effect on a
program unless the program is run again. When it is run again, the v3 file is
used to initialize the teachable variables of the program, again, at the moment
when the program is readied to run.
Modifying and Using Variables
Any variable, whether cloc, ploc, int, float, or string, whether declared as
teachable or unteachable, can be modified and used within a program
independent of any v3 file.
Locations do not all have to be taught. For example, for a pallet (rows x columns
of locations) you could teach three corner locations, or for a microplate carousel
you could teach the top and bottom locations, and calculate the intermediate
locations. These calculated locations can be used in motion commands like any
other location variable.
To avoid calculating during each run of the program, you can store the variables.
Storing Variables in Any File
To store variables between runs of a program, or between the running of a set-up
program and the application program, the variables must be stored in a file. You
do not need to store them in a v3 file. Variables can be written out to a data file
and read in from that file with the regular file i/o subprograms.
Even though you can modify a data file from another RAPL-3 program or from
another kind of file editing program, you cannot load this file into an application
shell database or teach pendant database for the variables to be modified by the
application shell or the teach pendant.
Storing Variables in a v3 File
You must use the v3 file when you want to store variables outside the program
and also have them accessible using the teach pendant or the application shell.
Modifying a v3 File from a Program
There are instances where a v3 file must be modified from a program.
One is a situation where locations are determined by the program and need to be
available later for use by the teach pendant or the application shell.
Another is a situation where, as the program is running, the locations need to be
monitored and corrected and these corrected locations need to be used at the
next running of the program.
Using These v3 Subprograms
To properly modify a v3 file, several of these v3 subprograms must be used in a
certain order.
From a program, modify a v3 file carefully. An incorrect routine can result in a
corrupted v3 file and lost data. You have to construct routines similar to the teach pendant
and application shell routines that ensure that the v3 file is properly modified.
Architecture for v3 Subprograms
The following files and structures are part of the v3 architecture.
Program File
The program file is the executable file containing sub, func, and command calls
and other parts of the program. If the program file has any teachable variables,
data structures can be created for a corresponding v3 file. v3 File
The v3 file is the file that stores the data structures of teachable variables. The v3
file is used to initialize teachables in a program, as the program is readied to run.
Backing Store File
Backing store file is another term for the v3 file, highlighting its role as a back-
up, stored in the file system while the data structures are in memory and being
manipulated by v3 commands. Incore File
The incore file is the set of data structures loaded in memory. This file is the in-
core-memory equivalent to the v3 file stored in the file system, but also has a
control block. The file is a linked list of records. Control Block
A structure that contains data about the file, the records, and modifications.
There is one control block.
Record
A structure that contains data about a variable: its basetype, its identifier, its
value, etc. There are as many records as there are teachable variables.
Parameters
Commands, functions, and subroutines that manipulate v3 files use the following
structs as parameters.
v3_cb
The v3_cb struct is the control block.
v3_cb struct
v3_incore@
head
Head of the linked list
int entries How many entries in the list (not counting the
list head)
int locks How many v3_lock() calls have been done.
The file is not unlocked until this count
reaches 0 again
int fd fd of the open file descriptor.
-1 is none.
int dirty In-core data cleanliness flag.
0 is clean, 1 is data only, 2 is structure
change.
v3_header h Header, read from the file. Note: the size of
this section is variable depending on the size
of the header (sourcename)
end struct
v3_incore
The v3_incore struct is the record when loaded in core.
v3_incore struct
v3_incore@
next
For linking.
v3_incore@
prev
For linking.
int offset Offset in the file where the record is
located.
0 is not yet in the file
void@ valptr The value part of this record.
v3_record v The v3_record itself.
Note that sizeof(this field) gives misleading
results since the full name and the data block
are stored contiguously here to cut overhead.
end struct
Subs, Funcs, and Commands
Opening and Closing Files
These subprograms manage the storage file and the in-core file.
v3_extract
Builds data structures from the program file.
v3_f_close
Closes the storage file.
v3_f_disconnect
Disconnects the storage file from the in-core file.
v3_f_free
Frees memory by deleting the in-core file.
v3_f_modified
Checks the file for modifications.
v3_f_open
Loads a storage file into core memory.
v3_f_save
Saves an in-core file to a storage file.
v3_lock
Locks the file.
v3_new
Creates a new set of core block structures.
v3_save_on_exit
Sets the RAPL-3 interpreter so that when the program exits,
all of its final v3 variable values will be saved to the
specified v3 file.
v3_unlock
Unlocks the file.
Modifying Variables
These subprograms modify variables in the in-core file.
v3_append_lists
Appends a second list onto a first list.
v3_create_variable
Creates a new variable.
v3_delete_variable
Deletes a variable and its value from the list.
v3_find_variable
Finds a specified variable.
v3_get_first
Gets the first node on the list.
v3_get_info
Gets information about the in-core structures.
v3_get_next
Gets the next node on the list.
v3_get_prev
Gets the previous node on the list.
v3_get_value_p
Gets the pointer to the value element of an in-core
node.
v3_mark_taught
Marks an incore node as taught.
Win 32
These Win 32 commands allow a CROSnt process to communicate with a process
in the Windows NT environment.
The named pipe driver DLL allows servers to be written in RAPL-3 and have non-
RAPL-3 based clients. A named pipe is a Win32 inter-process communication
object that allows two processes (which do not have to be running on the same
machine) to transfer information between each other. The client-server
mechanism is used in this form of communication.
Named pipes provide two mechanisms for data transfer: byte-by-byte and
message based. Byte-by-byte sends data through the pipe on a byte-by-byte
basis. Message based transfers the entire data in one operation. Message based
reads can only be used if messaged based writes on the other end of the pipe are
enabled.
All transfers are done in overlapped i/o mode. This means that unless the
operation can be completed immediately, it is placed in the background. When
the operation is complete, a signal is sent to the process that started the
operation.
Normal read(), write(), reada(), readsa(), and other i/o operations can be used with
named pipes. The read and write calls can return an error, 0 if the I/O operation
is placed in the background, or the number of words actually read.
Further Windows NT Information
On the subject of named pipes in Windows NT, refer to Windows NT (Win 32)
documentation.
File System Mounting
For commands on mounting a CROSnt file system on a Windows NT file system,
see File and Device System Management.
Win 32 Commands
connectnp
Checks or waits for a client to connect with the
named pipe.
closenp
Closes a named pipe
disconnectnp
Breaks a pipe connection with a client.
opennp
Opens a named pipe in the Windows NT domain.
statusnp
Returns the current status of a named pipe
See also Device Input and Output for read(), write(), reada(), readsa(), and other
i/o operations.
Types Used With Win 32 Commands
The following types are used with the Win 32 commands.
NPIPE_MODES
global typedef NPIPE_MODES enum
M_READ_MESSAGE = 1
M_WRITE_MESSAGE = 2
end enum
NPIPE_STATUS
global typedef NPIPE_STATUS enum
NPIPE_OPENED = 0x0001,
NPIPE_CONNECTED = 0x0002,
NPIPE_CONNECT_PENDING = 0x0100,
NPIPE_READ_PENDING = 0x0200,
NPIPE_WRITE_PENDING = 0x0400,
NPIPE_TRANSACT_PENDING = 0x0800,
NPIPE_OPERATION_PENDING = 0x0F00
end enum
Subprograms: Alphabetical Listing
Subprograms of the CRS-supplied libraries are listed in alphabetical order on the
following pages.
140 Subprograms: Alphabetical Listing
Reading Subprogram Entries
Each subprogram is described in the following format.
name_of_subprogram
Alias Another name for the same subprogram. With some alias entries, there is a
cross-reference from the alias entry to the original entry which contains the full
description of the subroutine, function, or command.
Description A description of the functionality of this subroutine, function, or command.
Caution
Warning
A characteristic that could create a problem.
Library The library if the subprogram has export scope.
Syntax The subprograms declaration in the library. The declaration follows the rules for
subprogram declarations.
The declaration declares the scope of the subprogram. A few subprograms have
export scope. They are explicitly listed as such and must be called by naming the
library with the subprogram. All other subprograms have global scope. Since
they are visible to all programs, they are called by naming the subprogram only.
The declaration declares whether the subprogram is a subroutine, function, or
command. This determines whether it does not return a value, returns a value,
or returns a success/error integer under the systems error checking.
If the subprogram is a func, it declares the type of return value: int, float,
location, or pointer.
Next, the declaration names the subprogram with a unique identifier.
Within parentheses the declaration lists parameter(s), giving the type of
parameter and an identifier. The commas separating parameters are required
syntax. Three dots (. . .) indicate a variable number of parameters which are
described in the following parameter list.
Parameters
Arguments
A list with explanations and types.
Distinctions are made between parameters passed by value and parameters
passed by reference (var parameters). If a parameter passed by reference is
packed, expected values of the parameter are listed.
With subprograms that are able to take a variable number of parameters
(varargs), distinctions are made between required parameters and optional
parameters.
Parameters are also called arguments.
Returns The return value of the function or command which indicates success (zero or
positive) or failure (negative).
If a zero or positive value carries specific meaning, it is described.
If a negative value is returned for a specific reason, it is described.
Example An example of use in a program.
Result The example's result.
System Shell
Application Shell
If applicable, an equivalent command in the CROS/RAPL-3 system shell or
application shell, described in the Robot System Software Documentation Guide.
RAPL-II Any similar RAPL-II commands.
See Also Any related RAPL-3 subroutines, functions, commands, statements, keywords, or
topics, described in this Reference Guide.
Category The category of this subprogram. All subprograms are briefly listed with related
subprograms in the category section.
Using Subprograms
To use the subprogram in your program, call the subprogram by name with
parameter(s)/argument(s) of the type indicated. To use an export subprogram,
precede the subprogram call with the library name.
Follow the syntax and parameter descriptions, or modify an example.
Required characters are in non-italic monospace font. Programmer-
supplied identifiers and constructs are in italics. Optional items are in [square
brackets], except for arrays. The continuation character can be used.
abort
Description This is a utility command that simply returns its argument value. Since abort()
is a RAPL-3 command, a negative argument to abort() will cause a command
failure exception at the line where abort was called. If abort() is passed a positive
or zero argument, then it does nothing.
Syntax command abort( int err )
Parameters err the monitored return value: an int
Returns The value of the parameter.
Example if (check_status() > 0)
n = 1
else
n = -1
end if
abort(n) ;; will cause an exception if n is -1
RAPL-II ABORT terminates a program, but not under any system error checking.
See Also exit terminates program normally
Category System Process Control: Single and Multiple Process
accel_get
Description Gets the acceleration for one axis. The units are in deg/sec
2.
Syntax command accel_get( int axis, var float dst )
Parameters axis the axis being inquired: an integer
dst a float -packed with the acceleration in
Returns Success >= 0. The parameter is packed.
Failure < 0
Example float curr_accel
accel_get(5,curr_accel)
Application Shell Same as accel.
See Also accels_get gets the accelerations for all axes
accel_set sets the acceleration for one axis
accels_set sets the accelerations for all axes
Category Robot Configuration
accel_set
Description Sets the acceleration for one axis.
Joint F3 A465 A255
Default Maximum Default Maximum Default Maximum
1 879 1758 720 1440 500 1000
2 879 1758 720 1440 500 1000
3 879 2637 720 1440 500 1000
4 1098 3294 1425 2850 2250 4500
5 1098 3294 1440 2850 4500 9000
6 1098 3294 1425 2850
Syntax command accel_set( int axis, float accel_in )
Parameters axis the axis being set: an int
accel_in the acceleration for that axis in deg/sec
2
: a float
Note: If accel_in is less than 10% of the default acceleration value, the value will
be set to 10% of the default instead.
Returns Success >= 0
Failure < 0
Example accel_set( 1, 879 )
RAPL-II Similar to @ACCEL.
See Also accel_get gets the acceleration for one axis
accels_get gets the accelerations for all axes
accels_get
Description Gets the accelerations for all axes. The units are in deg./sec.
2
Syntax command accels_get( var float[8] accels )
Parameters accels the accelerations of the axes in deg/sec
2
: an array of floats
Returns Success >= 0. The parameter is packed.
Failure < 0
Example float[8] curr_accels
accels_get(curr_accels)
Application Shell Same as accel
accels_set
Description Sets the accelerations for all axes. The units are in deg./sec.
2
:
F3 A465 A255
Default Maximum Default Maximum Default Maximum
1 879 1758 720 1440 500 1000
2 879 1758 720 1440 500 1000
3 879 2637 720 1440 500 1000
4 1098 3294 1425 2850 2250 4500
5 1098 3294 1440 2850 4500 9000
6 1098 3294 1425 2850
Syntax command accels_set( var float[8] accels )
Parameters accels the accelerations for the axes in deg./sec.
2
: an array of floats
Note: If any element of accels is less than 10% of the default acceleration value
for that axis, the value will be set to 10% of the default instead.
Failure < 0
Example float[8] new_accels = {500, 500 , 500 , 4500, 9000, 0, 0, 0}
accels_set(new_accels)
RAPL-II Similar to @ACCEL.
accels_get gets the accelerations for all axes
access
Description Checks to see if the file specified in path can be accessed in the way specified by
mode.
Syntax func int access( var string[] path, a_modes mode )
Parameters path the filename: a variable length string
mode the access mode, of type a_modes:
F_OK file exists
X_OK file is executable
W_OK file is writeable
R_OK file is readable
Returns
0 Success. The file exists and can be accessed in mode.
-EINVAL Some of the arguments are illegal (bad mode or file path.)
-ENOTDIR One of the components in path was not a directory.
-ENOENT The file denoted by path did not exist.
-EIO An I/O error occurred.
-EACCESS The access specified by mode is not allowed
Example string[] path = filename
...
if access( path, F_OK ) == 0
;; File Exists
if access( path, X_OK ) == 0
;; File is executable
end if
if access( path, W_OK ) == 0
;; File is writeable
end if
if access( path, R_OK ) == 0
;; File is readable
end if
end if
RAPL-II No equivalent.
See Also chmod changes the access mode
open opens a file
Category File and Device System Management
acos
Description Calculates the arc cosine of a float.
Argument Range: +1.0 argument 1.0
Syntax func float acos( float x )
Returns Success >= 0. The arc cosine of the argument, an angle in degrees.
Failure < 0
Example float x = 0.965926
printf ("acos of 0.965926 = {}\n",acos( x ))
Result 15.000
RAPL-II ACOS
See Also asin calculates the arc sine
atan2 calculates the arc tan
cos calculates the cosine
Category Math
addr_decode
Description A subroutine for troubleshooting errors. Looks up the address specified in the
line number tables and decodes it, if possible, into a line and file. Note that if the
string sp is NULL, no file name is copied.
Syntax sub addr_decode(int address, var int line, string[]@ sp)
Parameter address int defining the address to look up in the line tales
lineint gets packed with the line number
sp string pointer specifying the file to write the decoded line to.
Returns nothing. line is set to 0 on failure; sp@ (if sp is not NULL) is set to on failure.
Example int lnum
string[64] fname
try
;;
;; some code here
;;
except
printf(Error {} ({}) happened\n, -error_code(),
str_error(-error_code()))
addr_decode(error_addr(), lnum, fname)
printf( at line {} of file {}\n, lnum, fname)
end try
Result If an error occurs in the try block, the error and its name and
the line and file where it occurred will be printed.
See Also error_code() find the error descriptor of an exception that has occurred
error_addr() find the address where an exception occurred
str_error() convert an error descriptor into a string
Category Error Message Handling
addr_to_file
Description Calls the addr_decode subroutine to convert the given address to a file name
string. This provides a simpler interface to addr_decode() for getting at the name
of a file where an exception has occurred.
Syntax func string[]@ addr_to_file(int addr)
Parameter addr an int which specifies the address which is to be converted to a file
name
Returns A pointer to a string containing the file name, or a pointer to an empty string if it
fails.
Example ;; in the except block of a try-except construct:
printf(The exception happened at line {} of file {}\n,/
addr_to_line(error_addr()), addr_to_file(error_addr()))
Result The line and file where the exception occurred are printed.
See Also addr_decode()
error_addr()
addr_to_line
Description A function that calls the addr_decode function to convert an address to a line
number.
Syntax func int addr_to_line(int addr)
Parameter addr an int specifying the address to be converted to a line number.
Returns The correct line number, or 0 if it fails.
Example see addr_to_file()
See Also addr_decode()
addr_to_file()
error_addr()
Category Error Message handling
align
Description Aligns the approach/depart tool axis parallel to an axis of the world coordinate
system.
The approach/depart tool axis is a specific axis of the tool coordinate system.
With no tool transform set (the tool coordinate system is at its default, identical
to the mechanical interface coordinate system), the approach/depart tool axis is
the axis arising off of, and perpendicular to, the tool flange (mechanical
interface). The F3 tool coordinate system (which is similar to a recent
international standard) and the A465/A255 tool coordinate system (which is an
earlier pre-standard system) are different.
F3: the approach/depart tool axis is the Z axis of the F3 tool coordinate
system. The axes of the tool coordinate system are parallel to the
corresponding axes of the world coordinate system when the arm is in the
calrdy position (straight up).
A465 or A255: the approach/depart tool axis is the X axis of the A465/A255
tool coordinate system. The axes of the tool coordinate system are parallel to
the corresponding axes of the world coordinate system when the arm is in the
ready position.
With no tool transform set the approach/depart tool axis is the axis
perpendicular to, the tool flange (A-series tool X axis, F-series tool Z axis). The
align() command aligns the approach/depart axis with the world axis specified.
If a tool transform has been set, the tool coordinate system is transformed from
the default setting and the align() command aligns the transformed
approach/depart tool axis parallel to an axis of the world coordinate system.
The world axis for alignment is specified with a parameter.
The align() command moves the arm in joint-interpolated motion. The tool centre
points start and end point are the same, but the tool centre point travels as a
result of various joint motions, not in straight line mode.
Syntax command align ( int speed, align_axis_t axis [, coord_t] )
Parameters speed the speed during align, percentage of full speed
axis the axis to align to, one of:
ALIGN_NEAR aligns to the closest axis of the world coordinate system
ALIGN_X aligns to the + X axis of world coordinate system
-ALIGN_X aligns to the X axis of world coordinate system
ALIGN_Y aligns to the + Y axis of world coordinate system
-ALIGN_Y aligns to the Y axis of world coordinate system
ALIGN_Z aligns to the + Z axis of world coordinate system
-ALIGN_Z aligns to the Z axis of world coordinate system
Optional Parameter coord_t
Failure < 0
Example align(_Z) ;; aligns to the Z axis
align(ALIGN_NEAR) ;; aligns to the closest axis
RAPL-II Similar to ALIGN.
See Also tool_set re-defines the tool coordinate system
Category Motion
analogs_get
Description Retrieves the values of the eight analog inputs (2 of which are available to the
user) on the C500C controller.
Syntax command analogs_get( var float[8] values )
Related Definitions The following defined symbols give which channel is which:
ANA_USER1 -- user analog input 1
ANA_USER2 -- user analog input 2
ANA_SGAFEEDBACK -- servo gripper feedback input
ANA_BATTERYVOLT -- lithium backup battery (volts)
ANA_V24SUPPLY -- 24 volt supply (volts)
ANA_BOARDTEMP -- main board temperature (Celsius)
Returns Success >= 0; the values[] array filled in with the input readings.
Failure < 0 (-ve error code)
Example float[8] vals
...
analogs_get(vals)
printf(The board temperature is {} Celsius\n,
vals[ANA_BOARDTEMP])
See Also boardtemp_get()
Category Analog Input
app_close
Description Closes a pendant application so that a new one can be opened. Only one
application can be open at any given time.
Library stp
Syntax export command app_close()
Parameters None
Failure < 0
Example string[10] name = my_app_23
stp:startup
stp:app_open(name, 0)
...
stp:app_close()
...
Result The current application being accessed from the pendant is closed.
See Also pendant_close
start_up
app_open
Category Pendant
app_open
Description Selects the application specified by the argument name. If the application does
not exist and the create parameter is true then create the application. An error
code is returned if the application is not found.
Library stp
Syntax export command app_open(var string[] name, int create)
Parameter create_flag 1 create is true
create_flag 0 create is false
Failure < 0
Example ...
stp: app_open(New_Path, 0)
...
Result If an application New_Path exists, it is selected, if it does not
exist, the return is an error descriptor.
See Also app_close()
Category Pendant
appro
Description Moves the tool centre-point to an approach position. The approach position is
defined by a location, and a distance from that location along the
approach/depart tool axis.
Moves in joint-interpolated mode (tool centre-point curves through space as
necessary as a result of joint changes). The motion is not cartesian-interpolated
(straight-line).
Used to move the arm, usually quickly, to a position near a location before
moving the tool, usually slowly, to the location.
Syntax command appro( gloc location, float distance )
Parameter location the target location: a cloc or ploc
distance the distance from the location to the approach position: a float
Failure < 0
Example appro(rack_5, 100.0) ;; millimetres
appro(tray_1, 4.0) ;; inches
RAPL-II Similar to APPRO.
See Also appros like appro(), but in straight line motion
depart moves to depart position; opposite of appro
departs moves to depart position; opposite of appros
tool_set re-defines the tool coordinate system
Category Motion
appros
Description Moves the tool centre-point to an approach position. The approach position is
defined by a location, and a distance from that location along the
approach/depart tool axis.
Moves in cartesian-interpolated mode (straight line motion). The motion is not
joint-interpolated (tool centre-point curves through space as necessary as a result
of joint changes).
Used to move the arm, usually quickly, to a position near a location before
moving the tool, usually slowly, to the location.
Syntax command appros( gloc location, float distance )
Parameter location the target location: a cloc or ploc
distance the distance from the location to the approach position: a float
Failure < 0
Example appros(rack_5, 100.0)
appros(tray_1, 4.0)
RAPL-II Similar to APPRO.
See Also move like moves(), but not in a straight line
depart moves to depart position; opposite of appro
departs moves to depart position; opposite of appros
Category Motion
argc
Description Returns the number of command-line arguments to the program. The program
name is included as an argument.
Reminder: Arrays are indexed by zero; The following code segment will produce
an error:
num_args = argc()
args = argv( num_args )
Syntax func int argc()
Returns Always succeeds. Returns the number of command line arguments.
Example ;; program name: ex_argcv
;; the following example prints out the command line arguments
;; including the name of the process.
main
const MAX_COUNT = 10
int num_args, count = 0
string[]@[10] arg_ptr ;; maximum of 9 arguments
;; in addition to the name
num_args = argc() ;; get num. of line args.
printf ("number of arguments {}\n",num_args)
while (count<num_args) && (count<MAX_COUNT)
arg_ptr[count] = argv(count) ;; initialize ptr to string
printf ("arg {8}: {8}\n",count,arg_ptr[count])
count ++ ;; increment index count
end while
end main
Result a command line of ex_argcv 11 22 33 will produce the following
output:
arg 0: ex_argcv
arg 1: 11
arg 2: 22
arg 3: 33
See Also argv returns a pointer to a command-line argument
Category System Process Control: Single and Multiple Processes
argv
Description Returns a pointer to the nth command-line argument to the program. By
convention, argv(0) is the name of the program itself.
Syntax func string[]@ argv( int n )
Returns Returns a NULL pointer on failure, or a pointer to the string on success.
Example ;; program name: ex_argcv
;; the following example prints out the command line arguments
;; including the name of the process.
main
const MAX_COUNT = 10
int num_args, count = 0
string[]@[10] arg_ptr ;; maximum of 9
;; arguments
;; in addition to the
;; name
num_args = argc() ;; get num. of line
args.
printf ("number of arguments {}\n",num_args)
while (count<num_args) && (count<MAX_COUNT)
arg_ptr[count] = argv(count) ;; initialize pointer to
string
printf ("arg {8}: {8}\n",count,arg_ptr[count])
count ++ ;; increment index count
end while
end main
Result a command line of ex_argcv 11 22 33 will produce the following
output:
arg 0: ex_argcv
arg 1: 11
arg 2: 22
arg 3: 33
See Also argc returns the number of command-line arguments
armpower
Description Enables and disables the armpower switch. As long as one process has the arm
power OFF, arm power cannot be turned on.
Syntax command armpower( Boolean switch )
Parameter switch Boolean, one of:
OFF disables the arm power (turns it off and keeps it off)
ON enables arm power (allows arm power to be turned on)
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example armpower(OFF)
...
armpower(ON)
RAPL-II Same as ENABLE/DISABLE ARM and ARM ON/OFF.
asin
Description Calculates the arc sine of a float.
Argument Range: +1.0 argument 1.0
Syntax func float asin( float x )
Returns Success >= 0 The arc sine of the argument, an angle in degrees.
Failure < 0
float y
printf (asin of 0.422618 = {}\n,asin( x ))
Result 25.0000
RAPL-II ASIN
See Also acos calculates the arc cosine
atan2 calculates the arc tan
sin calculates the sine
Category Math
p an int.
pstr the : a pointer to a string.
f the : a pointer to a string.
l the : an int.
atan2
Description Calculates the arc tangent of a float, an angle in radians whose tangent is a/b,
using the signs of a and b to determine the quadrant.
Syntax func float atan2( float a, float b )
Returns Success >= 0. Returns the angle.
Failure < 0
Example printf ("Q1 2, 2: {}\n",atan2 (2,2))
printf ("Q2 2,-2: {}\n",atan2 (2,-2))
printf ("Q3 -2,-2: {}\n",atan2 (-2,-2))
printf ("Q4 -2, 2: {}\n",atan2 (-2,2))
Result Q1 2, 2: 45.00
Q2 2,-2: 135.00
Q3 -2,-2:-135.00
Q4 -2, 2: -45.00
RAPL-II ATAN2
See Also acos calculates the arc cosine
asin calculates the arc sine
tan calculates the tangent
Category Math
axes_get
Description Returns the number of machine axes, transform axes, and actual axes installed
on the robot. Machine axes are the axes of the robot arm, e.g. 6 for F3. Transform
axes are the axes that participate in the kinematics transform, e.g. 7 for F3T
(robot arm and track). Actual axes are the total number of axes in the controller,
e.g. 8 for T475 with C500-controlled carousel.
Syntax command axes_get( var int machine, var int transform, var int
actual )
Parameters machine the machine axes: an int.
transform the transform axes: an int.
actual the actual axes: an int.
Returns Success = 0. Parameters are packed accordingly.
Failure < 0
Example int mach, trans, act
axes_get( mach, trans, act )
See Also axes_set sets the number of machine, transform, and actual axes
axes_set
Description The axes_set command sets the number of axes in the robot system. An axis is a
joint that has its position (motion) controlled by the controller. A track or a
carousel can be an axis if connected as part of the robot system. For example, an
F3, with 6 axes, can have a track as axis 7.
Syntax command axes_set( int numaxes )
Parameters numaxes the number of axes; an intReturns Success >= 0
Failure < 0
Example axes_set(7) ;; set the system axes to 7.
See Also axes_get gets the number of machine, transform, and actual axes
axis_status
Description Obtains data on the status of all axes.
Syntax command axis_status( var int[8] status )
Parameter An array of up to 8 integers into which the status for each axis is stored.
The axis status is a bit mask. The bits represent the following:
Bit Number Use
0 home switch state
1 positive (+) direction limit switch state
2 negative () direction limit switch state
3 limp command state
4 axis limp due to collision state
5 arm for receipt of next zero-cross event
6 zero-cross event has happened
7 lock axis from any motion commands
8 any error condition
9 servo fault bit
10 motor fault bit
11 joint homed
12 joint calibrated
13 begin motion
14 loss of feedback check bit
15 axis done state
Failure < 0
Example int[8] curr_status
...
axis_status(curr_status)
RAPL-II Similar to STATUS which obtained status data but displayed them at the default
device.
base_get
Description Gets the current base offset, the redefinition of the origin point and the
orientation of the world coordinate system.
The default origin is the centre of the base mounting surface of the robot arm.
The offset has translational coordinates, x, y, and z, rotational coordinates, zrot,
yrot, and xrot, and extra axes (if any). The data type used is a cloc which also has
an integer flag.
Syntax command base_get( var cloc baseloc )
Parameter baseloc the variable to hold offset data: a cloc of variable size
baseloc the offset with flag, x, y, z, zrot, yrot, xrot, e1, e2 data: a cloc
flag the : an int
x the distance along the X axis, in current units: a float
y the distance along the Y axis, in current units: a float
z the distance along the Z axis, in current units: a float
zrot the rotation around the Z axis, in degrees: a float
yrot the rotation around the Y axis, in degrees: a float
xrot the rotation around the X axis, in degrees: a float
e1 the distance or rotation of the first extra axis: a float
e2 the distance or rotation of the second extra axis: a float
Failure < 0
Example cloc curr_offset
base_get(curr_offset)
print(curr_offset, \n) ;; no offset applied
Result cloc[9,64(0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0)]
RAPL-II Similar to OFFSET.
See Also base_set sets a base offset, a re-definition of world coordinates
shift_w alters coordinate(s)/orientation(s) in world frame of reference
tool_get gets the current tool transform, the redefinition of tool coordinates
Category Tool Transform and Base Offset
base_set
Description Sets a base offset, a redefinition of the origin point and the orientation of the
world coordinate system.
The default origin is the centre of the base mounting surface of the robot arm.
The base_set() command has the capacity for a transformation of a five or six
degree-of-freedom arm and one or two extra axes. A cloc data type is used which
requires an integer constant flag followed by float constant coordinates. The
coordinate system can be redefined by translational coordinates, x, y, and z, and
rotational coordinates: zrot, yrot, and xrot. The origin can be further redefined by
an extra axis, for example for a track.
A common use of the base_set() command is to transform the coordinate system
for an inverted-mounted arm.
Syntax command base_set( var cloc baseloc )
Parameters baseloc offset with flag, x, y, z, zrot, yrot, xrot, e1, e2 data: a cloc
flag the *: an int
zrot the rotation around the Z axis, in degrees: a float
yrot the rotation around the Y axis, in degrees: a float
xrot the rotation around the X axis, in degrees: a float
e1 the distance or rotation of the first extra axis: a float
e2 the distance or rotation of the second extra axis: a float
Failure < 0
Example cloc invert
invert = cloc{0, 0, 0, 30, 0, 180, 0, 0, 0}
base_set (invert)
;; add 30 units offset to Z
;; reverse direction of Z and X
;; appropriate for an inverted arm
RAPL-II Similar to OFFSET.
See Also base_get gets the current base offset
shift_w alters coordinate(s)/orientation(s) in world frame of reference
tool_set sets a tool transform, a re-definition of the tool coordinate system
boardtemp_get
Description The boardtemp_get() function retrieves the C500C main board temperature, in
degrees Celsius.
Syntax func float boardtemp_get()
Returns Success: returns the temperature.
Example printf(The board temperature is {} Celsius\n, boardtemp_get())
See Also analogs_get()
Category Analog Input
build_cloc
Description Allows building a cartesian location from a set of constants and variables. It is
equivalent to using loc_flags_set() to set the clocs flags, loc_cdata_set() to set the
8 cartesian axis values and loc_re_check() to recompute the checksum of the
resulting location.
Syntax func cloc build_cloc( int flags, float x, float y, float z, float
roll, float pitch, float yaw, float e1, float e2 )
Returns A cloc constructed from the provided data.
See Also build_ploc(), loc_flags_set(), loc_cdata_set(), loc_re_check()
Category Location: Data Manipulation
build_ploc
Description Allows building a precision location from a set of constants and variables. It is
equivalent to using loc_machtype_set() to set the plocs machine type,
loc_flags_set() to set the plocs flags, loc_pdata_set() to set the 8 precision motor
pulse values and loc_re_check() to recompute the checksum of the resulting
location.
Syntax func ploc build_ploc( int machtype, int flags, float x, float y,
float z, float roll, float pitch, float yaw, float e1, float e2 )
Returns A ploc constructed from the provided data.
See Also build_cloc(), loc_machtype_set(), loc_flags_set(), loc_pdata_set(), loc_re_check()
calibrate
Description Finds the proximity sensor, backs up to the last zero cross, and calibrates axes.
Data is written to a calibration file named robot.cal stored in the conf/
directory. If no arguments are specified, all axes are calibrated.
Syntax command calibrate( [axis] [,axis] [,axis] . . . )
Parameter axis an axis to calibrate: an int
Failure < 0
Example calibrate()
calibrate(1,3)
RAPL-II @@CAL
See Also home homes the axes
calzc calibrates at the next zero cross
zero sets motor position registers to zero
Category Calibration
call_ifunc
Description Calls an integer function through a function pointer.
Note:
The function in question cannot be a VARARGS function.
The compiler cannot perform any argument checking, etc. for the call. Use
carefully.
What is passed to the function is quite literally what is listed. For example, if
<int>x is passed, but the function was expecting a var int parameter, it will fail.
Var parameters must be passed as explicit pointers, for example: if the function
is expecting "var int x", then pass variable "int z" as &z.
Syntax func int call_ifunc(void @funcp, ...)
Failure < 0
Example func int f1(int a, int b)
return a + b
end func
main
int a, b
void@ vp
vp = f1 ;; vp points to the function
a = 2
b = 3
printf(f1(a,b) = {}\n, call_ifunc(vp, a, b))
end main
Result The program prints out f1(a,b) = 5
Category Pointer Conversion and Function Pointers
calrdy
Description Moves the arm to the calibrate position. For an F3 or A465, moves the arm
straight up. For an A255, moves the arm horizontally outward.
Syntax command calrdy()
Parameter none
Failure < 0
Example calrdy()
Application Shell Same as calrdy.
RAPL-II Same as @CALRDY.
See Also zero sets motor position registers to zero
Motion
calzc
Description Calibrates at the next zero pulse of the encoder.
Syntax command calzc( int axis, var int offset )
Parameter axis the axis to calibrate: an int
offset the offset: an int
Failure < 0
Example int offset = 0
calzc (1,offset) ;; calibrate axis one with no offset
motion
RAPL-II @@CALZC
See Also homezc
calibrate calibrates axes
home homes the axes
zero sets motor position registers to zero
cfg_load
Description Loads a text configuration file for the current application. For a concrete
example of a configuration file, examine the /conf/robot.cfg robot server
configuration file on a typical C500/B/C controller.
Text configuration files are useful for holding strings, integers, constant clocs (for
tool transforms, etc.) and floating point constants that do not typically change
from run to run and do not need to be taught, but nevertheless need to be easily
configurable. Note that plocs are not supported.
Syntax command cfg_load(string[] myname, cfg_record@ crp, int n_records)
Parameters myname -- used for constructing the config file name.
n_records -- the number of cfg_records pointed to by crp
crp -- points to the cfg_records describing the
variables to load
Details The cfg_load() mechanism works like this:
1. The myname argument is used to find the correct configuration file to load.
The cfg_load() routine tries myname.cfg (ie., in the current directory) first, then
/conf/myname.cfg. If neither of these files exist, then config_load() returns the
appropriate error code.
2. The config file is read, one line at a time. Anything following a ; is ignored as
a comment (unless the ; is inside a quoted string.) It is expected that lines will
be of the form:
symbol value
3. For each symbol value line found, the records pointed to by crp are
searched. If a match is found, then the value part of the line is converted and
stored in the variable indicated by the cfg_record.
Data structures The cfg_record structure is a global type definition in the system library, as is
defined as:
typedef cfg_record struct
string[]@ ident ;; field name
va_types type ;; the type (va_t_int, va_t_float,
;; va_t_cloc, va_t_string)
int limit ;; length limit, if va_t_string
void@ where ;; where to put the value
end struct
Example ;; A small example that uses the configuration file routines:
;; These are the variables whose values we wish to configure:
int reps = 10 ;; note the initialization to a default value
float height
cloc ttransform
string[20] title
;; The cfg_record table:
.define N_CONFIG 4
cfg_record[N_CONFIG] cfg_table = { \
{ reps, va_t_int, 0, &reps }, \
{ height, va_t_float, 0, &height }, \
{ tool, va_t_cloc, 0, &ttransform }, \
{ title, va_t_string, 20, &title } \
}
;; How we load the config in the main program...
main
...
cfg_load(test, &(cfg_table[0]), N_CONFIG)
;; At this point, all of the config variables have been
;; read in. If they were absent from the config file,
;; then they still have their default values.
...
end main
Example .cfg file ; sample .cfg file for the above example:
height 4.2 ; you can have a comment here, too.
reps 20
title This is a test
; note the format of the value for a cloc. The first number
; is the flags field, the others are x, y, z ...
tool { 0, 0.0, 0.0, 1.2, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 }
; end of the .cfg file
See Also cfg_load_fd(), cfg_save(), cfg_save_fd(), cfg_token_get()
Category Configuration File Handling
cfg_load_fd
Description Loads a configuration information from a file that is already open. Please see
cfg_load() for details.
Syntax command cfg_load_fd(int fd, string[] myname,
cfg_record@ crp, int n_records)
Parameters fd -- the open (for reading) config file descriptor
myname -- used for constructing the config file name.
crp -- points to the of cfg_records describing the
variables to load
Example ;; See the cfg_load() example above for details.
;; A small example that uses the configuration file routines:
;; These are the variables whose values we wish to configure:
int reps = 10 ;; note the initialization to a default value
float height
cloc ttransform
string[20] title
;; The cfg_record table:
.define N_CONFIG 4
cfg_record[N_CONFIG] cfg_table = { \
{ reps, va_t_int, 0, &reps }, \
{ height, va_t_float, 0, &height }, \
{ tool, va_t_cloc, 0, &ttransform }, \
{ title, va_t_string, 20, &title } \
}
;; How we load the config in the main program...
main
int fd
...
open(fd, myconfig.cfg, O_RDONLY, 0) ;; open the file
cfg_load_fd(fd, whatever, &(cfg_table[0]), N_CONFIG)
...
end main
See Also cfg_load(), cfg_save(), cfg_save_fd(), cfg_token_get()
cfg_save
Description Re-writes a configuration file for the current application. Please see cfg_load() for
many related details. This allows a program to change its own configuration and
then re-write its configuration file. Note that the original configuration file is
completely overwritten; all comments in it are lost. Also note that cfg_save() will
not create a missing config file; the file must already exist (but may be empty).
Syntax command cfg_save(string[] myname, cfg_record@ crp, int n_records)
Parameters myname -- used for constructing the config file name.
variables to save
Example ;; To the example from cfg_load(), add the following code
;; to re-write the configuration file:
...
cfg_save(test, &(cfg_table[0]), N_CONFIG)
...
See Also cfg_load(), cfg_load_fd(), cfg_save_fd(), cfg_token_get()
cfg_save_fd
Description Re-writes a configuration file for the current application. Please see cfg_load() for
many related details. This allows a program to change its own configuration and
then re-write its configuration file. Note that the original configuration file is
completely overwritten; all comments in it are lost.
Syntax command cfg_save_fd(int fd, string[] myname,
cfg_record@ crp, int n_records)
Parameters fd -- the open (for writing) config file descriptor
myname -- used for constructing the config file name.
variables to save
Example ;; To the example from cfg_load(), add the following code
;; to re-write the configuration file using cfg_save_fd():
...
int fd
open(fd, myconfig.cfg, O_WRONLY | O_TRUNC, 0) ;; open the file
cfg_save_fd(fd, test, &(cfg_table[0]), N_CONFIG)
...
See Also cfg_load(), cfg_load_fd(), cfg_save(), cfg_token_get()
chdir
Description Changes the current working directory to path. The search for all relative
pathnames (all pathnames that do not begin with a slash) starts at the current
working directory.
Syntax command chdir( var string[] path )
Returns
0 (-EOK) Success
-EINVAL If path was invalid
-ENOTDIR If path is not a directory
-ENOENT If path was not found
-EIO If an I/O error occurred
Example int fd
chdir ("/app/test/test2") ;; set working
directory
open (fd, "myfile", O_RDWR|O_CREAT, M_READ|M_WRITE )
fprintf (fd, "file header: 04/23/98")
close (fd)
System Shell cd
chmod
Description Changes access mode information of an object (file or device) in the file system.
Syntax command chmod( var string[] path, int mode )
Parameter path string defining the path to the file
mode the modes of access, of type mode_flags, any combination of:
M_READ read allowed
M_WRITE write allowed
M_EXEC executable
Returns
0 (-EOK) Success
-EINVAL If the arguments were invalid
-ENOTDIR If any of the directory components of path was not a directory
-ENOENT If path was not found
-EIO If an I/O error occurred
-EAGAIN If we are temporarily out of the system resources needed to
perform this operation.
Example chdir ("/app/test/test2") ;; set working directory
open (fd, "myfile", O_RDWR|O_CREAT, M_READ|M_WRITE )
fprintf (fd, "file header: 04/23/98") ;; write data to file
chmod ("/app/test/test2/myfile",M_WRITE) ;; prevent file from
being read
close (fd)
System Shell chmod
See Also open opens a file with specific access mode
chr_is_lower
Description Determines whether a character is lower case. Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.
Syntax func Boolean chr_is_lower( int char )
Parameter char the character: handled as an int
Returns True = 1
False = 0
Example int len, i, inval_char=0
string[25] user_input
...
printf ("enter selection (lower case only) : ")
readline (user_input,25)
...
for i = 0 to (str_len (user_input)-1)
if chr_is_lower(str_chr_get(user_input,i))== 0
inval_char = 1 ;; set invalid char. flag
end if
end for
See Also chr_is_upper checks if a character is upper case
Category String Manipulation
chr_is_upper
Description Determines whether a character is upper case. Returns 1 if true, 0 if false.
Syntax func Boolean chr_is_upper( int char )
Returns True = 1
False = 0
Example int len, i, inval_char=0
printf ("ENTER SELECTION (UPPER CASE ONLY): ")
...
if chr_is_upper(str_chr_get(user_input,i))== 0
inval_char = 1 ;; set invalid char. flag
end if
end for
See Also chr_is_lower checks if a character is lower case
chr_to_lower
Description Converts a letter from upper case to lower case. If the letter is already lower case,
it is not changed.
Syntax func int chr_to_lower( int char )
Returns
Example int char, len, i, flag=0
printf ("enter selection (lower case only): ")
...
char = str_chr_get(user_input,i) ;; read upper case char
char = chr_to_lower(char) ;; convert case of char
;; to lower
str_chr_set (user_input,i,char) ;; write char back into
;; string
flag = 1 ;; set char conversion
flag
end if
end for
See Also chr_to_upper converts a character to upper case
str_to_lower converts a string to lower case
chr_to_upper
Description Converts a letter from lower case to upper case. If the letter is already upper
case, it is not changed.
Syntax func int chr_to_upper( int char )
Failure < 0
Example int char, len, i, flag=0
printf ("ENTER SELECTION (UPPER CASE ONLY): ")
...
char = str_chr_get(user_input,i) ;; read lower case char
char = chr_to_upper (char) ;; convert case of char
;; to upper
str_chr_set (user_input,i,char) ;; write char back to
;; string
flag = 1 ;; set char conversion
flag
end if
end for
See Also chr_to_lower converts a character to lower case
str_to_upper converts a string to upper case
clear_error
Description Clears persistent error bits on the digital signal processor (DSP). This includes
runaways, collisions, overspeeds, and encoder faults. After an error of this type,
the clear_error() command must be invoked before the arm power can be re-
engaged.
NOTE: This command only works with the F-series arms.
Syntax command clear_error()
Failure < 0 Returns -ve error descriptor if command fails.
Example clear_error()
Category Pendant
close
Description Closes a file or device. The connection between a file descriptor and the open file
associated with it is broken This frees the file descriptor for use with other files.
Syntax command close( int fd )
Returns
0 (-EOK) Success
-EINVAL The argument was invalid (ie., -ve)
-EBADF fd doesnt correspond to an open file.
-EIO An I/O error occurred
Example int fd
...
open ( fd, filename, O_RDONLY, 0 ) ;; open existing file for
reading
...
close (fd)
RAPL-II No equivalent
See Also open opens a file
closenp
close named pipe
Description Closes a named pipe.
Syntax closenp( int fd )
Parameter fd the file descriptor: an int
Failure < 0
Example closenp(pd)
closenp(NT_app_pipe)
See Also opennp opens a named pipe
disconnectnp disconnects a client from a named pipe
connectnp connects to a named pipe
statusnp checks the status of a named pipe
Category Win 32
conf_get
Description Gets a list of robot configuration parameters.
Syntax command conf_get( var int[5] config )
Parameter config the configuration: an array of ints to hold:
[0] product code
[1] robot code
[2] number of axes
[3] config
[4] arm power status
Failure < 0
Example int[5] config
conf_get (config) ;; configuration is copied into the array
printf (Robot configuration data is: )
for i = 0 to 4
printf ({},config[i])
end for
Result Robot configuration data is: 7, 9, 6, 79, 0
confirm_menu
Description Using the confirm_menu command forces the user to confirm an action before it
is carried out. The command allows for up to 3 strings to be sent to the pendant
screen. Each string will be placed on a different row of the screen starting with
the top row. Each string can have a maximum of 20 characters. Any character
beyond this is truncated.
Library stp
Syntax export func int confirm_menu( var string[] str_1, var string[]
str_2, var string[] str_3)
Parameter str_1 text string displayed on the top row of the pendant screen
str_2 text string displayed on the second row of the pendant screen
str_3 text string displayed on the third row of the pendant screen
Failure < 0
Example int ctrl
string[10] name = my_app_23
stp:startup()
...
ctrl = stp:confirm_menu(Do You wish to,Continue? ,***)
...
stp:app_close()
...
See Also select_menu
Category Pendant
connectnp
connect named pipe
Description Checks or waits for a client to connect with the named pipe.
If the wait parameter is set to TM_NOWAIT, the command returns immediately. If
the wait parameter is set to TM_FOREVER (or anything else), it will block (not
interruptible) until a client connects.
Syntax command connectnp( int fd, int wait )
Parameters fd the file descriptor: an int
wait
Returns Success >= 0, client has connected.
Failure < 0
Example connectnp(pd,TM_NOWAIT)
connectnp(NT_app_pipe,TM_FOREVER)
See Also disconnectnp disconnects a client from a named pipe
closenp closes a named pipe
opennp opens a named pipe
Category Win 32
cos
Description Calculates the cosine of an angle. Takes an argument in degrees.
Syntax func float cos( float x )
Returns Success >= 0. The cosine of the argument in degrees.
Failure < 0
float y
y = cos( x )
Result 0.7071
RAPL-II COS
See Also sin calculates the sine
acos calculates the arc cosine
Category Math
cpath
Description Calculates and executes a path immediately.
The path is stored as path 0 and can be repeated with ctpath_go(0).
Syntax command cpath( gloc@ locname, int start, int finish, \
var trigger_type triggers )
Parameter locname the locations: a pointer to an array of locations
start the index of the location array to start: an int
finish the index of the location array to finish: an int
triggers the information to set gpio outputs: an int[16,2] for any of the rows in
the array,
elements in the 0 column are the indexes of the location array
elements in the 1 column are the setting and identifiers of gpio output
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example teachable cloc[10] b
trigger_type trig2
...
trig2[0,0]=6 ;; first trigger at location 6
trig2[0,1]=-1 ;; first trigger turns output #1 off
trig2[1,0]=7 ;; second trigger at location 7
trig2[1,1]=1 ;; second trigger turns output #1 on
trig2[2,0]=9 ;; third trigger is location 9
trig2[2,1]=15 ;; third trigger turns output #15 on
...
cpath(&b[0], 5, 9, trig1)
;; executes a path, starting at b[5] and going to b[9]
;; using trig2 as a trigger table
The location name must be given in this form. It is not sufficient to simply enter
b in the second argument.
RAPL-II Similar to CPATH.
See Also ctpath creates and stores a path with triggers
ctpath_go executes a stored path
Category Motion
ctl_get
Description Gets point of control.
Syntax command ctl_get()
Failure < 0. Will fail only due to communications.
16, EBUSY, indicates another process has control.
Example ctl_get()
RAPL-II There is no corresponding construct.
See Also ctl_rel releases point of control
Category System Process Control: Point of Control and Observation
ctl_give
Description Gives control explicitly to the process specified by the pid parameter.
Syntax command ctl_give(int pid)
Parameter pid specifies the process to be given control
Failure < 0 Returns negative error code if command fails. Two possibilities are:
-EBUSY if calling process doesnt have control to give
-ERRCH if no process pid exists
See Also ctl_rel releases point of control
getpid gets process identification
getppid gets parent process
ctl_rel
Description Releases point of control.
Syntax command ctl_rel()
Failure < 0
Example ctl_rel()
See Also ctl_get gets point of control
ctpath
Description Creates and stores a continuous path through an array of locations with triggers
for gpio (general purpose input/output).
To execute the path, use the ctpath_go() command.
Syntax command ctpath( int pathnum, gloc@ locname, int start, int
finish, \
var trigger_type triggers [, int speed] )
Parameters pathnum the paths index number: an int from 1 to 8
locname the locations: a pointer to the first location of an array the locations
must all be elements of the same one dimensional array
Note the form in the example.
start index of the location array to start: an int
finish index of the location array to finish: an int
triggers the triggers: an array [16,2] of ints where the 16 triggers(rows in the
array) are indexed 0 to 15, the trigger info (columns in the array) are
indexed 0 and 1,and for any row, the elements contain
in column 0, the location, specified by its index in the location array,
locname
in column 1, the setting of the output, specified by a positive or
negative sign, and the output channel, specified by its number
See the example below.
Parameter (Optional) speed the percentage of full speed through the path: an int
if speed is not specified, the current robot speed is used
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example teachable cloc[20] a
trigger_type trig1
...
trig1[0,0]=0 ;; first trigger at location 0
trig1[0,1]=4 ;; first trigger is turning output #4 on
trig1[1,0]=3 ;; second trigger at location 3
trig1[1,1]=1 ;; second trigger is turning output #1 on
trig1[2,0]=5 ;; third trigger is location 5
trig1[2,1]=-4 ;; third trigger is turning output #4 off
...
ctpath(1, &a[0], 0, 19, trig1, 65)
;; pre-calculates path 1, starting at a[0] and going to a[19]
;; using trig1 as a trigger table and moving at 65% speed.
The location name must be given in this form. It is not sufficient to simply enter
a in the second argument.
Example ctpath(10, &mypoints[0], 20, 30, mytrig)
RAPL-II Similar to CTPATH and TRIGGER.
See Also ctpath_go runs the path
cpath
Category Motion
ctpath_go
Description Runs a path previously stored by ctpath(). Moves to the beginning of the specified
path and executes the path at the speed previously specified.
Moves the arm in joint-interpolated mode to the starting knot of the path at the
current speed setting. Moves through the path at the previously specified path
speed.
Since a cpath() is stored as path 0, the command ctpath_go(0) executes the
previous cpath().
Syntax command ctpath_go( int pathnumber )
Parameter pathnumber the path number defined in ctpath: an int
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example ctpath(1, &a[0], 0, 19, trig1, 65)
...
ctpath_go(1)
Example ctpath(3,12,dispense_adhesive)
...
ctpath_go(3)
RAPL-II Same as GOPATH.
See Also ctpath creates and stores a continuous path with triggers
cpath calculates and executes a path immediately
Category Motion
deg
Description Converts radians to degrees.
Syntax func float deg( float x )
Failure < 0
float y
y = deg( x )
Result 28.647890
RAPL-II DEG
See Also rad converts degrees to radians
Category Math
delay
Description Sleeps for at least the number of milliseconds specified in milliseconds. Repeated
signals can cause this delay to be longer than the milliseconds requested. Differs
from msleep(). delay() allows sleeping without getting terminated by an EINTR
error.
Syntax command delay ( int milliseconds )
Returns Always returns 0 (Success)
Example loop
print (Waiting for GPIO input 1. \n)
if (input(1,state) == 1 )
break
end if
delay (250)
end loop
RAPL-II Similar to DELAY.
See Also msleep sleeps for milliseconds
Category System Process Control: Single Multiple processes
depart
Description Moves the tool centre-point from the current position, along the
approach/depart tool axis, to a depart position. The depart position is defined
by a distance from the current position along the approach/depart tool axis.
Positive distance is away from the location. Negative is towards the location.
The starting position can be any position. It does not have to be a location.
This command is used to move the tool, usually slowly, away from a position a
short distance before moving the arm, usually quickly, to a position a larger
distance away.
Moves in joint interpolated mode. The result is not a straight line.
Syntax command depart( float distance )
Parameter distance the distance from the location to the depart position: a float
Failure < 0
Example depart(2.0)
depart(6.0)
speed_set(100)
appro(pick_1, 2.0)
speed_set(20)
move(pick_1)
finish()
grip_close()
grip_finish()
depart(2.0)
speed_set(100)
appro(place_1)
RAPL-II Similar to DEPART.
See Also departs like depart(), but in straight line motion
appro moves to an approach position; opposite of depart
appros moves to an approach position; opposite of departs
Category Motion
departs
Description Moves the tool centre-point from the current position, along the
approach/depart tool axis, to a depart position. The depart position is defined
by a distance from the current location along the approach/depart tool axis.
Positive distance is away from the location. Negative is towards the location.
The starting position can be any position. It does not have to be a location.
Used to move the tool, usually slowly, away from a position a short distance
before moving the arm, usually quickly, to a position a larger distance away.
Moves in cartesian interpolated mode. The result is straight line motion.
Syntax command departs( float distance )
Parameter distance the distance from the location to the depart position: a float
Failure < 0
Example departs(2.0)
departs(6.0)
speed_set(100)
appros(pick_1,2.0)
speed_set(20)
moves(pick_1)
finish()
grip_close()
grip_finish()
departs(2.0)
speed_set(100)
appros(place_1)
RAPL-II Similar to DEPART.
See Also depart like departs(), but not in straight line motion
appro moves to an approach position; opposite of depart
appros moves to an approach position; opposite of departs
tool re-defines the tool coordinate system
Category Motion
disconnectnp
disconnect named pipe
Description Breaks a pipe connection with a client. The server forcibly disconnects the client.
Must be done to be able to connect with a new client.
Syntax command disconnectnp( int fd )
Failure < 0
Example disconnectnp(pd)
disconnectnp(NT_app_pipe)
See Also connectnp connects to a named pipe
opennp opens a named pipe
Category Win 32
dup
Description Duplicates an existing file descriptor. The new file descriptor is the lowest
available file descriptor. The new file descriptor, stored in new_fd, has the
following in common with the original file descriptor, old_fd:
Same open file or device
Same file pointer
(Changing the file pointer of one changes file pointer of the other.)
Same access mode (read, write, read/write)
Syntax command dup( var int new_fd, int old_fd )
Parameter new_fd the new file descriptor which is a duplication of old_fd: an int
old_fd the file descriptor being duplicated: an int
Returns
>= 0 Success.
-EAGAIN There are no free file descriptors.
-EINVAL The old_fd argument was invalid (i.e. negative).
-EBADF old_fd does not correspond to an open file.
Example See example for dup2()
See Also dup2 creates a new file handle

dup2
Description Duplicates an existing file descriptor. The original file descriptor, old_fd, is
duplicated at a new position in the file descriptor table specified by new_fd. The
new file descriptor, new_fd, has the following in common with the original file
descriptor, old_fd:
Same open file or device
Same file pointer
(Changing the file pointer of one changes file pointer of the other.)
Same access mode (read, write, read/write)
dup2() creates the new handle with the value of new_fd. If there was a file
associated with new_fd already open then dup2() first closes this file.
Syntax command dup2( int new_fd, int old_fd )
Parameter new_fd the position of the new duplicated file descriptor: an int
old_fd the file descriptor being duplicated: an int
Returns
>= 0 Success.
-EINVAL The arguments were invalid (i.e. negative file descriptors).
-EBADF old_fd does not correspond to an open file.
-EINVAL The argument was invalid (i.e. negative file descriptors).
-EBADF fd does not correspond to an open file.
-EIO An i/o error occurred.
Example int nul, oldstdout, STDOUT = 1
string[] msg = "This is a test"
;; create a file
open ( nul, "DUMMY.FIL", O_CREAT | O_RDWR, S_IREAD | S_IWRITE )
;; create a duplicate handle for standard output
dup ( oldstdout, STDOUT )
;; redirect standard output to DUMMY.FIL
;; by duplicating the file handle onto
;; the file handle for standard output
dup2 ( STDOUT, nul )
;; close the handle for DUMMY.FIL
close ( nul )
;; will be redirected into DUMMY.FIL
fprint ( STDOUT, msg )
;; restore original standard output handle
dup2 ( STDOUT, oldstdout )
;; close duplicate handle for STDOUT
close ( oldstdout )
See Also dup creates a new file handle
environ
Description Allows a program to retrieve each individual string from its environment. [This
command is available on the C500C only.]
Syntax command environ(var string[] dst, int n)
Parameters There are two required parameters:
dst a string variable to write the selected
environment string into.
n the index of the selected environment
string. Starts at zero.
Returns 1 the selected string was successfully copied into dst
0 there is no environment string with the specified index; dst is set to the
empty string
< 0 a negative error code.
Explanation The environment strings are a set of strings of the form label=value that are
accessible to each running program. When one program launches another one
via execl() or execv(), it passes on its set of environment strings. Thus if one
program adds a new string to its environment or deletes a string from its
environment, all of its children inherit these changes.
Environment variables are convenient for storing information about the entire
system. When CROS starts up, it sets up the initial environment strings from
the diagnostic configuration strings. These strings are always set up by CROS
as part of the environment:
HOSTTYPE What kind of processor the controller has.
Typically i386.
OSTYPE What operating system is running
Typically CROS.
SerialNumber The controller serial number.
Example ;; This RAPL-3 program displays all of the environment strings:
;;
main
int n
string[256] s
n = 0
while (environ(s, n) > 0)
printf({}\n, s)
n++
end while
end main
See Also getenv(), setenv(), unsetenv()
Category Environment Variables
err_compare
Description Compares two error descriptors for matching subsystem and error code fields.
Can be used, for example, to find out if an error is a runaway error (regardless of
the axis involved.)
Library syslib
Syntax func int err_compare(int d1, int d2)
Parameters d1, d2 error descriptors to compare
Returns 1 (True) if the subsystem and error codes match
0 (False) if they do not.
Example t = move(there)
if (err_compare(REAXIS_RUNAWAY, -t))
... runaway error ...
end if
See Also error descriptors

err_compose
Description The function is passed four integer values representing the subsystem, b2, b1
and code values of a given error descriptor. The function reconstructs and
returns the original error descriptor. Refer to the Error Descriptor section for
details on the error descriptor.
Syntax func int err_compose(int subsys, int b2, int b1, int code)
Parameter subsys The integer value of the subsystem originating the error
b2 The integer value of the b2 field
b1 The integer value of the b1 field
code The integer value of the specific error code
Returns Returns the 32 bit error descriptor reconstructed from the 4 separate 8 bit fields.
Refer to the Error Handling section for a details on the file descriptor.
Failure < 0
Example A program to confirm that the translation from the error descriptor to the error
data is correct.
int t, comp, err_des
int subsys, code, b2, b1
t = open(fd, myfile, O__RDONLY, 0)
if (t < 0) ;; error
err_des = -t...
subsys = err_get_subsys(err_des)
code = err_get_code(err des)
b2 = err_get_b2(err_des)
b1 = err_get_b1(err_des)
if (comp = err_compose(subsys, b2, b1, code) != err_des)
...
;; Something went wrong in the error translations
...
exit(1)
else
printf(The error {} , str_error(err_des))
printf( occurred in the {}subsystem \n, str_subsys(err_des))
;; Note the str_error and the str_subsys function calls cannot occur in the
;; same print function call.
printf(The b2 error field is {}\n, b2)
printf(The b1 error field is {}\n, b1)
exit(1)
end if
end if
Result The error no device occurred in kernel subsystem
The b2 error field is X
The b1 error field is Y ::X and Y are integers.
See Also err_get subsys
err_get_b2
err_get_b1
err_get_code

err_get_b1
Description The function is passed a +ve error descriptor. It returns the integer value of the
b1 field in the error descriptor. The error descriptor is a 32 bit integer, the
negative value of which is returned when a function call fails. Refer to the Error
Descriptor section for details on the error descriptor.
Syntax func int err_get_b1(int descriptor)
Parameter descriptor the parameter int is the error descriptor
Returns Success >= Returns the integer which corresponds to the 8 bits which correspond
to the b1 field in the error descriptor. Note: if the b2 field is not defined for the
specific error, the function returns 0. Refer to the Error Handling section.
Failure < 0
Example int t, err_des
if (t < 0) ;; error
err_des = -t ;; change sign of error for use with error functions
printf(The b1 error field is {}\n, err_get_b1(err_des))
exit(1)
end if
Result The b1 error field is X X is the integer value of the b2 field of the error
descriptor
See Also error_code
addr_decode

err_get_b2
b2 field in the error descriptor. The error descriptor is a 32 bit integer, the
Syntax func int err_get_b2(int descriptor)
Returns Success >= Returns the integer which corresponds to the 8 bits which
correspond to the b2 field
in the error descriptor. Note if the b2 field is not defined for the
specific error, the
function returns 0. Refer to the Error Handling section.
Failure < 0
if (t < 0) ;; error
printf(The b2 error field is {}\n, err_get_b2(err_des))
exit(1)
end if
Result The b2 error field is X X is the integer value of the b2 field of the error
descriptor
See Also error_code
addr_decode

err_get_code
code field in the error descriptor. The error descriptor is a 32 bit integer, the
Note: Use the str_error function to convert the error descriptor to a string.
Syntax func int err_get_code(int descriptor)
Returns Success >= Returns the integer which corresponds to the 8 bits which
correspond to the code field
in the error descriptor. Refer to the Error descriptor section for
details.
Failure < 0
if (t < 0) ;; error
err_des = -t ;; change sign of error for use with
error functions
printf(The error code number is {}\n, err_get_b2(err_des))
exit(1)
end if
Result The error code number is X X is the integer value of the error code
See Also str_error

err_get_subsys
subsystem where the error originated. The error descriptor is a 32 bit integer,
the negative value of which is returned when a function call fails. The subsystem
information is carried in the error descriptor. Refer to the Error Descriptor
section for details on the error descriptor.
Syntax func int err_get_subsys(int descriptor)
Returns Success >= Returns the integer corresponding to the subsystem. For example:
Subsystem 0 kernel
Subsystem 1 robot library
Subsystem 2 robot server
(List is not complete)
Refer to the Error descriptor section for details on the subsystem error
files.
Failure < 0
if (t < 0) ;; error
printf(The error occurred in subsystem {}\n, err_get_subsys(err_des))
exit(1)
end if
Result The error occurred in subsystem X X is the decimal number of the
subsystem
See Also error_code
addr_decode

error_addr
Description The function returns the address where the current exception occurred.
Syntax func int error_addr()
Parameter no parameters required
Failure < 0
Example see the example for addr_to_file()
See Also error_code
addr_decode

error_code
Description Get the current exceptions error code.
Syntax func int error_code()
Parameter no parameter required
Returns Success >=0
Failure < 0
Example try
abort(-1) ;; this should cause an exception
except
printf(Error {} happened\n, str_error(-error_code()))
end try
Result The program prints out Error General Error happened
See Also error_addr
addr_decode

error_line
Description Calls the addr_to_line function to determine the line number of the current error.
This is equivalent to calling addr_to_line(error_addr()).
Syntax func int error_line()
Parameters No parameters required
Returns Success The line number
Failure 0
Example see addr_to_line() for a related example.
See Also error_addr
error_file
addr_to_line
addr_decode*

error_file
Description Calls the addr_to_file function to convert the current error to a file name where
the current error resides. This is equivalent to calling addr_to_file(error_addr()).
Syntax func string[]@ error_file()
Parameters No parameters required
Returns Success A pointer to the file name string
Failure A pointer to an empty string on failure
Example see addr_to_file() for a related example.
See Also error_addr
error_line
addr_to_line
addr_decode*

execl
Description Loads and executes another program. The program takes all the command-line
arguments as string[] parameters. The program that launches the new program is
terminated, and the new program takes on the pid number of its terminated
parent. The execl() command is often executed from within a child process. This
command is used when all of the command-line arguments are known. If they
are not known, use execv().
Certain errors can cause the program running execl() to terminate (with exit code
255). For example, missing libraries can cause this.
Syntax command execl( var string[] file_name, var string[] arg, ... )
Parameter file_name the file name, including the path, to be executed
arg a minimum of two arguments is required
Returns Success no return- the process ceases to exist and is replaced by the specified
new running process
Failure:
-EBADF fd does not represent an open file
-EINTR was interrupted by a signal
EINVAL path is illegal, or there is not at least one command-line
argument
E2BIG too many command-line arguments; the file is too big to
execute on this CROS version
EACCESS does not have its execute permission bit set
ENOEXEC the file is not a recognized executable
ENOMEM not enough free memory
EIO An I/O error occurred.
-ENOENT The file specified by file_name does not exist
-ESPIPE can't r/w on a socket
-EIO an I/O error occurred
-ENOTDIR A component of the path to the file was not a directory.

Example int split_id
string[] my_prog = My_Program
...
split_id
if split_id == 0
execl (my_prog, arg0, arg1, arg2)
else
waitpid (split_id,&status,0) ;; wait until child has terminated
end if
RAPL-II EXECUTE
See Also execv executes another program with unknown arguments

execv
Description Loads and executes another program. The program that launches the new
program is terminated, and the new program takes on the pid number of its
terminated parent. The execv command is often executed from within a child
process. The program takes one other argument which is a pointer to variable
length array of strings, argv. These are the command-line arguments for the
program. This command is used when the command-line arguments are not
known. If the command-line arguments are known, use execl().
Certain errors can cause the program running execv() to terminate (with exit code
255). For example, missing libraries can cause this.
Syntax command execv( var st r i ng[ ] f i l e_name, var st r i ng[ ] @@ar gv )
Parameter file_name the file name, including the path, to be executed
argv pointer to an array of string pointers
Returns Success no return- the process ceases to exist and is replaced by the specified
new running process
Failure:
-EBADF fd does not represent an open file
EINVAL path is illegal, or there is not at least one command-line
argument
EACCESS does not have its execute permission bit set
ENOEXEC the file is not a recognized executable
ENOMEM not enough free memory
EIO An I/O error occurred.
-ENOENT The file specified by file_name does not exist
Example string[20] user_input
string[]@[10] argv_sp
int i, split_id, status, num_args = 0
loop
printf ("* enter argument: ")
readline(user_input,20)
if user_input != "x" ;; x terminates input
mem_alloc (argv_sp[num_args], sizeof(user_input))
;; allocate memory and
;; initialize ptr to memory
argv_sp [num_args]@ = user_input ;; initialize string
num_args ++ ;; increment string counter
else
break
end if
end loop
split_id = split()
if split_id == 0 ;; * child process
execv (argv_sp[0]@,&(argv_sp[0])) ;; execute new program
elseif split_id !=0 ;; * parent process
waitpid(split_id,&status,0) ;; wait for child to complete
end if
for i = 0 to (num_args-1)
mem_free (argv_sp[i]) ;; free allocate memory
end for
RAPL-II EXECUTE
See Also execl executes another program with known arguments
argc returns the number of command-line arguments
argv returns a pointer to a command-line argument

exit
Description Causes normal program termination. Open files are flushed and closed. The value
n is returned to the parent process indicating success or failure. Conventionally,
0 is used to indicate successful termination and non-zero values to indicate
abnormal termination. Note that only the lowest 8 bits of the ret_val value are
returned to the parent; the value must be in the range 0 to 255.
Syntax command exit( int ret_val )
Parameter ret_val the value returned to the parent process: an int
Returns Never returns.
Example int pid
...
pid = split()
if pid == 0
;; child process does something
exit (0)
else
;; parent process does something
end if
Example int result
...
result = func_call() ;; evaluate the function return value
if result != EOK ;; an error occurred during the function execution
exit (-1)
else
exit (0) ;; no error
end if
RAPL-II ABORT
See Also abort terminates a program

fabs
Description Calculates the absolute value of a float.
Syntax func float fabs( float x )
Argument x the number: a float
Returns Success >= 0 The absolute value of the argument x.
Failure < 0
Example float x = -99.9
float y
y = fabs( x )
Result y is set to 99.9
RAPL-II ABS
See Also iabs calculates the absolute value of an int
Category Math

finish
Description Forces the program to wait at the finish() command until arm motion has
finished. Normally a command is executed as soon as its parameters are
determined, which can be before the previous command has finished.
finish() is often used to finish the motion of the arm to a location before closing
the gripper at the location, instead of having the gripper start to close while the
arm is still in motion to the location. finish() is also used to synchronize
commands, such as input/output, with robot motion.
If online mode is off, finish() is not needed between two arm motion commands.
In online off mode, arm motion commands are executed as if there is a finish()
after each one. There is one exception, the motor() command for different axes.
The later motor() command does not wait for the earlier motor() command to
finish.
Syntax command finish()
Parameter No parameters required
Failure < 0
Example appro(pick_1,2.0)
move(pick_1)
finish()
grip_close()
;; Without finish()
;; the grip_close() command would begin executing
;; before the move(pick_1) command finished.
RAPL-II Similar to FINISH.
See Also online sets online mode off or on
grip_finish forces program to wait until gripper motion finished
robotisfinished
robotisdone gets the robot done state for non-control processes
Category Motion

flock
file lock
Description Sets and releases advisory locks on a file.
At any one time, a file can have:
only one exclusive lock, or
any number of shared locks.
A flock() command can interruptably block. If the non-blocking flag, LOCK_NB, is
used the operation does not block. If the non-blocking flag is absent, the
operation blocks when locking.
Syntax command flock( int fd, int operation )
operation the locking operation; one of:
LOCK_SH
shared lock; block until the lock is made
LOCK_EX
exclusive lock; block until the lock is made
LOCK_SH|LOCK_NB
shared lock; return -EAGAIN immediately if this would have
blocked
LOCK_EX|LOCK_NB
exclusive lock; return -EAGAIN immediately if this would have
blocked
LOCK_UN
unlock
Returns
0 (-EOK) Success
-EINVAL An argument was invalid
-EBADF fd does not correspond to an open file
-EAGAIN The LOCK_NB flag was set and we did not immediately
succeed.
-EINTR This operation was interrupted by a signal.
Example open (fd,"test.txt",O_RDWR|O_TEXT|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC,M_READ|M_WRITE)
flock(fd,LOCK_EX) ;; obtain an exclusive lock

fprint
file print
Description Writes the specified data to the file associated with file descriptor fd. Two types
of arguments can be given in the variable argument list: constants and variables.
The constants are printed exactly as they are given. The variable's value is what
is copied to the file descriptor. The method used in printing is to print the
arguments in the exact order that they were given.
Syntax command fprint ( int fd, ... )
Parameters fd file descriptor: an int
string constants or variables
Returns
>= 0 Success
-EINVAL If the arguments (notably fd) are invalid.
-EBADF If fd does not correspond to an open file.
-EACCESS If the file open on fd is not open for writing.
-ESPIPE If an attempt is made to write to a socket.
-EAGAIN (nonblocking I/O only). Not ready to write any
bytes.
Example int fd
float cycle_count = 4
...
cycle_count = cycle_count +1 ;; now at 5
open \
(fd,"test.txt",O_RDWR|O_TEXT|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC,M_READ|M_WRITE)
fprint ( fd, "Cycle ",cycle_count," data collection.\n" )
close (fd)
Result Cycle 5.00000 data collection.\n
sent to the file associated with file descriptor fd.
Category File Input and Output: Unformatted Output

fprintf
file print formatted
Description Converts and writes output to the file associated with file descriptor fd under the
control of a specified format fmt.
Format specifications are detailed in the Formatted Output section of File Input
and Output
Syntax command fprintf( int fd, var string[] fmt, ... )
Parameters fd file descriptor
fmt formatted string
Format Specifiers The format string may consist of two different objects, normal characters, which
{ [ flags ] [ field width ] [ .precision ] [ x | X ] }
Flags
leading zeros.
Field width
precision
The precision number specifies the number of characters to be printed in a
string, the number of significant digits in a float, or the maximum number of
digits to be printed in an integer.
x or X
should be printed in hexadecimal (base 16) or not. The lowercase x specifies
lowercase letters (abcde) are to be used in the hexadecimal display and the
uppercase X specifies uppercase letters (ABCDE).
Returns
>= 0 Success
-EINVAL If the arguments (notably fd) are invalid.
-EBADF If fd does not correspond to an open file.
-EACCESS If the file open on fd is not open for writing.
-ESPIPE If an attempt is made to write to a socket.
-EAGAIN (nonblocking I/O only). Not ready to write any
bytes.
Example int fd
float cycle_count = 4
...
cycle_count = cycle_count +1 ;; now at 5
open (fd,"test.txt",O_RDWR|O_TEXT|O_CREAT|O_TRUNC,M_READ|M_WRITE)
fprintf ( fd, "Cycle {6.4} data collection.\n",cycle_count)
close (fd)
Result Cycle 5.000 data collection.
Category File Input and Output: Formatted Output
freadline
file read line
Description Reads (possibly interactively) a line of up to maxlen characters from infd into str.
If outfd >= 0, then echoing is done to outfd and interactivity is assumed. The line
terminator can be either a carriage return or a line feed. Returns the number of
characters actually read including the terminator. A value of 0 means EOF. The
function can return up to maxlen +1 since the end of line is included in the
count, but not in the returned string.
Syntax command freadline ( int infd, int outfd, var string[] str, int
maxlen )
Parameters
infd file descriptor of data source
outfd
file descriptor of echoed data or 1 if you are reading from a file
(with no echoing needed.)
str destination of data read from infd
maxlen maximum length of character read
Returns
>= 0 Success; the number of characters read, including the
terminator
-EINVAL the arguments were invalid
-EBADF one of the file descriptors do not correspond to an open
file
-EACCESS tried to read/write from a file that was not opened for the
required access
-ESPIPE cant r/w on a socket
-EAGAIN (nonblocking I/O) no bytes were ready for reading / the
device was not ready for writing
-EINTR this operation was interrupted by a signal
Example int fd
open (fd,"log.txt", O_RDWR|O_TEXT|O_CREAT, M_READ|M_WRITE)
seek (fd,0,SEEK_END) ;; append user
;; input to file
freadline (stdin,stdout,user_input,64) ;; input is read
;; from stdin
into string user_inputand echoed out
to stdout
writes (fd,user_input,0) ;; write string to
;; file
writes (fd,"\n",0) ;; write new line
;; char. to file
close (fd)
See Also readline
Category File Input and Output: Unformatted Input
fstat
Description Obtains information about a particular open object in the file system.
Syntax command fstat( int fd, var c_dirent buf )
Parameters There are two required paramters
fd the file descriptor of the open object
buf a c_dirent structure. See the information on stat() for
further details.
Returns
>= 0 Success; buf is filled in with data about the object. Note
that the de_name field will be a null string, as the system
cannot currently find the name of the open object.
< 0 Failure
Possible failure codes are:
-EINVAL the arguments were invalid.
-EBADF there is no open object corresonding to fd.
-EIO I/O error
Example int fd
c_dirent info
open(fd, /conf/rc, O_RDONLY, 0)
...
fstat(fd, info)
printf(The /conf/rc file is {} bytes long.\n, info.de_size)
...
Result The size of the /conf/rc file is displayed.
See Also stat()
ftime
Description Changes the modification time of an open filesystem object.
Library syslib
Syntax command ftime(int fd, int modtime)
fd the open file descriptor
modtime what time to reset the objects modification
time to.
Returns >= 0 Success
< 0 Failure
Possible failure return codes are:
-EINVAL Invalid argument
EBADF There is no open file corresponding to fd.
EACCESS Access denied
EIO I/O error
Example int fd, t
t = time() ;; get the time NOW
open(fd, myfile, O_RDWR, 0)
...
ftime(fd, t - 60) ;; reset the timestamp to one minute ago
...
See Also utime()
gains_get
Description Gets the gains for an axis.
Syntax command gains_get( int axis, var float kp, var float ki, var
float kd )
Parameters axis the axis being inquired: an int
kp proportional gain: a float
ki integral gain: a float
kd derivative gain: a float
Failure < 0
Example ;; check default gains for A465 axis 1
float p, i, d
gains_get( 1, p, i, d )
print ("p = ",p,"\ni = ",i,"\nd = ",d,"\n")
Result p = 12.0000
i = 0.0200000
d = 100.000
See Also gains_set sets the gains for an axis
gains_set
Description Sets the gains for an axis.
Syntax command gains_set( int axis, var float kp, var float ki, var
float kd )
kp proportional gain: a float
ki integral gain: a float
kd derivative gain: a float
Failure < 0
Example ;;An example to create an array of gains for each axis, and then set the gains to
values stored
;;in the array. The gains are then printed for each axis.
;;
int axis_num, count
float[6] P,
float[6] I
float[6] D
...
;; initialize the array of gains
...
for count =0 to 5
axis_num = count +1
gains_set(axis_num, P[count], I[count], D[count])
printf (Axis_num, P:{}, I{}, D{} \n, P[count},I[count],D[count])
end for
RAPL-II @@GAIN
See Also gains_get gets the gains for an axis
get_ps
Description Obtains an entry in the systems process table. Can be used to obtain all entries
one at a time, like the system shells ps command.
CROS-500 has room in the process table for 20 entries, numbered from 0 to 19.
CROSnt has room in the process table for 64 entries, numbered from 0 to 63.
Data is stored in the table from the back to the front the oldest process, init, is
entry 19 or 63, the second oldest is 18 or 62, and so on. As a result, printing the
data by incrementing the slot number up to 19 or 63, places the oldest entry last,
like the system shells ps command.
Any empty slot in the process table is zeroed. Since processes have pids
numbered from 1, you can test for an empty slot by testing for a pid of 0 (zero).
This get_ps() command gets the process information for the entry identified by
slot. The information is stored in the ps_struct ps, which is a globally declared
struct. If slot is out of range, -EINVAL is returned.
Syntax command get_ps( int slot, var ps_struct ps )
Parameters slot the entry of the process table: an int (CROSnt: 0-63; CROS-500: 0-19)
ps the process information: a ps_struct struct, with members
pid an int
ppid an int
flags a constant of the enum ps_flags, one of:
PR_IN_SYSTEM
PR_NO_SIGNAL
PR_RAPL3 this is a RAPL-3 process
PR_PRIVILEGED this is a privileged system process
PR_INTERRUPTED
PR_TIMEDOUT
status a constant of the enum ps_status, one of:
PS_FREE
PS_HOLD
PS_READY
PS_RUN
PS_SLEEP
PS_STOP
PS_ZOMBIE
PS_WAITIO
PS_WAITSEM
PS_WAITSOCK
PS_WAIT
prio a constant of the enum ps_priority, one of:
PR_LOW
PR_NORM
PR_HIGH
sigmask an int
sigpending an int
sys_fticks an int
usr_fticks an int
rt_slippage an int
clicks an int
argv0 the name of the process or program, a string[32]
Returns
0 (-EOK) Success
-EINVAL slot was out of range (negative or too large)
Example ps_struct ps
get_ps( 63, ps)
Example int slot = 0
ps_struct ps
...
get_ps( slot, ps)
ps_struct ps
int pid, status, ret
loop
ret = get_ps(slot, ps)
if ret == -EINVAL
break
end if
pid = ps.pid
status = ps.status
printf("pid {2} status {2} \n",pid,status)
slot = slot + 1
end loop
ps_struct ps
string[]@[12] status_string = { \
"FREE ", "HOLD ", "READY", "RUN ", \
"SLEEP", "STOP ", "ZOMB ", "WIO ", \
"WSEM ", "WSOCK", "WAIT ", "IWIO " }
...
while((get_ps(slot, ps)) != -EINVAL)
slot++
if (ps.pid == 0)
continue
end if
printf("pid {2} status {2} name {} \n" \
,ps.pid,status_string[ps.status],ps.argv0)
end while
See Also getpid get the processs id number
getppid get the parents id number
module_name_get get the name of the module
getenv
Description Allows a program to retrieve the value of a specified environment string. [getenv()
is available on a C500C only.]
Syntax command getenv(var string[] dst, string[] key)
dst A string variable in which the result will be stored.
key The key to search for.
Returns 0 the key was not found; dst is set to the null string.
1 the key was found; dst is set to the value part of the string.
ve a negative error code.
Example ;; One of the environment strings that is always defined is
;; the SerialNumber string (which looks like:
;; SerialNumber=XYZ1234
;; This code displays what the controller serial number is.
;; If the serial number environment string were as above, then
;; it would print the XYZ1234 portion:
string[32] sn
getenv(sn, SerialNumber)
printf(The controller serial number is {}\n, sn)
See Also environ(), setenv(), unsetenv()
getopt
Description Provides a mechanism for handling command line arguments and options. It is
patterned after the getopt(3) function of ANSI C. The getopt() function is based
on the assumption that command lines look like this:
name [-options] otherargs
where name is the name of the command being run, [-options] is an optional list
of option flags, each starting with a - character, and otherargs is a set of other
items (not starting with -) on the command line.
Syntax func int getopt(string[] opts)
Related vars There are several related variables exported from syslib to support getopt():
int
syslib:opterr
This variable is a flag that the user
can set before calling getopt(). If
non-zero (which is the default), it
indicates that getopt() should report
errors on its own. A typical getopt()
error message looks like:
name: illegal option X
or name: option requires an argument
X
where name is the name of the program
(as returned by argv(0)) and X is the
option character with the problem.
int
syslib:optind
This variable indicates which argv() is
the next one for getopt() to process.
string[256]
syslib:optarg
For options with arguments, getopt()
places the argument string in here.
Parameters
opts A string with a list of all the valid option
flags. For example, if the string is abc, then
getopt() expects that -a, -b and -c are all
valid options for the command. If an option
letter in opts is followed by a :, then the
option is supposed to have an argument following
it. For example, if opts is af:h, then the
valid options are -a, -h and -f argument or
-fargument.
Returns Success: the character from the opts string that was matched, or EOARGS
(which is -1) if we have run out of option flags to parse.
Failure: ? if an unrecognized or illegal option was found. If syslib:opterr is not
zero, then getopt() reports the error before returning the ?.
Example The getopt() function is rather complex, and in more need than
most of an example. The following short program illustrates how
to use getopt():
sub usage()
;; display a usage message
fprintf(stderr, Usage: {} [-options] arg1 [arg2...]\n, argv(0))
fprintf(stderr, Options are:\n)
fprintf(stderr, -a do something\n)
fprintf(stderr, -b do something else\n)
fprintf(stderr, -c target do something to someone\n)
fprintf(stderr, -h, -? display this message\n)
exit(1)
end sub
main
int ch
loop
ch = getopt(abc:h?)
if (ch < 0)
break
end if
case (ch)
of a:
printf(got a\n)
of b:
printf(got b\n)
of c:
printf(got c {}\n, syslib:optarg)
else
;; ? and h fall into here as well
usage()
end case
end loop
if (syslib:optind == argc())
;; we dont have an arg1 we are at the end of the list
fprintf(stderr, {}: missing argument\n, argv(0))
usage()
end if
printf(The other arguments are:\n)
while (syslib:optind < argc())
printf( {}\n, argv(syslib:optind))
syslib:optind++
end while
exit(0)
end main
See Also argc(), argv()
getpid
Description Returns the id number of the process of the calling program.
Syntax func int getpid()
Returns The process id of the calling program.
Example int pid
...
pid = getpid() ;; get our process id number
See Also getps gets entry in process table
getppid
Description Returns the id number of the parent process of the calling program.
Syntax func int getppid()
Returns The process id of the parent of the calling process.
Example int ppid
...
ppid = getppid() ;; get our parent process id number
See Also getps gets entry in process table
grip
Alias of gripdist_set
alias same as
grip(...) gripdist_set(...)
Description Moves the fingers of the servo-gripper to a specified distance apart from each
other.
Example grip(1.0)
RAPL-II Same as GRIP.
See gripdist_get gets the current servo finger separation distance
Category Gripper
Motion
grip_cal
Description Calibrates the gripper by setting travel distance.
Syntax command grip_cal( float mindist, float maxdist )
Parameters mindist the minimum distance for finger travel: a float
maxdist the maximum distance for finger travel: a float
Failure < 0
Example grip_cal( 0.0, 50.80 ) ;; millimetres for standard servogripper
Example grip_cal( 25.0, 50.0 ) ;; min and max for custom fingers and
objects
Example grip_cal( 0.0, 2.0 ) ;; inches for standard servogripper
See Also calibrate calibrate the arm axes
gripdist_set opens/closes servo fingers to specified separation distance
gripdist_get gets current servo finger separation distance
grip_open opens the gripper
grip_close closes the gripper
Category Gripper
Calibration
grip_close
Description Closes the gripper. If configured with a servo gripper the command accepts an
optional argument specifying the force used by the gripper. The argument is
given as a percentage of full force valid range 0 to 100.
Fingers can be machined to surround an object and grasp it on the outside, or
machined to be inserted into a hole and grasp the object by exerting force on the
insides of the hole. This configuration determines whether the object is grasped
by gripclose() and released by gripopen(),or grasped by gripopen() and released by
gripclose().
Warning Gripping at a force above 75% for more than a few seconds may shorten the life
of the servo-gripper. To grip an object without overloading the gripper, after
initially making contact with the object, reduce the force. The servo-gripper
mechanics keep a firm grip on the object.
Syntax command gripclose( [int servo_force] )
Argument (Optional) servo-force the percentage of force applied: an int
Failure < 0
Example move(get_part)
finish()
grip_close(100)
grip_finish()
msleep(200)
grip_close(60)
RAPL-II Similar to CLOSE.
See Also grip_open opens the gripper; opposite of grip_close
gripdist_set sets the servo fingers at a separation distance
gripdist_get gets the current servo finger separation distance
Category Gripper
Motion
grip_finish
Description Like the finish() command, holds execution of the program at the grip_finish()
command until gripper motion has finished. Normally a command is executed as
soon as its parameters are determined, which can be before the previous
command has finished. grip_finish() is often used to finish the motion of the
gripper at or near a location before moving the arm. Also used to synchronize
commands, such as input/output, with gripper motion.
If online mode is off, online(OFF), grip_finish() is not needed between two
gripper motion commands. Gripper motion commands are executed as if there is
a grip_finish() after each one.
Syntax command grip_finish()
Parameter empty
Failure < 0
Example online(ON)
...
appro(rack[i,j], 200) ;; millimetres
finish()
move(rack[i,j])
finish()
grip_close()
grip_finish()
depart(200)
See Also finish holds execution until arm motion finished
gripisfinished returns TRUE if gripper is finished moving
Category Gripper
Motion
grip_open
Description Opens the gripper. Takes an optional argument for a servo-gripper, of the
percentage of force with a valid range between 0 - 100..
Fingers can be machined to surround an object and grasp it on the outside, or
machined to be inserted into a hole and grasp the object by exerting force on the
insides of the hole. This configuration determines whether the object is grasped
by gripclose() and released by gripopen(),or grasped by gripopen() and released by
gripclose().
Warning Gripping at a force above 75% for more than a few seconds may shorten the life
of the servo-gripper. To grip an object without overloading the gripper, after
initially making contact with the object, reduce the force. The servo-gripper
mechanics keep a firm grip on the object.
Syntax command grip_open( [int servo_force] )
Argument (Optional) servo_force the percentage of force applied: an int
Failure < 0
Example move(set_part)
finish()
grip_open()
grip_finish()
depart(2.0)
RAPL-II Similar to OPEN.
See Also grip_close closes the gripper; opposite of grip_open
gripdist_set sets the servo fingers at a separation distance
gripdist_get gets the current servo-finger separation distance
Category Gripper
Motion
gripdist_get
Description Gets the distance between fingers of the servo-gripper.
Syntax command gripdist_get( var float distance)
Parameter distance float variable to store current gripper distance
Returns Success >= 0. The finger distance: a float.
Failure < 0
Example float my_gripper_dist
...
close (100)
grip_finish()
gripdist_get( my_gripper_dist )
if my_gripper_dist <=30
return (-1) ;; gripper has no part in fingers
else
return (0) ;; gripper has part in fingers
end if
RAPL-II WGRIP()
See Also grip sets the finger separation distance
setgriptypesets the gripper type (air, servo, etc.)
Category Gripper
gripdist_set
Alias grip
alias same as
grip(...) gripdist_set(...)
Description Moves the fingers of the servo-gripper to a specified distance apart from each
other.
To attain the grip distance, fingers open or close depending on the starting
position.
Warning Do not use this command to hold an object. This will damage the gripper. The
gripdist_set() command operates at 100% force. To control gripper force and hold
an object, use the gripclose() and gripopen() commands.
Syntax command gripdist_set( float distance )
Parameter distance the distance between fingers in current units: a float
Failure < 0
Example gripdist_set(1.0)
RAPL-II Similar to GRIP.
See Also gripdist_get gets the current servo finger separation distance
grip_close closes the gripper (with force for servo)
grip_open opens the gripper (with force for servo)
Category Gripper
Motion
gripisfinished
Description Determines if the gripper is finished moving. Returns FALSE (0) , TRUE, or error
<0.
Syntax command gripisfinished()
Parameters empty
Failure < 0
Example int depart_dis
teachable ploc place
...
move(place)
grip_close(50)
loop
if gripisfinished()
depart(depart_dis)
else
msleep(250
endif
end loop
Result Depart location place after the gripper is closed.
See Also grip_close
grip_finish
Category Gripper
Robot Configuration
gripper_stop
Description The command stops any gripper motion.
Syntax command griper_stop()
Example ...
gripper_stop()
Result Gripper motion stops
See Also grip_open
grip_close
gripdist_set
gripdist_get
Category Gripper
Motion
griptype_get
Description Gets what the robot gripper type is currently set to.
Syntax command griptype_get(var grip_type gtype)
Returns Success >= 0; gtype is filled in with the gripper type code.
Example This RAPL-3 code segment displays, in words, the setting of the
gripper type:
int gtype
griptype_get(gtype)
case (gtype)
of 0:
printf(No gripper type selected\n)
of GTYPE_AIR:
printf(Air gripper selected\n)
of GTYPE_SERVO:
printf(Servo gripper selected\n
end case
See Also griptype_set()
Category Gripper
griptype_set
Description Sets the gripper type to correspond to the gripper in use. Gripper type must be
set to GTYPE_SERVO to use the gripdist_set() or gripdist_get() command.
Syntax command griptype_set(grip_type gtype)
Parameters One of:
GTYPE_AIR for air grippers (the default)
GTYPE_SERVO for servo-motor grippers
Failure < 0
Example griptype_set( GTYPE_SERVO )
RAPL-II @@SETUP grip type questions
See Also grip_open opens the gripper
grip_close closes the gripper
gripdist_set opens/closes servo fingers to specified separation distance
gripdist_get gets current servo finger separation distance
grip_finish finishes current gripper motion
gripisfinished determines if the gripper motion is finished
Category Gripper
Robot Configuration
halt
Description Stops any current robot motion.
Syntax command halt()
Parameter (empty)
Failure < 0
Example halt()
RAPL-II Similar to HALT.
See Also finish finishes current motion command before next motion
Category Motion
heap_set
Description Sets the heap size for current application. The heap is a storage space that can
be allocated under user control. The default size is 4K bytes which equals 1K
words (4 bytes = 1 word). The command heap_set() sets the heap size of the
current process to at least size words. Note that if you run out of heap space, the
system will attempt to allocate you more. That being said, it is generally better
(and faster) to simply allocate enough for your program at the start.
Note that if heap_set() is called after allocations have already been done, resetting
the heap size may be time consuming.
Syntax command heap_set( int size )
Parameter size integer value of the size of memory to be allocated in words (word = 4 bytes)
Returns
>= 0 Success
-ENOMEM There is not enough memory for the requested operation.
-EINVAL size is a nonsensical value (ie., negative)
Example int mem = 8192
heap_set(mem)
...
;; allocate memory needed using mem_alloc() command
Result Allocates 8192 bytes of memory
See Also heap_space determines the longest free area in the heap
heap_size returns the number of words in heap segment
mem_alloc allocates memory -(can increase allocated heap if necessary)
mem_free free memory space
Category Memory
heap_size
Description Returns the number of words in the heap segment of the current process. This
total size includes free, allocated, and overhead.
Syntax func int heap_size()
Parameters none
Returns Returns the number of words the entire heap currently occupies.
Example
int size_heap
size_heap=heap_size()
if (size_heap < 16)
heap_set(16)
end if
Result If the heap is not at least 16 Kbytes then it is set to 16 Kbytes
See Also heap_space() find the amount of free space in the heap
heap_set() set the total amount of space in the heap
Category Memory
heap_space
Description Determines the length of the longest contiguous free area available in the
programs heap. If an object greater than this size is allocated using mem_alloc()
then the system will have to expand the size of the heap.
Syntax func int heap_space()
Returns The length of longest contiguous area, in words.
Example
int heap_bloc, space = 3
void@ ptr
heap_bloc = heap_space()
if heap_bloc < 5
printf("heap space is low/n")
...
mem_alloc(ptr, space)
else
mem_alloc(ptr, space)
end if
Result Allocates memory of 3 words (12 bytes) - Notifies user if heap space is less than 5
Kbytes.
RAPL-II Similar to FREE
See Also mem_alloc() allocates an area of memory and initializes it
mem_free() de-allocates an area of memory
heap_set() sets the heap size of the current process
heap_size() determines how big the heap is in total.
Category Memory
here
Description Stores the current commanded robot location in the specified location variable. A
precision or cartesian location is stored, depending on the location type of the
input variable. Currently, the locations type must be explicitly defined prior to
use in the here() command.
Syntax command here( var gloc location )
Failure < 0
Example loc_class_set( #first ,loc_precision)
loc_class_set( _last ,loc_cartesian)
...
here( first ) ;;store precision location
...
here( last ) ;;store cartesian location
RAPL-II HERE
See Also pos_get gets the position of the robot
home
Description Homes the specified axes in numerical order: 1 (waist), 2 (shoulder), 3 (elbow), 4,
5, 6. This command assumes the robot has been correctly calibrated.
Syntax command home( [axis] [,axis] [,axis] ... )
Parameter(s) axis an axis to home
Failure < 0
Example if home(7) >= 0
if home(1,2,3,4,5,6) >= 0
else
print "Error homing arm.\n"
end if
else
print "Error homing track.\n"
end if
RAPL-II Similar to HOME.
See Also calibrate calibrates axes
homezc homes the axis specified
ready moves the arm to the READY position
robotishomed gets the homed or not-homed state of axes
Category Home
homezc
Description Homes the axis specified, and returns the offset in pulses.
Syntax command homezc( int axis, var int offset )
Parameter(s) axis an axis to home
offset the offset
Failure < 0
Example int machine, transform, actual, I
int[8] offsets
axes_get(machine, transform, actual)
for i = 1 to machine
homezc(i, offsets[i])
printf("axis {1} offset is {}\n", i,offsets[i])
end for
Result Homing axis 1 OK
axis 1 offset is 519
RAPL-II Same as HOMEZC.
See Also calzc calibrates at the next zero pulse of the encoder
calibrate calibrates axes
home homes the specified axes in numerical order
ready moves the arm to the READY position
robotishomed gets the homed or not-homed state of axes
Category Home
hsw_offset_get
Description Returns the offset between the homing switch and the calibration position of a
given axis, in encoder pulses. Used with an A465.
Syntax func int hsw_offset-get( int axis )
Parameter axis the axis to be inquired: an int
Returns
Example int machine, transform, actual, i, robot
int[8] offsets
robot = robot_type_get()
printf("robot is {}\n", robot)
if robot == 465
offsets[i] = hsw_offset_get(i)
printf("axis {1} offset is {}\n",
i,offsets[i])
end for
else
printf("Robot must be a 465 for this command")
end if
Result Prints the offsets for each axis, if the robot is a A465
See Also homezc homes the axis specified
Home
iabs
Description Calculates the absolute value of an int.
Syntax func int iabs( int x )
Argument x the number: an int
Returns The absolute value of the integer x. Note that one integer (-2147483648) does not
have a positive counterpart because of the limitations of 32-bit 2s complement
binary numbers.
Example int x = -99
int y
y = abs( x )
Result 99
RAPL-II ABS
See Also fabs calculates the absolute value of a float
Category Math
input
Description Queries the specified input channel for its state. Returns the state.
This subprogram is a function, not a command as it was in the earliest versions
of RAPL-3.
Syntax func int input( int channel )
Parameters channel the input channel: an int
the state, an int, one of:
0 = off
1 = on
Failure < 0 Returns error code
Example 1 state = input(4)
Example 2 if (input(8)) then ;; check sensor for presence of material
load_part() ;; material present
else
continue ;; material not present
end if
Application Shell Similar to input.
RAPL-II Similar to INPUT, but INPUT packed the state into a variable, and could be used
for digital and string input.
See Also inputs queries the entire bank of input channels for their states
output sets an output channel to a state
output_pulse sets and reverses an output
output_get gets the current state of an output channel
outputs sets the entire bank of outputs
Category Digital Input and Output
inputs
Description Queries the entire bank of input channels for their states. Returns an integer
that represents the bitmapped states of the inputs.
For the C500 controller, each of the first 16 bits represents an input. The least
significant bit is input 1, the sixteenth significant bit is input 16. The integer in
hex
Syntax func int inputs()
Parameters none
the input states: an int representing a bitmask where the lower 16 bits each
correspond to one of the inputs:
0 off
1 on
Example int dig_inputs
dig_inputs = inputs() ;; read all inputs
dig_inputs = dig_inputs & 0xf ;; enable lower 4 bits only
case dig_inputs
of 1: ;; first input is high
task_1()
of 2: ;; second input is high
task_2()
of 4: ;; third input is high
task_3()
of 8: ;; fourth input is high
task_4()
end case
Application Shell No equivalent.
See Also input queries an input channel for its state
outputs sets the entire bank of output channels to states
outputs_get queries the entire bank of output channels for their states
ioctl
Description I/O control operation. Used to configure and control a device.
If a get parameter is used, the data is stored. If a put parameter is used, the data
is written.
To change a serial port configuration, read the current status into one of the data
structures, change the data for specific members of the struct, and write the new
data for the port.
Syntax command ioctl( int fd, ioctl_op op, void@ data )
Parameters fd the port
op the operation, of type ioctl_op:
IOCTL_NOP no operation
IOCTL_GETC get configuration information
IOCTL_PUTC put configuration information
IOCTL_GETS get status information
IOCTL_PUTS put status information
IOCTL_GETSIG get special signal information
IOCTL_PUTSIG put special signal information
IOCTL_RDTIME set read timeout
IOCTL_WRTIME set write timeout
data a struct of integers of type sio_ioctl_conf:
int baud baud rate
int res_01
int res_02
int OutxCtsFlow 1 => enable CTS output flow control
int OutxDsrFlow 1 => enable DSR output flow control
int DtrControl 1 => enable DTR flow control
int DsrSensitivity 1 => enable DSR sensitivity
int TXContinueOnXoff 1 => continue trans after sending XOFF
int OutX 1 => enable output Xoff flow control
int InX 1 => enable input Xoff flow control
int res_10
int res_11
int RtsControl 1 => enable RTS flow control
int res_13
int res_14
int res_15
int lowtrig soft flow low trigger (xon point)
int hightrig soft flow high trigger (xoff point)
int wordlen word length (7 or 8 bits)
int parity 0 => none, 1 => odd, 2 => even
int stopbits 1 => 1 bit, 2 => 2 bits, 15 => 1.5 bits
int xonchar soft flow xon char
int xoffchar soft flow xoff char
int res_23
int res_24
int res_25
int fifotrig 0 => 1 byte, 1 => 4; 2 => 8; 3 => 14 bytes
int lfchar (unimpl) lf char for auto cr
int crchar (unimpl) cr char to emit for auto cr
int autocr (unimpl) enable auto cr
int res_30
Returns
>= 0 Success
-EINVAL one of the arguments is invalid
-EBADF fd does not correspond to an open object
-ENODEV the object open on fd is not a device
-ENOTTY the device does not support ioctl()
-EIO an I/O error has occurred
System Shell Same as siocfg
RAPL-II CONFIG, SERIAL
Category Device Input and Output
jog_t
Aliases tx, ty, tz, yaw, pitch, roll
alias same as
tx(...) jog_t(TOOL_X, ...)
ty(...) jog_t(TOOL_Y, ...)
tz(...) jog_t(TOOL_Z, ...)
yaw(...) jog_t(TOOL_YAW, ...)
pitch(...) jog_t(TOOL_PITCH, ...)
roll(...) jog_t(TOOL_ROLL, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, moves the tool centre point in a cartesian-axis
direction. TOOL_X, TOOL_Y, and TOOL_Z move the tool centre point along the X,
Y, and Z axis by the specified distance in current units (millimetres or inches).
TOOL_ YAW, TOOL_PITCH, and TOOL_ROLL rotate around an axis by the
specified rotation in degrees.
Yaw, pitch, and roll are tool motion based, not tool axis based. The command
gives the same motion, although the robots have different coordinate systems.
motion axes
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
yaw normal X Z
pitch orientation Y Y
roll approach/depart Z X
This command, jog_t(), is joint-interpolated.
For motion along an axis (TOOL_X, TOOL_Y, TOOL_Z), the end-point is along the
tool axis, but the tool centre point travels as a result of various joint motions, not
in a straight line.
Similarly for rotation around an axis (TOOL_YAW, TOOL_PITCH, TOOL_ROLL),
the end-point is determined and the tool travels to it as a result of various joint
motions. The start point and end point for the tool centre point are the same (no
change in distance along the axis or angle between the axis and the tool), but the
start position and end position of the tool are different by the amount of rotation.
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see jog_ts().
Syntax command jog_t( tool_axis_t axis, float distance )
Parameters axis the axis for motion
TOOL_X along the X axis
TOOL_Y along the Y axis
TOOL_Z along the Z axis
TOOL_YAW around the normal axis
TOOL_PITCH around the orientation axis
TOOL_ROLL around the approach/depart axis
distance the distance of travel, in current units or degrees: a float
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example jog_t(TOOL_Z,200) ;; millimetres
jog_t(TOOL_Y,-200)
Example move(centre)
jog_t(TOOL_PITCH,45) ;; rotate around Y
jog_t(TOOL_PITCH,-90)
RAPL-II No equivalents. DEPART moved along the approach/depart axis.
See Also jog_ts jogs like jog_t, but straight line motion
jog_w jogs like jog_t, but in world frame of reference
joint moves by joint degrees
motor moves by encoder pulses
Category Motion
jog_ts
Aliases txs, tys, tzs, yaws, pitchs, rolls
alias same as
txs(...) jog_ts(TOOL_X, ...)
tys(...) jog_ts(TOOL_Y, ...)
tzs(...) jog_ts(TOOL_Z, ...)
yaws(...) jog_ts(TOOL_YAW, ... )
pitchs(...
)
jog_ts(TOOL_PITCH,
...)
rolls(...) jog_ts(TOOL_ROLL, ...)
Description In the tool frame of reference, moves the tool centre point in a cartesian-axis
direction. TOOL_X, TOOL_Y, and TOOL_Z move the tool centre point along the X,
Y, and Z axis by the specified distance in current units (millimetres or inches).
TOOL_ YAW, TOOL_PITCH, and TOOL_ROLL rotate around an axis by the
specified rotation in degrees.
Yaw, pitch, and roll are tool motion based, not tool axis based. The command
gives the same motion, although the robots have different coordinate systems.
motion axes
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
yaw normal X Z
This command, jog_ts(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For motion along an axis (TOOL_X, TOOL_Y, TOOL_Z), the tool centre point
travels in a straight line along the axis to the end point.
For rotation around an axis (TOOL_YAW, TOOL_PITCH, TOOL_ROLL), the tool
centre point stays on the axis, while the tool rotates around the axis. The tool
centre point stays in the same place.
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see jog_t()
Syntax command jog_ts( tool_axis_t axis, float distance )
TOOL_X along the X axis
TOOL_Y along the Y axis
TOOL_Z along the Z axis
TOOL_YAW around the normal axis
TOOL_PITCH around the orientation axis
TOOL_ROLL around the approach/depart axis
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example jog_ts(TOOL_Z,200) ;; millimetres
jog_ts(TOOL_Y,-200)
Example move(centre)
jog_ts(TOOL_PITCH,45) ;; rotate around Y
jog_ts(TOOL_PITCH,-90)
RAPL-II No equivalents. DEPART moved along the approach/depart axis.
See Also jog_t jogs like jog_ts, but joint interpolated
jog_ws jogs like jog_ts, but in world frame of reference
Category Motion
jog_w
Aliases wx, wy, wz, zrot, yrot, xrot
alias same as
wx(...) jog_w(WORLD_X, ... )
wy(...) jog_w(WORLD_Y, ...)
wz(...) jog_w(WORLD_Z, ...)
zrot(...) jog_w(WORLD_ZROT, ...)
yrot(...) jog_w(WORLD_YROT, ...)
xrot(...) jog_w(WORLD_XROT, ...)
Description In the world frame of reference, moves the tool centre point in a cartesian-axis
direction. WORLD_X, WORLD_Y, and WORLD_Z move the tool centre point along
the X, Y, and Z axis by the specified distance in current units (millimetres or
inches). WORLD_ZROT, WORLD_YROT, and WORLD_XROT rotate around the Z,
Y, and X axis by the specified rotation in degrees.
This command, jog_w(), is joint-interpolated.
For motion along an axis (WORLD_X, WORLD_Y, WORLD_Z), the end-point is
along the world axis, but the tool centre point travels as a result of various joint
motions, not in a straight line.
Similarly for rotation around an axis (WORLD_ZROT, WORLD_YROT,
WORLD_XROT), the end-point is determined and the tool travels to it as a result
of various joint motions. The start point and end point for the tool centre point
are the same (no change in distance along the axis or angle between the axis and
the tool), but the start position and end position of the tool are different.
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see jog_ws().
Syntax command jog_w( world_axis_t axis, float distance )
WORLD_X along the X axis
WORLD_Y along the Y axis
WORLD_Z along the Z axis
WORLD_ZROT around the Z axis
WORLD_YROT around the Y axis
WORLD_XROT around the X axis
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example move(base_point)
jog_w(WORLD_X,200) ;; millimetres
Example appro(centre)
pitch(45) ;; pitch around tool point
jog_w(WORLD_XROT,45) ;; rotate around X
RAPL-II Similar to JOG, X, Y, Z, without straight line parameter.
Also similar to YAW, PITCH, and ROLL. In RAPL-II these names were used for
rotations in the world frame of reference. In RAPL-3, world rotations are called
zrot, yrot, and xrot, and tool rotations are called yaw, pitch, and roll.
See Also jog_ws jogs like jog_w, but straight line motion
jog_t jogs like jog_w, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
jog_ws
Aliases wxs, wys, wzs, zrots, yrots, xrots
alias same as
wxs(...) jog_ws(WORLD_X, ... )
wys(...) jog_ws(WORLD_Y, ...)
wzs(...) jog_ws(WORLD_Z, ...)
zrots(...) jog_ws(WORLD_ZROT, ...)
yrots(...) jog_ws(WORLD_YROT, ...)
xrots(...) jog_ws(WORLD_XROT, ...)
Description In the world frame of reference, moves the tool centre point in a cartesian-axis
direction. WORLD_X, WORLD_Y, and WORLD_Z move the tool centre point along
the X, Y, and Z axis by the specified distance in current units (millimetres or
inches). WORLD_ZROT, WORLD_YROT, and WORLD_XROT rotate around the Z,
Y, and X axis by the specified rotation in degrees.
This command, jog_ws(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For motion along an axis (WORLD_X, WORLD_Y, WORLD_Z), the tool centre point
travels in a straight line along the axis to the end point.
For rotation around an axis (WORLD_ZROT, WORLD_YROT, WORLD_XROT), the
tool centre point stays on the axis, while the tool rotates around the axis. The tool
centre point stays in the same place.
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see jog_w()
Syntax command jog_ws( world_axis_t axis, float distance )
WORLD_X along the X axis
WORLD_Y along the Y axis
WORLD_Z along the Z axis
WORLD_ZROT around the Z axis
WORLD_YROT around the Y axis
WORLD_XROT around the X axis
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
jog_ws(WORLD_X,200) ;; millimetres
Example appros(centre)
jog_ws(WORLD_XROT,45) ;; rotate around X
RAPL-II Similar to JOG, X, Y, and Z, with straight line parameter.
Also similar to YAW, PITCH, and ROLL. In RAPL-II these names were used for
rotations in the world frame of reference. In RAPL-3, world rotations are called
zrot, yrot, and xrot, and tool rotations are called yaw, pitch, and roll.
See Also jog_w jogs like jog_ws, but joint interpolated
jog_ts jogs like jog_ws, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
joint
Description Rotates a rotational joint (e.g. of an articulated arm) by a specified number of
degrees, or moves a linear joint (e.g. of a track or gantry) by a defined number of
units (millimetres or inches depending on metric or English mode).
Syntax command joint( int axis, float distance )
Parameters axis the axis being moved: an int
distance the distance of travel, in current units: a float
Failure < 0
Example joint(7,20) ;; moves the track (for F3 or A465) 20 units
joint(1,45) ;; moves the waist joint +45 degrees
RAPL-II Similar to JOINT
See Also jog moves by cartesian increment
Category Motion
joint_to_motor
Description Converts a location from joint angles to motor pulses. Used if a location of one
type needs to be converted to another type for checking or other use within the
program.
Syntax command joint_to_motor( var float[8] joint, var ploc motor )
Parameters joint the location in joint angles, in degrees
motor the location in motor pulses: a ploc
motor is packed
Failure < 0
Example float[8] joints1 = {10, -15, 5, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
ploc motor1
...
joint_to_motor(joints1, motor1)
Result motor1 is packed with the appropriate pulse data
RAPL-II Similar to SET with different location types.
See Also motor_to_joint converts motor pulses to joint angles
joint_to_world converts joint angles to world coordinates
Category Location: Kinematic Conversion
joint_to_world
Description Converts a location from joint angles to world coordinates. Used if a location of
one type needs to be converted to another type for checking or other use within
the program.
Syntax command joint_to_world(var float[8] joint, var cloc world)
Parameters joint the location in joint angles
world the location in world coordinates: a cloc
world is packed
Failure < 0
Example float[8] joints1 = {10, -15, 5, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}
cloc world1
...
joint_to_world(joints1, world1)
Result world1 is packed with the appropriate world coordinate data
See Also world_to_joint converts world coordinates to joint angles
joint_to_motor converts joint angles to motor pulses
Category Location: Kinematic Conversion
jointlim_get
Description Gets the positive and negative limits of travel for a specified axis..
Syntax command jointlim_get( int axis, var float poslim, var float neglim
)
Parameter axis an int specifying the axis
poslim the positive limit: an array of up to 8 floats
neglim the negative limit: an array of up to 8 floats
Failure < 0
Example
int axes, total, trnsfrm
float[8] pluslim, neglim
int count, t
...
t= axes_get(axes,trnsfrm, total)
if t>0
for count = 1 to axes
jointlim_get(count, pluslim[count-1], neglim[count-
1])
printf("axis {2} limits are: +{5} -
{5}/n",count,\ pluslim[count-1],
neglim[count-1])
end for
else
... use for error handling
end if
Result Prints the robot joint limits
See Also jointlim_set
jointlim_set
Description Sets the positive and negative limits of travel for one axis.
Syntax command jointlim_set( int axis, float poslim, float neglim )
Parameter axis the axis to set: an int
poslim the positive limit: a float
neglim the negative limit: a float
Failure < 0
Example
int count
int axes, total, trnsfrm
teachable float[8] pluslim, neglim
axes_get(axes,trnsfrm, total)
for count = 1 to axes
jointlim_set(count, pluslim[count-1], neglim[count-1])
end for
RAPL-II Similar to @XLIMITS, except @XLIMITS took the limit in radians.
See Also jointlim_get
limp
Description Disengages the servo control of a motor which limps that joint. A single axis or
several axes can be specified. All axes are specified by an empty parameter.
Warning Provide adequate support for arm links before limping any joint. Without
adequate support, they can drop suddenly when the joint is limped, and may
cause damage or injury.
Syntax command limp([ int axis ] [, int axis ] ...)
Parameters (Optional) (empty) all axes limped
axis axis being limped: an int
Failure < 0
Example limp() ;; limps all axes
limp(3) ;; limps axis 3
limp( 4, 5, 6) ;; limps axis 4, 5, and 6
RAPL-II Similar to LIMP.
See Also nolimp unlimps axes
Category Motion
linacc_get
Description Returns the current value of the robots linear acceleration in metric or English
units.
Syntax command linacc_get(var float linacc)
Parameter linacc is packed with the current acceleration setting
Example float acc
printf(The linear acceleration is {}, linacc_get(acc))
Result The linear acceleration is 1016.
See Also linacc_set sets the linear speed
units_set sets the current units metric or English
linspd_get returns the maximum linear speed
linspd_set sets the linear speed depending on the configuration
linacc_set
Description Sets the current value of the robots linear acceleration in metric or English units
to the value specified by the parameter linacc.
Syntax command linacc_set(var float linacc)
Parameter linacc specifies the requested setting for the robot acceleration.
Example ;; Decrease the acceleration by 50 percent
;; Current acceleration is 1016 mm/sec
2
float old_acc, new_acc
linacc_get(old_acc)
printf("The acceleration was {}/n", old_acc)
new_acc = old_acc*0.5
linacc_set(new_acc)
printf("The acceleration is now {}/n",new_acc)
Result The acceleration was 1016.
The acceleration is now 508.
See Also linacc_get sets the linear speed
linspd_get returns the maximum linear speed
linspd_set sets the linear speed depending on the configuration
link
Description Makes a hard link to an existing file or directory. Useful for renaming files,
moving files, or sharing data.
Syntax command link( var string[] name1, var string[] name2 )
Parameters
name1 the name of the object to create a new link to
name2 the name of the new link
Returns
>= 0 Success
-EINVAL one of the file names was invalid
-ENOTDIR a component of one of the names was not a directory
-ENOENT the original object was not found
-EAGAIN the system is temporarily out of the resources required to
carry out this operation
-EISDIR cant create a hard link to a directory
-EEXIST name2 already exists
-EXDEV tried to link across filesystems
linklen_get
Description Gets the link length for all axes.
Syntax command linklen_get( var float[8] length )
Parameter length an array of floats
Failure < 0
Example int machine, transform, actual, I
float[8] links
linklen_get(links)
printf("axis {1} link length is {}\n", i,links[i])
end for
Result For a 255 robot:
axis 1 link length is 10.0000
See Also linklen_set sets the link length for an axis
linklen_set
Description Sets the link length for an axis.
Syntax command linklen_set( int axis, float length )
Parameter axis an int
length a float
Failure < 0
See Also linklen_get gets the link lengths of all axes
linspd_get
Description Returns the maximum linear speed for the robot in units of millimetres per
second or inches per second depending on the unit configuration.
Cannot be used in the speed() command which takes an integer parameter of
percentage of maximum speed, for example speed(<int>linspd_get(t))
Syntax command linspd_get(var float linspd)
Parameter linspd is packed with the maximum speed value.
Failure < 0 Returns negative error code if command fails.
Example float max_lin_spd
int curr_percent_spd
linspd_get(max_lin_spd)
speed_get(curr_percent_spd)
printf("The maximum linear speed is {}/n", max_lin_spd)
printf("The current speed setting is {}/n", curr_percent_spd)
Result The maximum linear speed is
The current speed setting is
See Also linspd_set sets the linear speed
units_set sets the units metric or English
linspd_set
Description Sets the linear speed for the robot in units of millimetres per second or inches
per second depending on the configuration.
Syntax command linspd_set(var float linspd)
Parameter linspd specifies the new speed setting
Failure < 0 Returns -EINVAL if (linspd < 0) or other error if the command
fails.
Example ;; Set the linear speed to the maximum speed
float spd
linspd_get(spd)
linspd_set(spd)
printf(The speed is {}\n, spd)
Result Sets the linear robot speed to the maximum speed value.
See Also speed_get gets the current speed setting
speed_set sets the speed of arm motions
linspd_set sets the linear speed
ln
Description Calculates the natural logarithm of a float. Takes a positive argument.
Syntax func float ln( float x )
Returns The natural logarithm of the argument.
float y
y = ln( x )
Result 2.014903
RAPL-II LN
See Also log calculates the common (base 10) logarithm
pow calculates a value raised to a power
Category Math
loc_cdata_get
Description Packs the cloc cl into the float array fa. The float[8] array corresponds to the
cartesian coordinates x, y, z, yaw, pitch, roll, extra axis 1, extra axis 2; or x, y, z,
pitch, roll, extra axis 1, extra axis 2, extra axis 3.
Syntax sub loc_cdata_get( var cloc cl, var float[8] fa )
Parameters cl cartesian coordinate location variable
fa an array of floats - packed with the location values of cl
Example ...
teachable cloc cl
float[8] fa
loc_cdata_get(cl, fa)
...
See Also loc_cdata-set
loc_pdata_get
loc_pdata_set
loc_cdata_set
Description Packs the cartesian data in fa into the cloc cl. The float[8] array corresponds to
the cartesian coordinates x, y, z, yaw, pitch, roll, extra axis 1, extra axis 2; or x,
y, z, pitch, roll, extra axis 1, extra axis 2, extra axis 3.
Syntax sub loc_cdata_set( var cloc cl, var float[8] fa )
Parameter cl cartesian coordinate location variable packed with the data in fa
fa an array of floats specifying the data for the cloc
Example ...
cloc cl
float[8] fa = {2,3,4,0,0,0,0,0}
loc_cdata_set(cl, fa)
...
RAPL-II POINT
See Also loc_cdata_get
loc_pdata_get
loc_pdata_set
loc_check
Description Tests the checksum of the generic location gl. If the checksum is OK, returns 1.
Syntax func int loc_check( var gloc gl )
Parameter gl generic location to be checked
Returns
True (1) Success; the checksum is correct.
False (0) Failure; the checksum is wrong.
Example gloc gl
...
if loc_check( gl ) == 1
;; everything OK
else
;; everything NOT OK
end if
See Also loc_re_check
loc_class_get
Description Returns the location class of a generic location variable gl. The different classes
are loc_unknown, loc_cartesian, and loc_precision.
Syntax func loc_class loc_class_get( var gloc gl )
Parameter gl gloc generic location variable
Returns loc_class, one of:
loc_unknown
loc_cartesian
loc_precision
Example gloc gl
...
case loc_class_get( gl )
of loc_unknown:
;; Location Type Unknown
of loc_cartesian:
;; Cartesian location (cloc)
of loc_precision:
;; Precision location (ploc)
else
;; Error
end case
loc_class_set
Description Sets the class of a generic location variable gl to location class lc. The different
classes are loc_unknown, loc_cartesian, and loc_precision.
Syntax sub loc_class_set( var gloc gl, loc_class lc )
Parameter gl gloc generic location variable
lc loc_class type: must be
loc_unknown
loc_cartesian
loc_precision
Example gloc gl1, gl2
loc_class lc
...
lc = loc_class_get( gl1 )
loc_class_set( gl2, lc )
Category Location Data: Manipulation
loc_flags_get
Description Returns the flags that are set for the generic location variable gl. Warning: the
flags are used to mark if the location has been taught and what units it is in. It
is potentially dangerous to tamper with the flags of a location.
Syntax func int loc_flags_get( var gloc gl )
Parameter gl location variable (cloc or ploc)
Returns an integer with the bits set according to the following:
global const LOC_INVALID = 0x00
global const LOC_VALID = 0x01
global const LOC_CALIBRATE = 0x02
global const LOC_MARKER = 0x04
global const LOC_NULL = 0x08
global const LOC_METRIC = 0x10
global const LOC_TOOL = 0x20
global const LOC_BASE = 0x40
global const LOC_OFFSET= 0x80
. Example int flags
gloc gl
...
flags = loc_flags_get( gl )
loc_flags_set( flags + 1 )
See Also loc_flag_set
Category Location: Flags
loc_flags_set
Description Sets the flags on the generic location variable gl to f. Does not re-calculate the
checksum.
Syntax sub loc_flags_set( var gloc gl, int f )
Parameter gl the location: a cloc or ploc
f an integer the flag constructed with the bits set according to the
following defined constants
global const LOC_INVALID = 0x00
global const LOC_VALID = 0x01
global const LOC_CALIBRATE = 0x02
global const LOC_MARKER = 0x04
global const LOC_NULL = 0x08
global const LOC_METRIC = 0x10
global const LOC_TOOL = 0x20
global const LOC_BASE = 0x40
global const LOC_OFFSET= 0x80
Example int flags
gloc gl
...
flags = loc_flags_get( gl )
loc_flags_set(gl, flags + 1 )
See Also loc_flags_get
loc_machtype_get
Description Returns the machine type code of a generic location gl.
Syntax func machine_type loc_machtype_get( var gloc gl )
Parameter gl generic location variable
Returns Success >= 0 Returns a machine_type enumerated type
machine_type, one of:
mc_a255 A255
mc_a465 A465
mc_f2 F2
Failure < 0
Example gloc gl
int mach_type
...
mach_type = loc_machtype_get( gl )
See Also loc_machtype_set
loc_machtype_set
Description Sets the machine type code of generic location variable gl to machine type mt.
Does not re-calculate the checksum.
Syntax sub loc_machtype_set( var gloc gl, machine_type mt )
Parameter gl generic location variable*
mt machine_type, enumerated type one of:
mc_a255 A255
mc_a465 A465
mc_f2 F2 * see enum
Example gloc gl1, gl2
int mt
...
mt = loc_machtype_get( gl1 )
loc_machtype_set( gl2, mt )
See Also loc_machtype_get
loc_pdata_get
Description Packs a gloc into an integer array. The int[8] array corresponds to the motor
pulse values for the 8 motors, in order.
Syntax sub loc_pdata_get( var ploc pl, var int[8] ia )
Parameter pl ploc (precision location variable)
ia integer array packed with the motor pulse counts
Example ...
teachable ploc pl
int[8] ia
loc_data_get(pl, ia)
...
See Also loc_pdata_set
loc_cdata_get
loc_cdata_set
loc_pdata_set
Description Packs the precision data in ia into the (should this be a ploc) gloc pl. The int[8]
array corresponds to the motor pulse values for the 8 motors, in order.
Syntax sub loc_pdata_set( var gloc pl, var int[8] ia )
Parameter pl gloc (should this be a ploc) to be packed with the motor pulse counts in ia
ia integer array packed with the motor pulse counts
Example ...
gloc gl
int[8] ia = {
loc_data_get(gl, ia)
...
RAPL-II POINT
See Also loc_pdata_get
loc_cdata_get
loc_cdata_set
loc_re_check
Description Recalculates and re-sets the checksum of a generic location gl.
Syntax sub loc_re_check( var gloc gl )
Parameter gl the location to be checked
Example gloc gl
...
loc_re_check( gl )
See Also loc_check
lock
Description Locks a specified axis.
Not to be confused with flock() which locks a file.
Syntax command lock( int axis )
Parameter axis the axis to be locked: an int
Failure < 0
Example int axis
...
lock(axis)
RAPL-II Same as LOCK
Category Motion
log
Description Calculates the common (base 10) logarithm of a float. Takes a positive argument.
Syntax func float log( float x )
Returns Success >= 0. The common logarithm of the argument.
Failure < 0
float y
y = log( x )
Result 0.875061
RAPL-II LOG
See Also ln calculates the natural logarithm
pow calculates a value raised to a power
Category Math
MAJOR
Description Extracts the major number from device dev.
Syntax func int MAJOR( int dev )
Parameters dev specifies the device - an int
Failure < 0
Example int dev, major = 23, minor = 1
...
dev = BUILD_DEV( major, minor )
major = MAJOR( dev )
minor = MINOR( dev )
See Also MINOR extracts the minor number from a device
malarm
Description Requests that the system send the current process a specified signal after a
specified delay. This can be used to implement timeouts and periodic events in a
fairly simple fashion.
Syntax command malarm(int delay, int sig)
delay How long to wait, in milliseconds, before sending signal sig
to the current process. If delay == 0, then we are canceling
a signal request. Note that each time we call malarm() for a
given sig, we reset the time remaining to delay.
sig The signal to send after delay milliseconds has passed.
Returns
>= 0 Success; returns the number of milliseconds that were left
until sig would have been sent. Returns 0 if no previous
signal was requested.
< 0 Failure.
Example1 ;; This demonstrates an interrupt that will occur at about
;; once per second:
sub alarm_handler(int n)
malarm(1000, SIG20) ;; send a SIG20 after 1 second
printf(Beep\n)
end sub
main
signal(SIG20, alarm_handler, NULL) ;; set the signal handler
malarm(1000, SIG20) ;; start the periodic event going
loop
printf(Hello!\n) ;; loop forever, saying Hello
delay(500)
end loop
end main
Result1 The output will look something like this:
Hello!
Hello!
Beep
Hello!
Hello!
Beep
...
Example2 ;; This demonstrates using a signal with malarm() to implement
;; a read with a timeout:
;;
sub alarm_handler(int n)
;; doesnt actually need to do anything but catch the signal
end sub
main
int fd, t
string[32] s
...
open(fd, /dev/sio1, O_RDWR, 0) ;; open sio1
...
;; read with timeout:
malarm(SIGALRM, 1000) ;; 1 second timeout
t = reads(fd, s, 32) ;; read!
malarm(SIGALRM, 0) ;; cancel the signal
;; NOW if t is EINTR, we timed out with no data read
;; if t > 0, we read that many characters
...
end main
See Also signal(), kill(), sigsend()
Category Signals
maxvel_get
Description For one axis, gets maxvel, the maximum angular velocity of the motor, in
revolutions per minute. The maxvel is set to ensure proper output by the
encoder.
Syntax func float maxvel_get ( int axis)
Parameter axis the axis being inquired: an int
Returns Success: >= 0 Returns the maximum motor velocity in RPM
Failure: < 0
Example int ax3vel[8]
ax3vel[3] = getmaxvel(3)
See Also maxvels_get gets the maximum velocities of all motors
maxvel_set sets the maximum velocity of one motor
maxvels_set sets the maximum velocities of all motors
maxvel_set
Description For one axis, sets maxvel, the maximum angular velocity of the motor in
revolutions per minute. The maxvel is set to ensure proper output by the
encoder. If the velocity specified is greater than limits set in the robot kinematics
the value is truncated to the set limits.
Syntax command maxvel_set(int axis, float maxvel )
maxvel the maximum velocity: a float
Returns Success: >= 0
Failure: < 0
Example ;;Example to set maximum velocity for system axis
;;It would be simpler to use maxvels_set
int axis, count
float[8] vel_max {180, 180, 180, 171.089, 172.800, 172.089,
2368.57, 350.002)
for count = 1 to 8
maxvel_set(count ,vel_max[count-1])
end for
RAPL-II Similar to @XMAXVEL.
See Also maxvel_get gets the maximum velocity of one motor
maxvels_set sets the maximum velocities of all motors
maxvels_get gets the maximum velocities of all motors
configaxis configures an axis including sets maxvel
maxvels_get
Description For all axes, gets maxvels, the maximum angular velocities of the motors.
Maxvels are set to ensure proper outputs by the encoders.
Syntax command maxvels_get( var float[8] maxvel )
Parameter maxvel the maximum velocities in rpm: an array of floats
Returns Success: parameter is packed
Failure: < 0
Example float[8] vel_max
...
maxvels_get(vel_max)
See Also maxvels_set sets the maximum velocities of all motors
maxvel_get gets the maximum velocity of one motor
maxvels_set
Description For all axes, sets maxvels, the maximum angular velocities of the motors.
Maxvels are set to ensure proper outputs by the encoders. If the velocity specified
is greater than limits set in the robot kinematics the value is truncated to the set
limits.
Syntax command maxvels_set( var float[8] maxvel )
Parameter maxvel the maximum velocities in revolutions per minute: an array of floats
Returns Success: >= 0
Failure: < 0
Example float[8] new_velocities = { 180, 180, 180, 171.089, 172.800,
171.089, 0, 0}
maxvels_set(new_velocities)
Result The maximum velocities are set to the preset limits for the A465
robot arm. The extra axes are set to a zero velocity.
RAPL-II Similar to @XMAXVEL.
See Also maxvels_get gets the maximum velocities of all motors
maxvel_get gets the maximum velocity of one motor
* configaxis configures an axis including sets maxvel
mem_alloc
Description Allocates an area of free memory of length size, sets ptr to point to the area, and
initializes the area to zeros, i.e. "clears" it. Also tries to allocate more heap space
if required.
Along with mem_free(), the user can allocate and de-allocate space repeatedly.
Syntax command mem_alloc(var void@ ptr, int size )
Parameters size a number of words (4 byte units)
Failure < 0
Example ;; Define a new structure element and allocate memory to create
a
;;
;; define the new type
;;
typedef element struct
int val
element@ previous ;; pointer to struct of type element
element@ next ;; pointer to struct of type element
end struct
element@ tmp_ptr = NULL ;; pointer used to create new element
;; create new element with pointer tmp_ptr
mem_alloc(tmp_ptr,sizeof(tmp_ptr@))
...
RAPL-II ALLOC not only allocated memory but performed other tasks with its parameters.
See Also mem_free de-allocates an area of memory
heap_space determines largest area before failure of malloc
heap_set
Category Memory
mem_free
Description Frees memory space. Returns an area of memory, previously allocated by
mem_alloc(), to the pool of free space. Should never be used with space that has
not previously been allocated by mem_alloc(), although freeing space with a null
pointer is acceptable.
Syntax command mem_free( void@ ptr )
Failure < 0
Example ;;de-allocate memory for list of elements (structure see
mem_alloc)
printf ("* Deleting list elements\n\n")
while (head_ptr)
tmp_ptr = head_ptr@.previous
printf (" head_ptr addr:{}\n",head_ptr)
printf (" tmp_ptr addr:{}\n\n",tmp_ptr)
mem_free (head_ptr)
head_ptr = tmp_ptr
end while
RAPL-II Different from the RAPL-II command FREE which displayed the status of
memory.
See Also mem_alloc allocates an area of memory and initializes it
Category Memory
memcopy
Description Copies a block of words of length len from src to dst.
Syntax command memcopy( void @dst, void @src , int len )
Parameter dst a pointer to the copy destination
src a pointer to the copy source
len the integer value of the length to be copied
Failure < 0
Example int[100] x
int[8] y
...
;; get elements 20 to 27 from x into y
...
memcopy(&y, &(x[20]), sizeof(y) )
See Also memset
Category Memory
memset
Description Sets a block of words of length len at dst to contain value v.
Syntax command memset( void @dst, int v, int len )
Parameter dst pointer to the memory destination to be set
v an int value to be set
len the length of memory to be set to v
Failure < 0
Example int[100} x
teachable int new
...
;; Set elements of x all to value new
memset(&x, new, sizeof(x)
See Also memcopy
Category Memory
memstat
Description Gets information about the current system memory status.
Syntax command memstat( int@ run_0, int@ run_1 )
Parameters If run_0 does not equal NULL, then run_0 is assigned the length of the longest
run of unallocated blocks. If run_1 does not equal NULL, then run_1 is assigned
the length of the longest run of allocated blocks.
Returns Success >= 0 Returns the number of free clicks .
Failure < 0
Example int r0, r1, num_blocks
...
num_blocks = memstat( &r0, &r1 )
See Also mem_alloc
heap_set
heap_size
heap_space
Category Memory
MINOR
Description Extracts the minor number from device dev.
Syntax func int MINOR( int dev )
Failure < 0
Example int dev, major = 23, minor = 1
dev = BUILD_DEV( major, minor )
major = MAJOR( dev )
minor = MINOR( dev )
See Also MAJOR extracts the major number from a device
mkdir
Description Creates a new, empty directory specified by path with permissions defined by
mode. The entries for dot and dot-dot are automatically created. A common
mistake is to specify the same mode as for a file (read and write only), but for a
directory normally one of the execute bits must be enabled to allow access to the
filenames within the directory.
Syntax command mkdir( var string[] path, int mode )
Failure < 0
-EEXIST if dir already exists
-ENOENT if the parent dir or a component of it doesn't exist
-EINVAL if the file name is invalid
-ENOTDIR if a component of the path is not a directory
-ENOSPC out of space on the device
Example string[] path = /usr/name/new_dir
int mode = M_READ|M_EXEC
...
mkdir ( path, mode )
System Shell mkdir
See Also mknod Makes special node (device, fifo, socket, directory)
mknod
Description Makes a special node.
Syntax command mknod(var string[] path, node_type vt, int mode, int dev)
Parameters path path to the node location
vt the node to be made, of type node_type, one of:
NT_NON no entry
NT_REG regular file
NT_DIR directory
NT_DEV device
NT_LNK symbolic link
NT_SOCK inter-process communication socket
NT_FIFO fifo
mode the modes of access, of type mode_flags, any combination of:
M_READ read allowed
M_WRITE write allowed
M_EXEC executable *
dev the MAJOR and MINOR device numbers
Failure < 0
-EINVAL if an invalid argument
-EEXIST if it already exists
-ENOENT if the parent dir or a component of it doesn't exist
-ENOTDIR if a component of the path is not a directory
System Shell Same as mkdev, mkfifo, mksock, mkdir.
See Also mkdir makes a new directory
module_name_get
Description Gets the name of the module performing this subroutine call and places it into
name, up to maxlen characters.
Allows a library to retrieve its own invocation name.
Allows multiple machine instances using only one library.
Syntax sub module_name_get(var string[] name, int maxlen )
Parameter name the name of the module: a string of variable length
maxlen the maximum number of characters: an int
Failure < 0
Example int length = 25
string[] module
...
module_name_get(module, length)
...
Result string module is packed with the module name
motor
Description Rotates a motor by a defined number of encoder pulses.
There is a third, optional parameter for a specific condition. Under most
conditions, no specifier or 0 (zero) is used. If the third parameter is used, the
system monitors for the specified state. Motion terminates when the input
transitions to (or is in) this state or after the specified number of pulses (second
parameter) have been counted, whichever is first. The third parameter is typically
used when seeking for homing or limit switches during homing or calibrating
operations.
Syntax command motor( int axis, int pulses [, int cond] )
Parameters axis the axis being moved: an int
pulses the number of pulses to move: an int
Parameter (Optional) cond the condition: one of type motor_stop_mode_t or an int:
MSTOP_NONE = 0 no specific condition
MSTOP_ONHOME = 32000 stops when homing switch goes on
MSTOP_OFFHOME = -32000 stops when homing switch goes off
+1 stops when GPIO 1 is on
-1 stops when GPIO 1 is off
... ...
+16 stops when GPIO 1 is on
-16 stops when GPIO 1 is off
Failure < 0
Example motor(3, 1000, 0)
RAPL-II Similar to MOTOR.
See Also joint moves by joint degrees
jog moves by cartesian increment
Category Motion
Calibration
motor_to_joint
Description Converts a location from motor pulses to joint angles. Used if a location of one
type needs to be converted to another type for checking or other use within the
program.
Syntax command motor_to_joint( ploc motor, var float[8] joint )
Parameters motor the location in motor pulses: a ploc
joint an array of floats is packed with the location i joint
angles
joint is packed
Failure < 0
Example ploc motor1
float[8] joints1
motor_to_joint(motor1, joints1)
Result joints1 is packed with the appropriate joint positions
See Also joint_to_motor converts joint angles to motor pulses
motor_to_world converts motor pulses to world coordinates
Category Location: Kinematic Conversions
motor_to_world
Description Converts a location from motor pulses to world coordinates. Used if a location of
the program.
Syntax command motor_to_world( ploc motor, var cloc world )
Parameters motor the location in motor pulses: a ploc
world the location in world coordinates: a cloc
world is packed
Failure < 0
Example teachable ploc motor1
teachable cloc world1
motor_to_world(motor1, world11)
Result world1 is packed with the appropriate world coordinate location
values
See Also world_to_motor converts world coordinates to motor pulses
motor_to_joint converts motor pulses to joint angles
mount
Description Mounts a filesystem of type t on directory dir, with options flags. Special
filesystem-specific arguments are passed using the data pointer.
Syntax command mount( mount_type t, var string[] dir, \
mount_flags flags, void@ data )
Parameter t the type of filesystem, of type mount_type, one of:
MOUNT_MFS Memory File System
MOUNT_CFS CROSnt File System
MOUNT_RFS Remote File System
MOUNT_HOSTFS Host File System
dir the mount point of the CROS directory: a string of var length
flags the option, of type mount_flags:
MOUNTF_RDONLY *
data file-system specific arguments
(none; data = NULL) for MFS
char FAR * points to path of server socket for RFS
char FAR * points to host filesystem path for HOSTFS
Failure < 0
-EPERM must be a privileged process to mount()
-EINVAL invalid argument
-ENOTDIR the mount point is not a directory
-ENOENT a component was not found
-EAGAIN temporarily out of resources needed to do this
-EBUSY the mount point is busy
Example .define PATHLEN 32
mount_type type = MOUNT_HOSTFS
string[PATHLEN] dir = "/app/this_app"
mount_flags flags = MOUNTF_RDONLY
c_statfs stat
int check
check = mount(type, dir, flags, NULL)
System Shell Same as mount
See Also unmount unmounts a mounted file system
move
Description Moves the tool centre-point to the specified location in joint-interpolated mode.
Individual robot joints start and stop at the same time. The speed of the joint that
has to move the farthest is governed by the speed setting, and other joints rotate
slower according to joint interpolation. The resulting path is not straight.
The location can be either a cartesian location or a precision location.
Syntax command move( gloc location )
Parameter location the destination location: a gloc (can be cloc or ploc)
Failure < 0
Example teachable ploc pick_1
teachable cloc place_1
move(pick_1)
...
move(place_1)
RAPL-II Similar to MOVE, without the S parameter.
See Also moves same as move(), but in straight line
appro moves to an approach position
depart moves to a depart position
finish finishes current motion before another motion
Category Motion
moves
Description Moves the tool centre-point to the specified location in cartesian-interpolated
mode. The result is straight-line motion. Individual robot joints start and stop at
the same time.
The location can be either a cartesian location or a precision location.
Syntax command moves( gloc location )
Parameter location the destination location: a gloc
Failure < 0
Example teachable ploc pick_2
teachable cloc place_2
...
moves(pick_2)
...
moves(place_2)
RAPL-II Similar to MOVE, with optional S (straight-line) parameter.
See Also move same as moves(), but joint-interpolated
appro moves to an approach position
depart moves to a depart position
finish finishes current motion before another motion
Category Motion
msleep
Description Sleeps for the number of milliseconds specified in milliseconds and then returns
to the main program. Can be terminated by an EINTR error. To avoid this, use
delay().
Syntax command msleep( int milliseconds )
Failure < 0
EOK no error; timed out normally
EINTR if interrupted by a signal
Example loop
print (Waiting for GPIO input 1. \n)
if (input(1) == 1 )
break
end if
msleep(250)
end loop
RAPL-II Similar to DELAY.
See Also delay sleeps without being terminated by EINTR
Category System Process Control: Single & Multiple Processes
mtime
Description Obtains the number of milliseconds since system start-up.
The data type, c_mtime_t is an array of ints, int[2], a 64-bit number, like an
unsigned long in C. In the array, [0] holds the least significant bit and [1] holds
the most significant bit. There is space for approximately 584,942,417.4 years,
after which the bits roll over to zero.
Syntax command mtime( c_mtime_t@ ctp )
Parameter ctp the number, of type c_mtime_t: an int[2]
Failure < 0
-EOK success
Example ;; print the elapsed time of a delay determined by a random number
;; the time is limited to 65 seconds since only the first element
;; of the mtime array is used
main
int num_rndm
int[2] start_tm, end_tm
srand (10)
num_rndm = rand_in (1000,65000) ;; limit range of
random number
printf ("random number = {}\n",num_rndm)
mtime(&start_tm) ;; get start time
delay (num_rndm)
mtime(&end_tm) ;; get end time
printf ("time elapsed = {} milliseconds\n,end_tm[0]-
start_tm[0])
end main
RAPL-II TIME, but mtime() is in milliseconds
Category Date and Time
net_in_get
Description Reads input data from the F3 end of arm I/O boards.
Syntax func int net_in_get(int in)
Parameter in the number of the input to be read (1..32)
Returns Success: 0 -> input off, 1 -> input on
Failure: net_in_get() raises an exception
Example ;; Read input 3 from the end of arm I/O board:
if (net_in_get(3))
;; the output is set...
end if
See Also net_ins_get(), net_outs_get(), net_out_set(), net_outs_set()
net_ins_get
Description Reads all input data from the F3 end of arm I/O boards.
Syntax func int net_ins_get(int mask)
Parameter mask bit mask with a 1 for each input whose value is to be
read. The least significant bit represents channel 1, the most
significant bit represents channel 32.
Returns Success: an integer with a 1 in each bit corresponding to each input that is on.
Failure: net_ins_get() raises an exception.
Example int t
;; Check the status of input 1 through 8:
t = net_ins_get(0x000000ff) ;; bottom 8 bits set
printf(Inputs 1 to 8 are: {02x}\n, t)
See Also net_in_get(), net_outs_get(), net_out_set(), net_outs_set()
net_out_set
Description Sets a specified F3 end of arm output to a specified value.
Syntax command net_out_set(int outnum, int value)
Parameters outnum -- end of arm output to change (1..4)
value -- 0 => off, 1 => on
Warning if the F3 is configured for an air gripper, then end of arm
outputs 1 and 2 are reserved, and must not be used.
Example int t
;; read input 3 and output the opposite of its value to output 3:
t = net_in_get(3)
if (t < 0)
;; error...
end if
net_out_set(3, !t)
See Also net_in_get(), net_ins_get(), net_outs_get(), net_outs_set()
net_outs_get
Description Gets the current state of a set of F3 end of arm outputs.
Syntax func int net_outs_get(int mask)
Parameters mask indicates which outputs to read; the least significant
bit corresponds to output 1, the most significant bit corresponds
to output 32. F3 currently only supports 4 outputs
Returns Success: an integer with a 1 in each bit corresponding to each output that is
on.
Failure: net_outs_get() raises an exception
Example ;; Flip the state of outputs 1 through 4:
t = net_outs_get(0x0000000f) ;; get the old values
;; now set the new values, using xor to flip the bits:
net_outs_set(t xor 0x0000000f, 0x0000000f)
See Also net_in_get(), net_ins_get(), net_out_set(), net_outs_set()
net_outs_set
Description Allows several F3 end of arm outputs to be set to a specified state at the same
time.
Syntax command net_outs_set(int state, int mask)
Parameters state -- each bit represents what state to set an output to
mask -- each 1 corresponds to each output to change.
Both state and mask are sets of bits corresponding to outputs.
The least significant bits correspond to output 1; the most
significant bits correspond to output 32. When the net_outs_set()
command is executed, each output with a corresponding 1 in mask
will be set to the value of the corresponding bit in state.
Example see the example for net_outs_set(), above.
See Also net_in_get(), net_ins_get(), net_out_set(), net_outs_get()
nolimp
Description Re-engages the servo control of a motor which unlimps that joint. A single axis or
several axes can be specified. All axes are specified by an empty parameter.
Used after the command limp().
Syntax command nolimp( [ int axis ] [, int axis ] ... )
Parameter (Optional) axis axis being unlimped
(empty) all axes unlimped
Failure < 0
Example limp(4, 5, 6) ;; limps axes 4, 5, and 6
...
nolimp(4, 5, 6) ;; unlimps axes 4, 5, and 6
Application Shell nolimp
RAPL-II Similar to NOLIMP.
See Also limp limps axes
Category Motion
obs_get
Description Gets point of observation.
Syntax command obs_get()
Example obs_get()
See Also obs_rel releases point of observation
Category System Process Control: Points of Control and Observation
obs_rel
Description Releases point of observation.
Syntax command obs_rel()
Example obs_rel()
See Also obs_get gets point of observation
Category System Process Control: Points of Control and Observation
onbutton
Description Waits for a button specified by b to be pressed. If the argument blink is True, the
corresponding light blinks until the button is pushed. After execution the light is
returned to the state it was in before the command call. The command utilizes
the panel_button_wait subprogram.
Syntax command onbutton(int b, int blink)
Parameter b specifies the button to be pressed button_enum type one of
B_F1 = 1
B_F2 = 2
B_PAUSE_CONT = 4
B_HOME = 8
blink TRUE to blink the light while waiting, otherwise FALSE
Failure < 0 Returns an error.
Example ;;Program to demonstrate Panel Button subroutines.
;;Move the robot to a position aa when the F1 button is pressed
;;While the robot is moving turn on the F1 light. Set status
;;window AA after move. Then, after F2 is pressed it moves to
;;second position, turns on the F2 light, sets the status window
;;to BB
main
teachable cloc aa, bb
panel_lights_set(0xf,0x0) ;; turn off the panel lights
online(ON)
;;Wait for button F1 to be pushed before moving to location AA
printf("Press F1 to move robot to AA/n")
loop
if(onbutton(B_F1, ON))
panel_light_set(B_F1, ON)
move(aa)
break
else
delay(250)
continue
end if
end loop
;;Finish move to location aa, Set AA in status window
finish()
panel_status(OxAA)
panel_light_set(B_F1,OFF) ;; turn off the F1 light
;;Wait for button F2 to be pushed before moving to location bb no
;;time out
printf("Press F2 to move to BB/n")
loop
if(panel_button_wait(B_F2, -1))
move(bb)
break
else
delay(250)
continue
end if
end loop
finish() ;;Set Status to BB when robot is in location BB
panel_status(0xBB)
panel_lights_set(0xff, 0x00) ;;Turn off lights
end main
See Also panel_button_wait
panel_button_set
Category Front Panel
online
Description Sets the online mode to one of the values: OFF, ON, WAIT, PROCEED, TRACK,
NOTRACK.
With OFF, there is only space in the queue for one motion command. The
command is taken from the queue to be processed, and must be taken out for the
next command to be put in. In effect, flow proceeds in a manner similar to having
a finish() command after each motion command.
With ON, there is space in the queue for 8 motion commands.
With WAIT, the queue fills up with motion commands. Commands are calculated
while execution of the motion waits. Execution begins when the queue is full or
PROCEED is encountered.
With PROCEED, the motions are executed. The robot moves through the
locations without stopping at each location.
Syntax command online( int online_flag )
Parameters online_flag
OFF
ON
WAIT
PROCEED
ENA_TRACK
DIS_TRACK
Failure < 0
Example online(ON) ;; turn mode on
online(WAIT) ;; wait while queue fills
move(a) ;;
move(b) ;; fill queue with these motions
move(c) ;;
move(d) ;;
online(PROCEED) ;; flush motion queue
RAPL-II Similar to ONLINE.
See Also finish finishes current arm motion command before next arm motion
gripfinish finishes current gripper motion command before next gripper
motion
robotisdone gets the robot done state for non-control processes
Category Motion
Robot Configuration
open
Description Opens an object in the file system, a file or device specified in name, with access
mode given in flags. At successful completion (a positive value), the command
returns the file descriptor fd, which is used to access the file throughout the
program. If there is a problem, the command returns a negative error code.
O_BINARY is the default mode. O_TEXT allows CROS to create DOS compatible
text file, ie., with CR-LF line terminations instead of CROS LF-only line
terminations. O_TEXT does not affect sockets.
An open() command with O_CREAT and O_EXCL on a file that already exist
returns an error, -EEXIST. This allows standard file locking to work.
Syntax command open( var int fd, var string[] name, o_flags flags, int
mode )
Parameters fd the file descriptor: an integer
name the file to be opened: a variable length string
flags flags, of type o_flags, one or more of:
with files O_RDONLY read only
O_WRONLY write only
O_RDWR read and write
O_NONBLOCK non-blocking mode
O_APPEND always append to EOF on writing
O_BINARY binary mode; all writes of \n get converted
to line feed
O_TEXT text mode; all writes of \n get converted to
carriage return and line feed \r\n
O_CREAT create file if it doesnt exist
O_TRUNC truncate file to 0 bytes
O_EXCL give error if file already exists
with sockets O_SERVER server
O_CLIENT client
The two flags, O_CLIENT and O_SERVER, can only be used for sockets and
they are mutually exclusive.
The other flags can only be used for files and can all be used together.
Examples:
O_RDONLY | O_NONBLOCK read only, non-blocking reads
O_CREATE | O_TRUNC | O_RDWR create a new file (or truncate an old one)
and open for reading and writing
O_APPEND | O_CREAT | O_WRONLY append to an existing file, or create a
new file if one doesn't exist, and write it
O_RDWR is the same as O_RDONLY | O_WRONLY
With any value for flags other than one including O_CREAT, opening a non-
existent file is an error.
If flags contains O_CREAT, then the file is created if it doesnt exist and is
given permissions specified in mode.
mode access mode, of type mode_flags, one or more of:
M_READ readable
M_WRITE writeable
M_EXEC executable
The modes limit the ways in which programs opening the file can access it. For
example, if mode is only M_READ, a program can read the file, but cannot
write to it. Modes may be combined with the bitwise OR operator, represented
by | (a single vertical bar/pipe), to form any desired combination.
M_READ
M_READ | M_EXEC
M_READ | M_WRITE
M_READ | M_WRITE | M_EXEC
Returns
>= 0 Success
-EAGAIN The system does not presently have the resources
needed to carry out this operation. For example,
there may be too many files open.
-EINVAL The flags are inconsistent or the name is invalid.
-EEXIST Tried to open a file with O_EXCL | O_CREAT, and
the file already existed.
-ENOENT Some component of the path did not exist, or we are
not O_CREATing and the file did not exist.
-EISDIR Tried to open a directory for writing.
-ENXIO Tried to open an unsupported device.
-ETXTBSY Tried to open an executing program for writing.
-EIO An I/O error occurred
-EBUSY
(sockets only)
Tried to open a socket as server, but a server had
already opened the socket. There can be at most 1
server.
-ENOSERV
(sockets only)
Tried to open a socket as client, but no server was
present.
Example int fd
...
open ( fd, filename.txt, O_RDONLY, 0 )
See Also close closes the file or device
chmod change the mode
write writes to the file
read reads from the file
send sends to the socket
rcv receives from the socket
chmod change the mode
opennp
open named pipe
Description Opens a named pipe in the Windows NT domain.
Servers must specify a pipe on the local machine.
The maximum number of named pipes that can be open at one time is 9.
Syntax command opennp( var int fd, string[] pipename, o_flags flags, int
mode, var int signal )
Parameters fd the file descriptor: an int
pipename the pipe name: a string of maximum length [128]
flags flags, of type o_flags, one or more of:
O_RDONLY read only
O_WRONLY write only
O_RDWR read and write
O_SERVER open as server
O_CLIENT open as client
modes access modes specific to named pipes, one or more of:
M_READ_MESSAGE readable
M_WRITE_MESSAGE writable
signal the signal to send when overlapped i/o is complete: an int
Failure < 0
Example opennp( pd, //./pipe/pipe_on_this_machine, O_SERVER|O_RDWR,
M_READ_MESSAGE|M_WRITE_MESSAGE, 13 )
opennp( NT_app_pipe, //lab/pipe/app2_pipe, O_SERVER|O_RDWR,
M_READ_MESSAGE|M_WRITE_MESSAGE, 22 )
See Also closenp closes a named pipe
Category Win 32
output
Alias output_set
Description Sets the single specified output channel to the specified state. The Boolean
parameter bypass is optional. If set TRUE the execution of the output command
bypasses the online motion queue.
Syntax command output( int channel, int state [, boolean bypass] )
Parameters
channel the GPIO channel: an int. Channels 1 to
16 correspond to actual GPIO output
points; channels 17 to 24 are virtual
outputs that act exactly like real outputs
but do not connect to a phyical signal. By
watching virtual outputs, a process can
synchronize itself to the motion queue.
state the state: an int, one of 0 -> off or 1 -> on
bypass True (1) -> execution bypasses the online
queue and is not synchronized to robot
motion
False (0) -> output execution is queued in
the motion queue. This is the default if
this argument is omitted.
Failure < 0
Example output(0, 0) ;; Turns off output 0 command is queued in the
;; online
motionoutput(0,1,True) ;; Turns on output 0 independent of the
;; online motion queue
output_set(1,0,False) ;; Turns off output 1- queued in the
;; online motion queue
RAPL-II Similar to OUTPUT, but OUTPUT used a positive or negative sign for the state.
See Also outputs sets the entire bank of output channels to states
output_pulse sets a channel to one state, waits, then sets to opposite state
input queries an input channel for its state
output_get
Description Gets the current state of the specified output channel.
Syntax func output_get( int channel )
Parameters There is one parameter:
channel the GPIO channel : an int. Channels 1 to 16 correspond
to actual GPIO output points; channels 17 to 24 are
virtual outputs that act exactly like real outputs but
do not connect to a phyical signal. By watching virtual
outputs, a process can synchronize itself to the motion
queue.

the state: an int, one of:
0 = off
1 = on
Failure < 0
Example int state
int channel
...
state = output_get(channel)
Result state = 1 if output is on, state = 0 if output is off
See Also output sets an output channel to a state
output_pulse sets and reverses an output for its state
input queries an input channel for its state
output_pulse
Description Sets the specified output channel to the specified state, waits 50 milliseconds and
then sets the channel to the opposite state. The Boolean parameter bypass is
optional. If set TRUE the execution of the output command bypasses the online
motion queue.
Outputs can be pulsed on or pulsed off.
If the initial state of the output is different from the first state of this command,
the output is set to that first state and then set to the opposite (the outputs
initial) state. If the initial state of the output is the same as the first state of this
command, the setting of the first state makes no change and the output is then
set to the opposite state.
Syntax command output_pulse( int channel, int state[, boolean bypass])
Parameters channel the GPIO channel: an int
state the state: an int, one of:
0 off
1 on
bypass boolean either
TRUE (1) execution bypasses the online queue
FALSE (0) default option - output execution is queued
Failure < 0
Example int state
int channel
...
state = output_pulse(channel, state, 1)
Result output defined by int channel is pulsed, the command is not queued
outputs sets the entire bank of output channels to states
input queries the state of an input channel
output_set
Alias output
Syntax command output_set( int channel, int state [, . . .] )
outputs
Alias outputs_set
Description Sets the entire bank of output channels to the specified states with a bitmask.
The Boolean parameter bypass is optional. If set TRUE the execution of the
output command bypasses the online motion queue.
Syntax command outputs(int fieldstate, int mask[, boolean bypass] )
Parameters There are three parameters, one of which is optional:
fieldstate a bit mapped state of the outputs
mask the output state of each bit will only be updated by the
new_val if the corresponding mask bit is high.
bypass True (1) -> execution bypasses the online queue and is
not synchronized to robot motion
False (0) -> output execution is queued in the motion
queue. This is the default if this argument is omitted.
Failure < 0
Example
int mask = 0xFFFF ;;bit mask all 1s
int state = 0
...
outputs(state, mask, 0)
Result All outputs are set low, the command is queued in the online
motion queue
inputs queries the entire bank of input channels for their states
outputs_get
Description Gets the current state of all the output channels.
Syntax func outputs_get()
Parameters none
the state: an int, which is a bit map of the channel output states:
0 = off
1 = on
Failure < 0
Example int state ;;present outputs
int state2 ;;desired outputs
int channel = 0xffff ;; selects all outputs (1111111111111111)
state = outputs_get()
if state == state2 ;;what is wanted
else ;; set outputs to the state specified in state2
outputs_set( channel,state2)
end if
Result Set outputs to the state specified in state2
See Also outputs sets the entire bank of output channels to states
inputs queries the state of all input channels
outputs_set
Alias outputs
Syntax command outputs_set( int fieldstate, int mask[, boolean bypass] )
panel_button
Description Determines the status of the button specified by argument b. The return will be
0, unless the button is pressed. While the button is pressed the returned value
is TRUE.
Syntax func int panel_button(button_enum b)
Parameter b button_enum type -one of:
B_F1 = 1
B_F2 = 2
B_PAUSE_CONT = 4
B_HOME = 8
Returns Success >= 0 Returns TRUE if the button specified is pressed.
Failure < 0 Error descriptor
Example printf(Press F1 to move the robot)
loop
t=panel_button(B_F1)
if t
move(position)
break
else
delay(250)
continue
end if
end loop
Refer also to the onbutton command description for further example
of the panel button subprograms.
See Also panel_buttons
on_button
panel_button_wait
panel_button_wait
Description Command waits for a particular button to be pressed. If the time specified by the
timeout (seconds) argument is exceed an error descriptor is returned.
Syntax command panel_button_wait(button_enum b, int timeout)
Parameter b button_enum type one of:
B_F1 = 1
B_F2 = 2
B_PAUSE_CONT = 4
B_HOME = 8
timeout waiting time in seconds, -1 (TM_FOREVER) means no time limit
Failure < 0 ETIMEOUT if waiting time is exceed
Example ;;Wait for button F2 to be pressed then move
loop
if(panel_button_wait(B_F2, -1))
move(bb)
break
else
delay(250)
continue
end if
end loop
Refer to the onbutton command description for an example of the
panel button subprograms
See Also onbutton
panel_button
panel_buttons
panel_buttons
Description Gets the status of the panel buttons. The status is returned as a bit vector. The
bits which are high (1) indicate which buttons are pressed. The value returned is
zero if no buttons are pressed. If the value 3 (0...0011) is returned then panel
buttons F1 and F2 are pressed.
Syntax func int panel_buttons()
Returns Success >= 0 Returns an integer high bits indicate which buttons were pressed.
Failure < 0 Returns an error descriptor
Example printf(Press F1 and F2 to move the robot)
loop
t=panel_buttons()
if t ==3 ;;F1 and F2 must be pressed together
move(position)
break
else
delay(250)
continue
end if
end loop
Also refer to the onbutton command description for further example
of the panel button subprograms
Result When buttons F1 and F2 are both pressed at the same time the robot
will move.
See Also panel_buttons
on_button
panel_button_wait
panel_light_get
Description The function returns the status of the front panel light specified. Returns TRUE if
the light is on FALSE if it is off.
Syntax func int panel_light_get(button_enum b)
Parameter b Specifies the light to check, button_enum type one of:
B_F1 = 1
B_F2 = 2
B_PAUSE_CONT = 4
B_HOME = 8
Returns Success >= 0 Returns ON if the light specified if the light is on.
Failure < Error descriptor
Example int light_stat
...
;;Get status of the HOME light
light_stat = panel_light_get(B_HOME)
Refer to the onbutton command description for an example of the panel button
subprograms
See Also panel_lights_get
panel_light_set
panel_lights_set
panel_light_set
Description The command causes the light specified with the button_enum type to be set to
the status specified by the int on. Use this command to link light status to
conditions in robot applications.
Syntax command panel_light_set(button_enum b, int on)
Parameter button Refer to the Front Panel section for the button_enum definitions
on If ON (ON = 1) turns light on, if OFF (OFF = 0) sets light off
Failure < 0
Example panel_light_set(B_F1,OFF) ;; turn off the F1 light
front panel subprograms.
See Also panel_light_get
panel_lights_get
panel_lights_set
panel_lights_get
Description Returns the status of the four panel lights in bit vector format. If the light is ON
the corresponding bit in the return integer is high. For example if the return
value is 10 (0.. 01010), the F2 and HOME lights are ON.
Syntax func int panel_lights_get()
Returns Success >= 0 An integer with high bits corresponding to the ON lights.
Failure < 0 error descriptor
Example t=panel_lights_get() ;; returns the lights that are on
if t ;; at least on light is ON
panel_lights_set(0xff, 0x00) ;;turn lights off
end if
Also refer to the onbutton command description for a further
example of the front panel subprograms.
See Also panel_light_get
panel_light_set
panel_light_set
panel_lights_set
Description Set the panel lights selected by the argument mask to the corresponding values
as specified by the argument value.
Syntax command panel_lights_set(int mask, int value)
Parameter mask integer used for selecting the lamps. For each high bit (1) the
corresponding light is selected. For example mask = 9 (0...01001) the
F1 and Home lights are selected.
value Specifies the values for the selected lights. For example 0 sets all the
selected lights to OFF, 9 sets the F1 and HOME lights to ON.
Failure < 0 Returns an error descriptor
Example panel_status(0xBB)
panel_lights_set(0xff, 0x00) ;;Turn off lights
front panel subprograms.
See Also panel_lights_get
panel_light_get
panel_light_set
panel_status
Description Sets the front panel status window to display the argument value. Note the
command is intended to test the function of the window. Changing the display
does not change the actual system status.
Syntax command panel_status(int value)
Parameter value the value to be displayed in the status window. The window can
display 2 hexadecimal integers, therefore only the 8 LS bits are
meaningful in the argument value.
Failure < 0
Example int i
for i=0 to 255
delay(100) ;;short delay
panel_status(i) ;;display window combinations in sequence
end for
Also refer to the onbutton command description for an example of the front panel
subprograms.
pdp_get
Description The function gets the private data area pointer for the current thread.
Syntax func void@ pdp_get()
Parameters no parameters
Returns Success >= 0 Returns void pointer to the data area for current thread.
Failure < 0
Example void@ ptr
if !(ptr=pdp_get())
;;error in function call
else
;;program commands
end if
Category Memory
pdp_set
Description A subroutine to set the private area memory for the current thread
Syntax sub pdp_set(void@ ptr)
Parameters ptr is a void ptr which points to the private data area for the current thread.
Returns subroutines do not return a value
Example void@ ptr
pdp_set(ptr)
Category Memory
pendant_bell
Description The serial teach pendant has a small speaker that may be used to signal events.
There are three sounds which can be sent to the speaker. The sound is specified
by the type pendant_bell_t argument passed in the command call with.
Library stp
Syntax export command pendant_bell(pendant_bell_t bell_type)
Parameter The pendant_bell_t bell_type has the following definition:
typedef pendant_bell_t enum
pendant_bell_short = 1,
pendant_bell_long,
pendant_bell_alert ;; stuttering beep
end enum
Failure < 0
Example ...
stp:pendant_bell(pendant_bell_alert)
...
RAPL-II Same as PRINTF 0,\e[0q or \e[1q or \e[2q or \e[3q
Category Pendant
pendant_chr_get
Description Reads a character from the pendant. This command does not wait until a return
is entered and thus yields a null string if data is not ready.
Library stp
Syntax export command pendant_chr_get(var string[] buffer)
Parameter buffer the character is stored in the buffer string
Returns Success >= 0 buffer is packed with character
Failure < 0
Example stp:pendant_chr_get(answer)
Result Reads character at teach pendant
RAPL-II Same as INPUT <string_number(&1-4)>,<Device_zero(0)>
Category Pendant
pendant_close
Description Close the pendant in preparation for shutting down a program or the controller.
The command disables the liveman switch.
Library stp
Syntax export command pendant_close()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example stp:pendant_close()
RAPL-II Same as PENDANT OFF
See Also shutdown
Category Pendant
pendant_cursor_pos_set
Description Move the cursor to the position specified by the row and column arguments. If
the position specified is not a valid position an error is returned. The pendant
screen has 4 rows and 18 columns.
Library stp
Syntax export command pendant_cursor_pos_set(int row, int column)
Parameter row1-4 are valid rows
column 1-18 are valid columns
Failure < 0
Example ...
stp:pendant_cursor_pos_set(4,1) ;;set the cursor to the
;;bottom row first column
...
RAPL-II Same as PRINTF 0,\e[row_num; colum_num
See Also pendant_home
pendant_home_clear
Category Pendant
pendant_cursor_set
Description Enables or disables the pendant cursor, depending on the argument passed. A
disabled cursor is not visible on the pendant screen. The enabled cursors, default
setting, causes the cursor to blink on the screen.
Library stp
Syntax export command pendant_cursor_set(Boolean new_cursor)
Parameter new_cursor 1 enabled
new_cursor 0 disabled
Failure < 0
Example ...
pendant_cursor_set( 1 )
...
Category Pendant
pendant_flush
Description Flushes any 'junk' characters in the incoming buffer.
Library stp
Syntax export command pendant_flush()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example ...
stp:pendant_flush()
stp:pendant_close()
...
Result Flushes
See Also pendant_chr_get
pendant_close
Category Pendant
pendant_home
Description Moves the pendant cursor to the top left side of the pendant screen, row 1,
column 1. The home position.
Library stp
Syntax export command pendant_home()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example ...
stp:pendant_home()
...
Category Pendant
pendant_home_clear
Description Moves the pendant screen cursor to the home position and clears the screen.
Library stp
Syntax command pendant_home_clear()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example ...
stp:pendant_home_clear()
...
RAPL-II Same as PRINTF 0,\e[1;1f\e[1s
See Also pendant_home
Category Pendant
pendant_open
Description Prepare the pendant for access and initialize it to defaults.
Library stp
Syntax command pendant_open()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example pendant_open()
RAPL-II Same as PENDANT ON
See Also startup
Category Pendant
pendant_write
Description Writes a string to the pendant. The string can include standard ansi escape
codes to format the display on the screen. The pendant_write command calls the
writes command from the File and Device Input and Output category.
Library stp
Syntax stp:export command pendant_write(var string[] buffer)
Parameter buffer the text to be displayed on the pendant screen
Failure < 0
Example ...
pendant_write(. . .)
...
RAPL-II Same as PRINTF Device_0, Text
See Also writes
Category Pendant
pipe
Description Creates a single stream pipe between two file descriptors. In a pipe, data can
flow only in one direction. Calling pipe() creates a file descriptor rd_fd that is
mode RD_ONLY and another file descriptor wr_fd that is mode WR_ONLY.
Closing the write end is the only way of sending an EOF indication to the read
end. Also, writing to the write end of a pipe whose read end is closed results in a
SIGPIPE being sent to the writer.
Generally, pipe() is called prior to a split, and then the pipe is used between
parent and child communication. The parent then closes either the write or the
read descriptor, depending on the direction of flow wanted, and the child closes
the remaining descriptor.
Syntax command pipe( var int rd_fd, var int wr_fd )
Parameter rd_fd an int- file descriptor for the read end of the pipe
wr_fd an int- file descriptor for the write end of the pipe
Returns
>= 0 Success
-EAGAIN The system does not have sufficient resources to carry
out this operation at this time.
Example main
int ps_id,i,status
int fd_pipe_rd, fd_pipe_wr
pipe (fd_pipe_rd, fd_pipe_wr) ;; pipe file is opened in
;; blocking mode for reads
ps_id = split()
if ps_id == 0
close (fd_pipe_wr) ;; child will read
;;data
for i = 1 to 5
read (fd_pipe_rd,&i,1) ;; if data is not available
;; the read will be blocked
printf ("\nchild read - {}",i)
end for
close (fd_pipe_rd)
else
close (fd_pipe_rd) ;; parent will write
;; data
for i=1 to 5
write (fd_pipe_wr,&i, 1)
delay (500)
end for
close (fd_pipe_wr)
waitpid (ps_id,&status,0) ;; wait for child to
;; complete
end if
printf ("\n")
end main
Result child read - 1
child read - 2
child read - 3
child read - 4
child read - 5
Category File and Device System Management:
pitch
Alias jog_t ...
alias same as
pitch jog_t(TOOL_PITCH, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, rotates around the orientation axis, the Y axis, by
the specified number of degrees.
Motion axis
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
This command, pitch(), is joint-interpolated. The end position is determined and
the tool travels to it as a result of various joint motions. The start point and end
point for the tool centre point are the same (no change in distance along the axis
or angle between the axis and the tool), but the start position and end position of
the tool are different by the amount of rotation.
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see pitchs().
Syntax command pitch( float distance )
Parameter distance the amount of rotation in degrees: a float
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example pitch(22.5)
pitch(-90)
Application Shell Same as pitch.
RAPL-II No equivalent. In RAPL-II, PITCH performed a different motion. See yrot.
See Also pitchs moves around the tool orientation axis, but in straight line motion
roll moves around the tool approach/depart axis, joint-interpolated
yaw moves around the tool normal axis, joint-interpolated
Category Motion
pitchs
Alias jog_ts ...
alias same as
pitchs jog_ts(TOOL_PITCH, ...
)
Description In the tool frame of reference, rotates around the orientation axis, the Y axis, by
the specified number of degrees.
Motion axis
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
This command, pitchs(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight-line) motion. The tool
centre point stays on the axis, in the same place, while the tool rotates around
the axis.
For joint-interpolated motion, see pitch().
Syntax command pitchs( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example pitchs(22.5)
pitchs(-90)
Application Shell Same as pitchs.
RAPL-II No equivalent. In RAPL-II, PITCH performed a different motion. See yrots.
See Also pitch moves around the tool orientation axis, but joint-interpolated
rolls moves around the tool approach/depart axis in straight line motion
yaws moves around the tool normal axis in straight line motion
Category Motion
pos_axis_set
Description Sets a specified axis to a specified position. Similar to zero(), but with a non-zero
value.
Syntax command pos_axis_set( int axis, int pos )
Parameter axis the axis ... : an int
pos motor pulse count ... : an int
Failure < 0
Example int pulses
int axis
...
pos_axis_set(axis, pulses)
Result Moves the joint axis by pulses pulse counts in the positive
direction
See Also pos_get
pos_get
Description Gets the location information from the position registers.
Syntax command pos_get(position_t postype, var ploc position )
Parameter postype the type of robot position:
POSITION_ACTUAL the actual robot position
POSITION_COMMANDED the commanded robot position
POSITION_ENDPOINT the end-point robot position
POSITION_HOLD the hold robot position
position: the position of the robot: a ploc
Returns Success > 0, position is packed with the precision location
Failure < 0
Example int test
ploc place
...
test = pos_get(POSITION_ACTUAL, place) ;; use test for error check
RAPL-II Similar to:
W0, W1 pos_get(POSITION_COMMANDED)
W2, W3 pos_get(POSITION_ACTUAL)
W4 pos_get(POSITION_ENDPOINT)
ACTUAL pos_get(POSITION_ACTUAL)
except that RAPL-II generated output and ACTUAL also gave cartesian.
See Also here stores the current location in a location variable
pos_set sets the position registers of the robot
Calibration
pos_set
Description Loads the robot position registrers with location or pose inforamtion. Similar to
zero(), but with a non-zero value. Does not move the arm.
Syntax command pos_set( ploc pos )
Parameter pos : a ploc
Failure < 0
Example ...
teachable ploc there
...
pos_set(there)
Result Sets all axes to the position specified by the teachable ploc
there.
RAPL-II Same as @LOCATE
See Also pos_get
Calibration
pow
Description Calculates a value raised to a power. Takes a non-negative value and a non-
negative power.
Syntax func float pow( float a, float b )
Arguments a the value
b the power
Returns Success >= 0. The value a raised to the power b.
Failure < 0
Example float a = 2.5, b = 3.0
float y
y = pow( a, b )
Result 15.625
RAPL-II POW
See Also ln calculates the natural logarithm
log calculates the common (base 10) logarithm
sqrt calculates the square root
Category Math
print
print
Description Writes the specified data to standard output device, normally the terminal
screen. Two types of arguments can be given in the variable argument list:
constants and variables. The constants are printed exactly as they are given.
The variable's value is what is copied to the output device. The method used in
printing is to print the arguments in the exact order that they were given.
Syntax command print ( ... )
Returns
>= 0 Success.
Example count_cycle = 1048
print ( "Robot has worked ",count_cycle," cycles.\n" )
Result Robot has worked 1048 cycles.
displayed at the terminal screen and the cursor advanced to a newline.
See Also printf format print command to the standard output
printf
print formatted
Description Converts and writes output to the standard output device, normally the terminal
screen, under the control of a specified format fmt.
Format specifications are detailed in the Formatted Output section of File Input
and Output
Syntax command printf( var string[] fmt, ... )
Format Specifiers The format string may consist of two different objects, normal characters, which
{ [ flags ] [ field width ] [ .precision ] [ e|E|f|g|G|x|X |] }
Flags
leading zeros.
Field width
.precision
The precision number specifies the number of characters to be printed in a
string, the number of significant digits in a float, or the maximum number of
digits to be printed in an integer.
e or E
[For floating point numbers only]
This flag indicates that a floating point number should be printed in exponential
notation, which looks like:
[-]d.dddddde+dd (e format)
or [-]d.ddddddE+dd (E format)
The .precision refers to the number of digits after the decimal point, and defaults
to 6 if it is omitted.
f
[For floating point numbers only]
This flag indicates that a floating point number should be printed in ordinary
floating point notation, which looks like:
[-]d.dddddd
The .precision refers to the number of digits after the decimal point, and defaults
to 6 if it is omitted.
g or G
[For floating point numbers only. This is the default format for floating point.]
This flag indicates that a floating point number should be printed either in f or
e|E format, whichever is more compact. (e|E type is used if the exponent is less
than 4 or the exponent is >= the .precision.) Note that for this mode only, the
.precision indicates the number of significant digits to be printed, not the
number of digits after the decimal point.
x or X
should be printed in hexadecimal (base 16)or not. The lowercase x specifies
lowercase letters (abcdef) are to be used in the hexadecimal display and the
uppercase X specifies uppercase letters (ABCDEF).
A character sequence of {{ means to print the single { (opening brace) character.
Returns
>= 0 Success.
-EINVAL The arguments were invalid.
Example float a = 1.23, b = 12.345, c = 1.234
float d = 98.7, e = -987654.3210, f = 9876.5
printf(a = {5.2}, b = {+08.3}, c = {-8.3} \n, a, b, c)
printf(d = {5.2}, e = {+08.3}, f = {-8.3} \n, d, e, f)
Result a = 1.2, b = +00012.3, c = 1.23
d = 99, e = -9.88e+005, f = 9.88e+003 *
rad
Description Converts degrees to radians.
Syntax func float rad( float x )
Returns The angle converted to radians.
float y
y = rad( x )
Result 0.785398
RAPL-II RAD
See Also deg converts radians to degrees
Category Math
rand
Description A function for generating random numbers (integers). The function uses a seed
value which can be set using the rand_next function.
Syntax func int rand()
Returns Returns a random number.
Example int r =5
int seed = 13
int[] random
int j
...
srand(int seed) ;; sets the seed value rand_next = 13
...
;; generate a 5 element array of random
;; numbers
for j = 1 to r
random[j-1] = rand()
end for
Result A 5 element array of random number integers.
See Also rand_in generates random numbers within a specified range
srand sets the random generator seed value
Category Math
rand_in
Description A function for generating random numbers (integers) which fall in the range
specified. The function uses a seed value which can be set using the rand_next
function.
Syntax func int rand_in(int min, int max)
Parameters min, max are integer values which define the range of random numbers returned.
Returns Returns a random number in the range [min..max].
Example int r =5
int seed = 13
int min = {expression}
int max = {expression}
int[] random(min max)
int j
...
;;generate a 5 element array of random numbers
for j = 1 to r
random[j-1] = rand_in(min, max)
end for
Result A 5 element array of random number integers with values between
min and max. .
See Also rand generates random numbers
srand sets the random generator seed value
Category Math
rcv
Description Receives words from a socket. If the rcv() command succeeds, it returns the
(positive) number of words (4 byte entities) read. This may be less than nwords,
the length of the receive buffer. If the rcv() command fails, it returns a negative
error code. If the timeout is specified, rcv() will try to read for timeout
milliseconds before returning. Words that are read are placed into buf, which
must be at least of size nwords. If ppid is a NULL pointer, the receive can be from
any process. If ppid is not a NULL pointer, the value of the variable being pointed
to is the pid of the process from which you are trying to receive. If that ppid@ is
0, it receives from any process and returns the pid of that process.
If a server tries to receive from a client with a timeout of TM_NOWAIT and the
client is non-existent, the error code -ENOCLIENT is returned.
rcv() is similar to read() which is used for all other (non-socket) entities.
Syntax command rcv(int fd, void @buf, int nwords, int timeout, int@
ppid)
Parameters
fd The file descriptor referring to the open socket.
buf Points to where to store the received data.
nwords The number of word to receive, maximum. Note
that it is not an error for the sending process to
send fewer than nwords words.
timeout How long to wait for the transaction, in
milliseconds. There are two special values,
TM_NOWAIT (dont wait at all) and TM_FOREVER
(wait forever.)
ppid If this is NULL, then we are trying to rcv() from any
other process. If non-NULL, then this is a pointer
to an integer in which the desired process id (pid)
of the sender is stored (with 0 meaning any). On
success, rcv() stores the actual sending process id
in ppid@.
Returns
>= 0 Success. Returns the number of words received.
-EINVAL The arguments were invalid (eg., fd was ve)
-EBADF The file descriptor does not correspond to an open
object.
-ENOTSOCK The object open on fd is not a socket.
-EAGAIN Too large a receive was attempted; also returned
when a TM_NOWAIT rcv() does not immediately
succeed.
-ETIMEOUT The timeout expired.
-EINTR The operation was interrupted by a signal.
-ENOSERV
(client only)
There is no server serving this socket.
-ENOCLIENT There is no client matching the parameters of the
(server only) rcv().
Example int sock_fd
string[30] mbuf
...
;; Open a socket for a client.
open (sock_fd, /mydev, O_CLIENT, 0)
...
;; Receive message from the socket.
rcv ( sock_fd, &mbuf, sizeof(mbuf), TM_FOREVER, NULL )
See Also send sends words to a socket
open opens a socket and other entities
read
Description Attempts to read nwords from the file descriptor fd and store the result in buf. If
the number of words specified in nwords cannot be read the command will
perform a blocking read, unless the file descriptor was opened with mode
O_NONBLOCK. After reading, the file position is moved by the number of words
read. This provides a sequential move through the file.
The read() command reads 4-byte words (32 bits). The reads() command reads
characters (8 bits).
Similar to rcv() which is used for sockets.
Syntax command read( int fd, void@ buf, int nwords )
Parameters fd the open file descriptor
buf a pointer to where to store the read data
nwords the number of 4-byte words to be read: an int
Returns
> 0 Success; the number of words actually read.
0 The end of file was encountered.
-EACCESS The file is not open for reading.
-ESPIPE Attempted to read a socket.
-EAGAIN (nonblocking I/O) No bytes were ready for reading.
Example int fd
int[10] buf
...
read ( fd, buf, sizeof(buf) )
Example int a ;; reads four characters from keyboard
read ( stdin, &a, 1 ) ;; and stores them as an int
print ( a,\n ) ;; returns only when four characters are
entered
RAPL-II GETCH
See Also reads reads a string from a file
readsa reads a string from a file and appends it to a string
write writes to a file
writes writes a string to a file
open opens a file to read, write, etc.
readdir
Description Reads a directory entry and stores the structure in buf. Reading from the
directory automatically increments the file pointer for fd.
Syntax command readdir( int fd, var c_dirent buf )
Parameters buf a c_dirent structure with the following fields:
string[32] de_name
int de_type
int de_links
mode_flags de_mode
int de_size
int de_mtime
int de_dev
int de_ident
fd The file descriptor to read from.
Returns
1 Success.
0 The end of the directory was encountered.
-ENOTDIR fd does not correspond to an open directory.
Example string[] dir = /temp
c_dirent buf
int fd
...
open ( fd, dir, O_RDONLY, 0 )
...
result = readdir( fd, buf )
while result > 0
print ( buf.de_name,\n )
result = readdir( fd, buf )
end while
readline
Description Interactively reads a line of up to maxlen characters from stdin to s and echos to
stdout. The line terminator can be either a carriage return or a line feed. Returns
the number of characters actually read including the terminator. A value of 0
means EOF.
Syntax command readline ( var string[] s, int maxlen )
Parameters s Where to store the read data
maxlen The maximum number of characters to read.
Returns
Example int maxlen
string[32] safe = myfile.txt
...
readline ( safe, maxlen)
Results Reads maxlen characters from the standard input and writes them
to myfile.txt, and to stout.
See Also reads
read
reads
Description Reads a string from a file of at most maxlen characters. This is different from the
read command in that a string is used, and the length of the string is updated.
The number of characters read is returned, or a negative error code if the read
fails.
The reads() command reads characters (8 bits). The read() command reads 4-byte
words (32 bits).
Syntax command reads( int fd, var string[] s, int maxlen )
Parameters
s Where to store the read data.
Returns
Example string[20] buf
int fd
open ( fd, /temp/reads_test, O_RDONLY, 0 )
reads ( fd, buf, 20 )
print ( buf,\n )
Example string[1] a ;; reads a string of 1 character
reads ( stdin, a, 1 ) ;; when a key is pressed, the command
returns
print ( a,\n ) ;; useful for keyboard input
See Also read read words (4 byte units) from a file
readsa read a string from a file and append it to a string
readsa
Description Reads a string (of at most maxlen characters) from a file, and appends it on the
end of string s.
Syntax command readsa(int fd, var string[] s, int maxlen)
Parameters
s Where to store the read data.
Returns
Example
string[MAXLEN] results
int fd
int length, check
open(fd, mydirectory\\result.txt, O_READ,0)
check = readsa(fd, results, length)
Result check is equal to the numbercharacters appended to string
results
See Also read read words (4 byte units) from a file
reads read a string from a file
ready
Description Moves the arm to the READY position.
Syntax command ready()
Failure < 0
Example if (ready() >= 0)
move (a)
end if
RAPL-II Similar to READY.
See Also home homes the axes
Motion
rmdir
Description Deletes an empty directory.
Syntax command rmdir( var string[] path )
Parameters path full path name of the directory to delete
Failure < 0
-ENOTDIR the path is not a directory
-EBUSY the directory is busy
-ENOTEMPTY the directory is not empty
Example string[20] path =/mydirectory
...
rmdir(path)
Result The directory /mydirectory is deleted
See Also mknod
mkdir
robot_abort
Description Stops current motion and discards the contents of the motion queue.
robot_abort() operates by locating the pid of the server (by a zero-length rcv() on
the /dev/robot socket) and sending the server a SIGABRT. If the rcv() fails, then
robot_abort() opens /dev/estop, which forces arm power off.
Syntax command robot_abort()
Parameter empty
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example ...
robot_abort()
. .
Category Motion
robot_cfg_save
Description Re-writes the /conf/robot.cfg file with the current robot configuration
information, which includes:
1. whether or not the robot has a track
2. the number of axes on the controller
3. the tool transform
4. the base offset
5. the positive and negative track travel limits
6. the gripper type
7. the robot units (metric or English)
It must be pointed out that changing one of these parameters in your program
does not change the default for when the system is rebooted; you must perform a
robot_cfg_save() to make the changes permanent.
Syntax command robot_cfg_save()
Example ;; permanently set a tool transform:
tool_set(cloc{0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0})
robot_cfg_save()
See Also tool_set(), base_set(), griptype_set()
/diag/setup (system shell command)
Category Motion
robot_error_get
Description Returns the current (latest) error state of the robot.
Syntax command robot_error_get( var int[5] error )
Parameter error * : an array of up to 5 ints
Failure < 0
System Process Control: Single and Multiple Processes
robot_flag_enable
Description Enables flags.
Syntax command robot_flag_enable( enable_flag_t flag, int state )
Parameter flag a variable of the enumerated type enable_flag_t an
state an int
flag is packed with one of :
EFLAG_INVALID 0
EFLAG_TRAPEZOID 1
EFLAG_TRIGGER 2
Failure < 0
robot_info
Description Returns robot info in the variables homed, and done whether the robot is
done moving and homed.
Syntax command robot_info(var int homed, var int done)
Parameter homed packed with the homed status
done packed with the robot motion status
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example int homed, done
robot_info(homed, done)
if (homed != 0 && done != 0)
printf(robot is homed and not moving\n)
else
if (done ==0)
printf(robot in motion \n)
end if
if (homed == 0)
printf(robot is not homed\n)
end if
end if
Result Reports if the robot is homed and if it is in motion
See Also server_info
robotisfinished
Motion
robot_mode_get
Description Gets the current mode of motion and packs it into a variable of an enum type.
Syntax command robot_mode_get( var motion_mode_t mmode )
Parameters mmode the variable for mode information: a motion_mode_t enumerated type
Returns Success >= 0,
mmode is packed with one of:
MODE_NONE
MODE_ONLINE
Failure < 0
Example int retval
motion_mode_t current_mode
...
online(ON)
retval = robot_mode_get(current_mode)
print(retval is , retval, \n)
if(current_mode == MODE ONLINE)
print(Current mode is online\n)
else
print(Current mode is none\n)
end if
Result retval is 0
current_mode is online
robot_move
Description Allow the user to move the robot using the pendant
Library stp
Syntax export command robot_move()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example string[10] name = my_app_23
stp:startup
...
stp:robot_move() stp:app_close()
...
stp:app_close()
...
Category Pendant
robot_odo
Description Gets the current value of the robot arm power odometer, which indicates the
number of seconds that arm power has been turned on for.
Syntax command robot_odo(var int seconds)
Returns Success >= 0; seconds gets the odometer value.
Example int otime
...
robot_odo(otime)
printf(The robot arm power has been on for {} seconds.\n, otime)
See Also odometer (system shell command)
Status
robot_servo_stat
Description Returns the status of the F3 servo controllers.
Syntax command robot_servo_stat( var int netstat, var int[8] axisstat )
Parameter netstat an int
axisstat an int
Failure < 0
robot_type_get
Description Gets the current robot code for the installed kinematics.
Syntax func int robot_type_get()
Returns Success >= 0. Returns the robot code for the kinematics.
Example robot_code = getmachtype()
See Also setmachtype sets the robot code for the kinematics
robotisdone
Description Returns the current robot done state. The function checks all transform axes for
a done state and returns the logical AND of these states. All transform axes must
be done for this routine to return TRUE (>0). It is different from finish because it
does not require point of control and so does not force the robot to stop before
continuing. It is also a non-blocking operation. It is best used to synchronize
other (non-controlling) processes to robot motion.
Syntax func int robotisdone()
Returns Success
> 0 all axes of arm are done
= 0 at least one axis is not done
Failure < 0
Example done_state = robotisdone()
RAPL-II FINISH
See Also robotisfinished
finish allows robot motions to catch up to process
Category Motion
System Process Control: Single and Multiple Processes
robotisfinished
Description The robotisfinished function uses the same finish service as the finish()
command except now a mode flag is passed into the service. The finish_mode_t is
a global enum. The function returns 1, if the robot is finished, 0 if not finished
and a error code if error occurs.
Syntax func int robotisfinished()
Parameter no parameter is required
Returns Success >= 0 1 robot is finished move
0 robot is not finished move
Failure < 0 error code
Example ;; Use command to synchronize robot motion
.define PALLET_NUM 25
teachable ploc[10] pallet
teachable ploc safe_pallet
int i
for i = 0 to PALLET_NUM
move(pallet[i])
loop
if robotisfinished()
grip_close(50)
else
msleep(250)
end if
end loop
move (safe_pallet)
...
end for
Result Program waits until robot is at pallet location before closing
gripper
RAPL-II Similar to FINISH
See Also robotisdone
finish
Category Status
robotishomed
Description Returns the current robot home state. This function checks all transform axes
for a home state and returns the logical AND of these states. All transform axes
must be homed for this routine to return TRUE (>0)
Syntax func int robotishomed()
Returns Success
> 0 all axes of arm are homed
= 0 at least one axis is not homed
Failure < 0
Example home_state = robotishomed()
if (home_state)
:;; robot is homed continue
else
;;home the robot
home(i,2,3,4,5,6)
end if
See Also calibrate calibrates the robot
home homes the robot
Category Home
robotislistening
Description A function to determine if the robot server is responding to queries. The function
returns TRUE if the robot responds to the arm power query. If no response, it
returns FALSE.
Syntax funct int robotislistening()
Returns Success >= 0 TRUE or FALSE
Failure < 0 Does not return a negative error code.
Example if robotislistening()
printf("Robot is ready begin")
;; program here
else
printf("Robot is not listening")
end if
See Also robotisfinished
robotishomed
Status
robotispowered
Description Returns the current state of the robot arm power. Useful for checking arm power
status before proceeding to further program execution.
Syntax func int robotispowered()
Returns Success
> 0 arm power is ON
= 0 arm power is OFF
Failure < 0
Example if robotispowered() == 0
print "Waiting for arm power.\nTurn on arm power.\n"
do
msleep 1000
until robotispowered() > 0
end if
RAPL-II Similar to ONPOWER.
Category Status
roll
Alias jog_t ...
alias same as
roll jog_t(TOOL_ROLL, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, rotates around the approach/depart axis, by the
specified number of degrees.
motion axis
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
This command, roll(), is joint-interpolated. The end position is determined and
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see rolls().
Syntax command roll( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example roll(11.25)
roll(-45)
Application Shell Same as roll
RAPL-II No equivalent. In RAPL-II, ROLL performed a different motion. See xrot.
See Also rolls moves around the tool approach/depart axis,
but in straight line motion
pitch moves around the tool orientation axis
yaw moves around the tool normal axis
Category Motion
rolls
Alias jog_ts ...
alias same as
rolls jog_ts(TOOL_ROLL, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, rotates around the approach/depart axis, by the
specified number of degrees.
motion axis
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
This command, rolls(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight-line) motion. The tool
the axis.
For joint-interpolated motion, see roll().
Syntax command rolls( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example rolls(45)
rolls(-10.5)
Application Shell Same as rolls.
RAPL-II No equivalent. In RAPL-II, ROLL performed a different motion. See xrots.
See Also roll moves around the tool approach/depart axis, but joint-interpolated
pitchs moves around the tool orientation axis in straight line motion
yaws moves around the tool normal axis in straight line motion
Category Motion
rotacc_get
Description Returns the value of the maximum rotational acceleration parameter. This
parameter is used to regulate rotational accelerations when performing straight-
line motions in online mode and when using the teach pendant. Units are in
degrees/second/second.
Syntax command rotacc_get(var float rotaccel)
Parameter rotaccel a float into which the current rotational acceleration
value is placed
Failure < 0
Example float rotaccel
...
rotacc_get(rotaccel)
printf(Max. rotational accel is set to {} deg/sec/sec, rotaccel)
See Also rotacc_set, rotspd_set, rotspd_get
rotacc_set
Description Sets the value of the maximum rotational acceleration parameter. This
parameter is used to regulate rotational accelerations when performing straight-
line motions in online mode and when using the teach pendant. It is not possible
to set the value of this parameter higher than the default value. which is robot
dependent. Units are in degrees/second / second.
Syntax command rotacc_set( var float rotacc )
Parameters rotacc a float which carries the new rotational acceleration value
Failure < 0
Example float rotacc
if nextpart == KRUMHORN
rotacc = 20
rotacc_set(rotspeed)
end if
See Also rotacc_get, rotspd_set, rotspd_get
rotspd_get
Description Retrieves the current value of the maximum rotational speed parameter. This
parameter is used to regulate rotational velocities when performing straight-line
motions in online mode and when using the teach pendant. Units are in
degrees/second.
Syntax command rotspd_get( var float rotspeed )
Parameter rotspeed a float into which the rotational speed value is placed
Failure < 0
Example float rotspeed, dispensing_limit
...
dispensing_limit = 155
rotspd_get(rotspeed)
if rotspeed > dispensing_limit
rotspd_set(dispensing_limit)
end if
...
See Also rotspd_set, rotacc_set, rotacc_get
rotspd_set
Description Sets the value of the maximum rotational speed parameter. This parameter is
used to regulate rotational velocities when performing straight-line motions in
online mode and when using the teach pendant. It is not possible to set the
value of this parameter higher than the default value. which is robot dependent.
Units are in degrees/second.
Syntax command rotspd_set( var float rotspeed )
Parameters rotspeed a float which carries the new rotational speed value
Failure < 0
Example float rotspeed
if nextpart == DASHBOARD
rotspeed = 100
rotspd_set(rotspeed)
end if
See Also rotspd_get, rotacc_set, rotacc_get
seek
Description Provides a method to move through a file arbitrarily rather than sequentially (see
read() and write().) The position is moved to a place in the file specified by offset
from the base given in whence. Subsequent reading and writing begin at this new
position.
Syntax command seek( int fd, int offset, seek_base whence )
Parameters fd identifies the file
whence can be one of
SEEK_SET = 0 move from beginning of file
SEEK_CUR = 1 move from current position
SEEK_END = 2 move from end of file
offset offset position form the base specified by whence
Failure < 0
-EINVAL the arguments were invalid (ie., -ve fd), or this operation is not
legal on this device.
-EBADF the file descriptor isn't open
-ESPIPE can't seek on a pipe or socket
Example int fd
string[] buffer = seek test
...
open ( fd, filename, O_RDWR, 0 ) ;; Open the file
write ( fd, buffer, 9 ) ;; Write to the file
seek ( fd, 0, SEEK_SET ) ;; Rewind the file
See Also read read from a file
write write to a file
select_menu
Description Displays the three lines s1, s2 and s3 on the pendant screen. Show key labels k1
to k4 and then wait for the user to select a function key. The integer number of
the key selected is returned.
Note that if any of the function key labels (k1 - k4) are null strings then the
corresponding key will NOT be enabled. The kn strings are printed literally; but
they must be limited by the programmer to 4 characters.
Syntax stp:func int select_menu(var string[] s1, var string[] s2, var
string[] s3,\
var string[] k1, var string[] k2, var string[] k3, var string[] k4)
Parameters s1 string displayed in the top line of the pendant
s2 string displayed in the second line of the pendant
s3 string displayed in the third line of the pendant
k1 Function key 1 label (max 4 characters)
Returns Success >= 0 Returns the integer number of the Function key selected, 0 if the
user exits the pendant menu
Failure < 0
Example int ctrl = 0
...
stp:startup()
... .
ctrl=stp:select_menu(Welcome, Just Call me Teach, Do you want to, \
Cont,Exit,,)
if ctrl == 1
;;continue
... .
end if
if ctrl == 2
;;exit
... .
end if
...
Category Pendant
sem_acquire
Description Attempts to acquire a semaphore specified by key. If the semaphore is granted
the command returns successful, otherwise a negative error code is returned. A
timeout can be specified which causes the function to wait to acquire the
semaphore until timeout has been reached. Timeout is in milliseconds.
Syntax command sem_acquire( int key, int timeout )
Parameter key an int
timeout an int time in milliseconds
Failure < 0 Returns negative error code
-EOK success
-EAGAIN the system is out of semaphore slots, or TM_NOWAIT was
specified and we did not acquire the semaphore right away.
-ETIMEOUT timed out
-EINTR the operation was interrupted by a signal.
Example int result, key = 1
int timeout = 50
...
result = sem_acquire( key, timeout )
if result == EOK
;; enter critical section
sem_release( key, timeout )
end if
sem_release
Description Releases the semaphore specified by key. If the semaphore can be successfully
released, the command returns successful, otherwise the command returns an
error code. If the timeout is specified, the command will keep attempting to
release the semaphore until timeout value is reached.
Trying to release a semaphore that has not be acquired will result in the
command attempting to acquire it first, and then release it.
Syntax command sem_release( int key, int timeout )
Parameter key an int
timeout an int time in milliseconds
Failure < 0 Returns negative error code.
-EOK success
-EAGAIN the system is out of semaphore slots, or TM_NOWAIT was
specified and we did not acquire the semaphore right away.
-ETIMEOUT timed out
-EINTR the operation was interrupted by a signal.
int timeout = 50
...
if result == EOK
end if
sem_test
Description Tests the semaphore specified by key.
Syntax command sem_test( int key )
Parameter key an int specifies the semaphore
Returns Success >= 0 Returns 1 if the semaphore is set, 2 if it is set and is owned by
the calling process, and 0 if it is clear.
Failure < 0
int timeout = 50
...
loop
result = sem_test( key )
if result == EOK
break
end if
end loop
if result == EOK
end if
send
Description Sends nwords words into the socket described by d. The number of words
actually written is returned. If timeout is not TM_FOREVER, send will only
attempt to write words for timeout milliseconds. If pid is not 0, the message is
sent to a client process specified by pid. (This must be the server). Otherwise, the
sender is the client.
If a server tries to send to a client with a timeout of TM_NOWAIT and the client is
non-existent, the error code -ENOCLIENT is returned.
send() is similar to write() which is used for all other (non-socket) entities.
Syntax command send(int d, void @buf, int nwords, int timeout, int pid)
Parameters d an int -specifies the socket
nwords an int - number of words
pid an int- specifies the process (must be server or 0)
TM_NOWAIT
TM_FOREVER
Returns Success >= 0 the number of words written
Failure < 0
-EINVAL the arguments were invalid (ie., -ve fd)
-ENOTSOCK the file was not a socket
-EAGAIN too large a write; also returned on TM_NOWAIT sends
that immediately time out.
-ETIMEOUT the timeout expired
-EINTR the operation was interrupted by a signal
Client only:
-ENOSERV there is no server
Server only:
-EBUSY there is already a server waiting to send
-ENOCLIENT there is no client that fits the send()
Example int sock_fd
string[] mbuf = 1 client
...
;; Open a socket for a client
open ( sock_fd, /mydev, O_CLIENT, 0 )
;; Send Message to the socket.
send (sock_fd, &mbuf, sizeof(mbuf), TM_FOREVER, 0)
See Also rcv receives words from a socket
server_get
Description Used with multi-robot systems.
Gets the name of the current server socket device, the socket/robot server that
the library is communicating with.
Syntax command server_get( var string[] currserver )
Parameter currserver string a variable for the name of the current server: a variable length
string
Returns Success = 0 EOK if successful
name of current server packed in currserver
Failure < 0
-EIO server is not connected
Example ;; An inefficient example program to show function of
;; server_get, server_info, server_set commands.
;; In the end prints the Machine type and Product code data
;; for the machine talking to the server "serve"...
string[32] cur_serve, serve
int pcode, mach_type, tran_ax, act_ax, mach_ax,power
int t
...
serve = "robot1"
t= server_get(cur_serve)
if (t >= 0 && cur_serve == serve)
server_info(mach_type,pcode, mach_ax,\
tran_ax, act_ax, power )
printf("Robot is {}/n Product Code is {}/n", mach_type,
pcode)
else
server_set(serve)
server_info( mach_type, pcode, mach_ax,\
printf("Robot is {}/n Product Code is {}/n", mach_type, pcode)
end if
See Also server_info
server_protocol
server_version
Robot Configuration
server_info
Description Similar to robot_info. Obtains: machine type, product code, machine axes,
transform axes, actual axes, arm power.
Syntax global command server_info( var int mtype, var int pcode,
\
var int axm, var int axt, var int axa, \
var int power )
Parameter mtype a string for machine type data
pcode a string for product code data
axm an int for machine axis data
axt an int for transform axis data
axa an int for actual axis data
power an int for the arm power status
Returns Success >= 0 Variables are packed with the server info
Failure < 0
Example ;; An inefficient example program to show function of
;; server_get, server_info, server_set commands.
;; In the end prints the Machine type and Product code data
;; for the machine talking to the server "serve"...
string[32] cur_serve, serve
int pcode, mach_type, tran_ax, act_ax, mach_ax,power
int t
...
serve = "robot1"
t= server_get(cur_serve)
if (t >= 0 && cur_serve == serve)
server_info(mach_type,pcode, mach_ax,\
printf("Robot is {}/n Product Code is {}/n", mach_type,
pcode)
else
server_set(serve)
server_info( mach_type, pcode, mach_ax,\
printf("Robot is {}/n Product Code is {}/n", mach_type, pcode)
end if
See Also server_get
server_set
Robot Configuration
server_protocol
Description Server_protocol function returns the protocol designator from the robot server.
Syntax func int server_protocol()
Returns Success >= 0 Returns integer.
Failure < 0 Returns error descriptor if the command fails.
Refer to error handling section for details.
See Also server_version Returns the server version.
Robot Configuration
server_set
Description Used with multi-robot systems.
Sets the robot server socket connection in the library to the specified new server
value, changing the socket/robot server that the library is communicating with.
Any existing socket connection is closed and the new socket opened.
A parameter of DEFAULT sets the socket connection back to /dev/robot.
If the command fails to open the new socket, any subsequent attempts to access
the robot server fail with an -EIO.
Syntax command server_set( var string[] newserver )
Parameter newserver the name of the new server: a variable length string
[path] the path of any valid socket
DEFAULT the default socket, /dev/robot
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
-EIO failed to open new socket
Robot Configuration
server_version
Description The server_version function returns an integer which specifies the robot server
version.
Syntax func int server_version()
Returns Success >= 0 Returns integer which specifies the version.
Failure < 0 Returns negative error code if command fails.
See Also server_protocol Returns the protocol designator from the server.
Robot Configuration
setenv
Description Creates / redefines an environment variables value. (See the section on environ()
for more explanation.) (C500C only)
Syntax command setenv(string[] key, string[] value, int rewrite)
Parameters There are three required parameters:
key The key to define / change. (This is the portion on the
left hand side of the = symbol in the environment
string.)
value The value to set the right hand side of the = in the
environment string to.
rewrite If False (0), do not modify an existing environment
string; only create a new one if one does not yet exist.
If True (1), rewrite the environment string if it already
exists.
Returns Success: returns 0. Not rewriting an existing string (rewrite == 0) is also
considered success.
Failure: returns -1
Example ;; Define a new variable called TestMode, whose value is yes
setenv(TestMode, yes, True)
See Also environ(), getenv(), unsetenv()
setprio
Description Sets the priority of a process by adjusting the priority by an increment, delta.
Also, gets the current priority of a process.
There are three priority levels: high (3), normal (2), and low(1). The normal level is
the usual priority level. During processing, the system alternates among
processes. A process at a higher level can exclude a process at a lower level.
Improper use of setprio() could starve other processes including the robot server.
The setprio() command is useful, for example, to do independent calculations at a
low priority without slowing down processing for robot activity, or to respond
immediately to a GPIO input by adjusting a process to a higher priority. The
system can raise or lower a priority across the entire range. A user can lower a
process below normal and raise it back to normal.
To change the priority of the current process, pid is 0 (zero).
To get the current priority level, use 0 (zero) for the increment, delta. A child
process is created with whatever priority level the parent had.
Returns the new priority as an absolute integer (not an increment).
Syntax func int setprio( int pid, int delta )
Parameter pid the process id number (0 is current process)
delta amount of adjustment of priority
Returns Success > 0
The new priority: an absolute int.
1 is PR_LOW
2 is PR_NORM
3 is PR_HIGH
Failure < 0
-EINVAL the arguments were not valid
-EPERM a non-privileged process can only change its
OWN priority
Example setprio( 26, 0) ;; get process 26 priority
setprio( 26,-1) ;; set process 26 priority down 1 level
setprio( 0,-1) ;; set current process priority down 1 level
setprio( 26,+1) ;; set process 26 priority up 1 level
( 0,+1) ;; set current process up 1 level
See Also getpid gets the id number of the process of the calling program
getppid gets the id number of the parent process of the calling program
shift_t
Description In the tool frame of reference, alters the cartesian coordinates of a location. A
precision location cannot be changed with this command. There are two possible
formats: using a cloc type or using individual displacements. In both formats, the
first argument is the location to be shifted.
If a cloc type is used, the displacement values are earlier stored in a cloc which is
used as a parameter in shift_t.
If individual displacements are used, a displacement for each axis is listed. From
1 to 6 displacements can be listed, but only in the order X, Y, Z, roll, pitch, yaw.
A displacement of 0.0 value can be used as a placeholder in the list.
cloc type
Syntax command shift_t( var gloc location, cloc displacement_amount )
Parameter location the location to be shifted: a cloc
displacement_amount the amounts of the shift, in current units: a cloc
Example teachable cloc place
cloc difference_a = {0.0, 0.0, 10.0, 0.0, 45.0, 0.0}
...
shift_t( place, difference_a)
cloc difference_b
float[6] b = {10.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 45.0, 0.0}
...
difference_b = {b[0], b[1], b[2], b[3], b[4], b[5]}
shift_t( place, difference_b)
displacements
Syntax command shift_t( var gloc location, float x, [float y, [float z,
\
[float yaw, [float pitch, [float roll ] ] ] ] ] )
x the displacement along the X axis, in current units: a float
Parameter (Optional) y the displacement along the Y axis, in current units: a float
z the displacement along the Z axis, in current units: a float
yaw the displacement around the Z axis, in degrees: a float
pitch the displacement around the Y axis, in degrees: a float
roll the displacement around the X axis, in degrees: a float
...
shift_t( place, 0.0, 0.0, 10.0, 0.0, 45.0, 0.0)
...
shift_t( place, 0.0, 0.0, -10.0)
float displace = 2.5
...
shift_t( place, 0.0, displace)
...
displace = displace + 2.5
shift_t( place, 0.0, displace)
Failure < 0
Application Shell Same as tshift
See Also shift_w shifts a location in the world frame of reference
tool_set sets a tool transform
base_set sets a base offset
shift_w
Description In the world frame of reference, alters the cartesian coordinates of a location. A
precision location cannot be changed with this command. There are two possible
formats: using a cloc type or using individual displacements. In both formats, the
first argument is the location to be shifted.
If a cloc type is used, the displacement values are earlier stored in a cloc which is
used as a parameter in shift_w.
If individual displacements are used, a displacement for each axis is listed. From
1 to 6 displacements can be listed, but only in the order X, Y, Z, X-rotation, Y-
rotation, Z-rotation. A displacement of 0.0 value can be used as a placeholder in
the list.
cloc type
Syntax command shift_w( var gloc location, cloc displacement_amount )
displacement_amount the amounts of the shift, in current units: a cloc
cloc difference_a = {0.0, 0.0, 20.0, 0.0, 45.0, 0.0}
...
shift_w( place, difference_a)
cloc difference_b
float[6] b = {0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0}
...
shift_w( place, difference_b)
...
b[2] = b[2] + 2.5
shift_w( place, difference_b)
displacements
Syntax command shift_w( var gloc location, float x, [float y, [float z,
\
[float z-rot, [float y-rot, [float x-rot, \
[float e1, [float e2, ] ] ] ] ] ] ] )
x the displacement along the X axis, in current units: a float
Parameter (Optional) y the displacement along the Y axis, in current units: a float
z the displacement along the Z axis, in current units: a float
z-rot the displacement around the Z axis, in degrees: a float
y-rot the displacement around the Y axis, in degrees: a float
x-rot the displacement around the X axis, in degrees: a float
e1 the displacement of the first extra axis: a float
e2 the displacement of the second extra axis: a float
Example teachable cloc place ;; 6 DOF arm with track and carousel
... ;; in millimetres
shift_w( place, 0.0, 300.0, 100.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 1500.0)
...
shift_w( place, 0.0, -300.0, -100.0)
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Application Shell Same as wshift
RAPL-II Same as SHIFT and SHIFTA
See Also shift_t shifts a location in the tool frame of reference
base_set sets a base offset
tool_set sets a tool transform
shutdown
Description Shuts down the pendant subsystem.
This command differs from pendant_close() which closes the pendant in
preparation for shutting down a program or the controller.
Library stp
Syntax export command shutdown()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example stp:startup()
;...
stp:shutdown()
RAPL-II Same as PENDANT OFF
See Also pendant_close
Category Pendant
sig_arm_set
Description Set the signal which will be issued to the controlling process in the event of an
arm state change. Signals are listed in the Appendices
Syntax command sig_arm_set( int signal )
Parameter signal an int it can be any of the unreserved signals except for SIGKILL which
cannot be masked
Returns Success >= 0 EOK =0
Example signal_arm = 13
...
ctrl=sig_arm_set(signal_arm)
Result signal 13 is used to notify the process of change in arm power
status
Category Signals
sig_mask_set
Description Sets the current processs signal mask, and returns the old one. If the bit
corresponding to a given signal is 1, then that signal is ignored. All signals
except SIGKILL are maskable. Signals are listed in the Appendices
Syntax func int sig_mask_set( int mask )
Parameter mask an int defines the signal mask
Failure < 0
Example int mask, old_mask
...
old_mask = sig_mask_set(-1)
mask = sigmask(SIGHUP)|old_mask
sig_mask_set(mask)
...
old_mask = sig_mask_set(-1)
mask = old_mask & ~ (sigmask(SIGHUP)|sigmask(SIGINT))
sig_mask_set(mask)
See Also sigarm_set Set the signal for change in arm power status
Category Signals
sigfifo
Description Sends the signal sig to all of the readers at the other end of the fifo fd. The
different types of signals are found in the Appendix.
Syntax command sigfifo( int fd, signal_code sig )
Parameters fd an int identifies the fifo
sig an enumerated type specifying the signal. The integer corresponding to
the signal is listed in the Appendices.
Failure < 0
Example signal_code sig = 13 ;; SIG_13 to notify impending closure
int fd, check
string[32] thisfifo = "this_device.txt"
open(fd, thisfifo, O_RDWR | O_CREAT, M_READ | M_WRITE)
;;Prepare to close fd
check = sigfifo(fd, sig)
See Also signal
sigmask
sigsend
Category Signals
Device Inputs and Outputs
sigmask
Description Returns the correct mask for the signal sig, which is used in conjunction with
sig_mask_set.
Syntax func int sigmask( signal_code sig )
Parameter sig signal_code enumerated type specifies the signal (see Appendix)
Failure < 0
Example int mask, old_mask
...
old_mask = sigsetmask(-1)
mask = sigmask(SIGHUP)|old_mask
sigsetmask(mask)
...
old_mask = sigsetmask(-1)
mask = old_mask & ~ (sigmask(SIGHUP)|sigmask(SIGINT))
sigsetmask(mask)
See Also signal
sigmask
sigfifo
Category Signals
signal
Description Sets an action that is to be performed whenever the current process receives
signal sig. sigsub is the address of a subroutine which takes 1 integer
parameter, (signal number sig). If oldsigsub is not NULL, then oldsigsub@ is set
to the previous handlers routine. If sigsub is NULL, then the default action is
given to the signal.
Syntax command signal( signal_code sig, void@ sigsub, void@@ oldsigsub )
Returns Success >= _-EOK
Failure < -EINVAL bad signal code
Example sub on_HUP( int sig )
print (Got SIGHUP!\n)
end sub
main
signal( SIGHUP, on_HUP, NULL )
end main
Category Signals
sigsend
Description Sends the signal sig to the process specified in pid. Valid signals are listed in the
Appendix.
Syntax command sigsend( int pid, signal_code sig )
Failure < 0
Example int pid
...
pid = split()
...
if (... && pid==0)
sigsend (pid, SIGHUP) ;; Stop the child process
end if
Category Signals
System Process Control: Operating System Management
sin
Description Calculates the sine of an angle. Takes an argument in degrees.
Syntax func float sin( float x )
Parameters x a float angle in degrees
Returns Success >= 0. The sine of the argument.
Failure < 0
Example float x = 25.0 ;; value is 25.0 degrees
float y
y = sin( x )
Result y is 0.422618
RAPL-II SIN
See Also cos calculates the cosine
asin calculates the arc sine
Category Math
size_to_bytes
Description Converts the output of sizeof() (which is the number of RAPL-3 words occupied by
a data structure) to the corresponding number of bytes. It is typically used with
binary data files and seek() (which expects a byte offset) for seeking to a specified
record in the file.
Syntax func int size_to_bytes(int words)
Example ;; if fd is an open data file full if mystruct records,
;; this seeks to the third record in the file:
seek(fd, size_to_bytes(2 * sizeof(mystruct)), SEEK_SET)
See Also seek(), sizeof()
Categories File Input and Output,
sizeof
Description The sizeof() operation is built in to the RAPL-3 compiler, and returns the size, in
RAPL-3 words, of its argument. It differs from ordinary functions in that it does
not require a value as its argument; instead it can accept any variable or any
type.
Syntax sizeof(any data object or type)
Returns the number of words occupied by the data object, or the number of words a data
object of the specified type would occupy.
Example if we have:
int x
int[10] y
ploc@ pp
string[10] s
string[100]@ sp
then:
sizeof(int) returns 1
sizeof(float) returns 1
sizeof(ploc) returns 9
sizeof(int[20]) returns 20
sizeof(float[2,5]) returns 10
sizeof(string[10]) returns 4
sizeof(string[100]) returns 26
sizeof(x) returns 1
sizeof(pp) returns 1
sizeof(pp@) returns 9
sizeof(y) returns 10
sizeof(y[x]) returns 1
sizeof(s) returns 4
sizeof(sp@) returns 26
See Also sizeof_str()
Category File Input and Output
String Manipulation
snprint
Description Writes the specified data into the string buf, up to a maximum of maxlen
characters. Two types of arguments can be given in the variable argument list:
constants and variables. The constants are printed exactly as they are given.
The variable's value is what is copied to the file descriptor. The method used in
printing is to print the arguments in the exact order that they were given.
Syntax command snprint ( var string[] buf, int maxlen,... )
Parameters buf a string - the write destination
maxlen an int - the maximum number of characters written
Failure < 0
Example .define MAXLEN 128
int speed, check
string[MAXLEN] store
check = speed_get(speed)
snprint(store, MAXLEN, "Current speed is: ", speed)
printf("{128}\n", store)
Result Current speed is: speed
RAPL-II ENCODE
See Also snprintf
snprintf
string number print formatted
Description Converts and writes output into the string buf to a maximum length of maxlen
under the control of a specified format fmt.
Format specifications are detailed in the Formatted Output section of File and
Syntax command snprintf( var string[] buf, int maxlen, var string[] fmt,
... )
Parameters buf a string - the write destination
maxlen an int - the maximum number of characters written
Failure < 0
int speed, check
string[MAXLEN] store
check = speed_get(speed)
snprintf(store, MAXLEN, "Current speed is:{4} m/s", speed)
printf("{128}\n", store)
Result Current speed is: speed m/s
RAPL II ENCODE
See Also snprint
socketpair
Description Gets a pair of file descriptors for a private client and server socket. client_fd is
set to the file descriptor opened as O_CLIENT, and server_fd is set to the file
descriptor opened as O_SERVER.
Syntax command socketpair( var int client_fd, var int server_fd )
Parameters client_fd an int -packed with the client file descriptor
server_fd an int- packed with the server file descriptor
Returns Success >= 0 Returns 0.
Failure < 0
-EAGAIN there are no free fd's or related resources.
Example int client, server
...
socketpair( client, server )
See Also open opens a device
System Process Control: Operating System Management
speed
Alias of speed_set
alias same as
speed(...) speed_set(...)
Description Sets or gets the speed of arm motions. Takes an integer value. The value is the
percentage (from 1 to 100) of full speed.
A value of 1 returns the current speed without changing it.
Example speed(25) ;; sets the speed to 25%
Example speed_now = speed_get() ;; gets the current speed
if (speed_now > 50)
speed(50)
end if
RAPL-II Similar to SPEED.
See Also speed_set sets the current speed
speed_get gets the current speed (can pass variable by reference)
Category Motion
speed_get
Description Gets the current speed setting. Can be used in two ways.
First, a parameter can be passed by reference. If a variable is used in the
command call, the command packs the value of the current speed in the variable.
Second, the return value can be used. The command returns the value of the
current speed. In the command call, use -1 instead of a variable.
Syntax command speed_get(var int currspeed )
Parameter currspeed: the variable to store the current speed setting: an int
currspeed has the value of the current speed
returns the current speed value
Failure < 0
Example int cspeed
...
speed_get( cspeed ) ;; parameter passed by reference
...
if (cspeed > 50)
speed_set(50)
end if
Example int cspeed
...
cspeed = speed_get( -1 ) ;; assign the return value
See Also speed_set sets the speed
Category Motion
speed_set
Alias speed
alias same as
speed(...) speed_set(...)
Description Sets the speed for all subsequent motions. Takes an integer value. The value is
the percentage (from 1 to 100) of full speed.
Syntax command speed_set( int newspeed )
Parameter newspeed the new speed setting: an int
the speed is set to newspeed
Failure < 0
Example speed_set(10)
...
speed_set(100)
See Also speed_get gets the current speed setting
Category Motion
split
Description Creates a duplicate child process of the current process. The parent process (the
one that issued the split) receives the childs process id, and the child process
receives 0.
The parent and child share all resources: text, data, and heap (entities such as
open files, memory allocated at run time, outer-frame variables) except that the
parent and child have separate stacks (local variables are not shared).
Syntax func int split()
Returns Success >= 0. The child gets returned value 0. The parent gets the (positive)
child process id.
Failure < 0. No child process generated. Split returns:
EAGAIN if the process table is full or the memory allocation tables are full
ENOMEM if there is not enough memory for the new processs stack
Example int pid
...
pid = split()
if pid == 0 then
;; any code for the child process to perform
else
;; any code for the parent process to perform
end if
Example int enable = 0
main
string[80] cmd
int pid
int counter
int result
...
pid = split()
...
if pid == 0 then
;; Child
printf("I am the child, and my pid is {}. \
My parent is {}.\n", getpid(), getppid())
loop ;; forever
result = msleep(1000)
if enable == 1 then
printf("Count = {}\n\n", counter)
counter = counter + 1
end if
end loop
else
;; Parent
printf("I am the parent, and my pid is {}. \
My child is {}.\n", getpid(), pid)
msleep(500) ;; Give the child time to speak
loop ;; forever
printf("start, stop, terminate, or quit> ")
readline(cmd,80)
if cmd == "start" then
enable = 1
elseif cmd == "stop" then
enable = 0
elseif cmd == "terminate" then
;; Terminate child
sigsend(pid, SIGHUP)
pid = 0
elseif cmd == "quit" then
break
else
printf("I don't understand!")
end if
end loop
;; Terminate child
if pid != 0 then
sigsend(pid, SIGHUP)
end if
end if
end main
sqrt
Description Calculates the square root of a float. Takes a positive argument.
Syntax func float sqrt( float x )
Parameter x a float
Returns Success >= 0. The square root of the argument.
Failure < 0
float y
y = sqrt( x )
Result 7.071068
RAPL-II SQRT
See Also pow calculates a value raised to a power
Category Math
srand
Description A subroutine for setting the seed value for the random number generating
functions rand and rand_in.
Syntax sub srand(int seed)
Parameters seed an int - the seed value for random number generation
Example ;;Set the seed value and generate an array of 5 random numbers.
;;
int r =5
int seed = 13
int[10] random
int j
...
;;generate a 5 element array of random numbers
for j = 1 to r
random[j-1] = rand()
end for
Result A 5 element array of random number integers
See Also rand_in generates random numbers within a specified range
rand generates a random number
Category Math
stance_get
Description Gets the current requested or physical stance of the arm. A stance is a specific
configuration of one or more joints.
Syntax command stance_get( stance_type_t type, var shoulder_t reach, /
var elbow_t elbow, var wrist_t wrist )
Parameters type enumerated type stance_type_t
STANCE_REQUESTED requested stance, not necessarily the physical stance
STANCE_PHYSICAL current actual stance
reach enumerated type shoulder_t stance of shoulder, joint 2
elbow enumerated type elbow_t stance of elbow, joint 3
wrist enumerated type wrist_t stance of wrist, joints 4, 5, and 6
Returns Success: parameters are packed.
reach, one of:
REACH_FREE shoulder, joint 2, free (robot picks best)
REACH_FORWARD shoulder, joint 2, forward (toward front of robot)
REACH_BACKWARD shoulder, joint 2, backward
elbow, one of:
ELBOW_FREE elbow, joint 3, free (robot picks best)
ELBOW_UP elbow, joint 3, up (away from base)
ELBOW_DOWN elbow, joint 3, down
wrist, one of:
WRIST_FREE joint 4 and joint 6, free (robot picks best)
WRIST_FLIP joint 4 and joint 6 rotated 180 degrees, and
joint 5 reversed
WRIST_NOFLIP no rotation or reversal
Failure < 0
Example stance_type_t mode = 0 ;; STANCE_REQUESTED
shoulder_t reach
elbow_t elbow
wrist_t wrist
stance_get( mode, reach, elbow, wrist )
if (reach != REACH_FREE || wrist != WRIST_FREE)
reach = REACH_FREE
wrist = WRIST_FREE
elbow = ELBOW_FREE
stance_set(reach, elbow, wrist)
else
;; Continue
end if
Result Returns the requested stance in the var variables reach, elbow,
wrist.
If the stance is not right sets the stance.
RAPL-II Similar to POSE
REACH FORWARD|BACKWARD|XFREE
ELBOW UP|DOWN|XFREE
WRIST NOFLIP|FLIP|XFREE
See Also stance_set sets the stance of the robot
Category Stance
stance_set
Description Specifies a stance of the arm. A stance is a specific configuration of one or more
joints.
Syntax command stance_set( shoulder_t reach, elbow_t elbow, wrist_t wrist)
Parameters reach
REACH_FREE shoulder, joint 2, free (robot picks best)
REACH_FORWARD shoulder, joint 2, forward (toward front of robot)
REACH_BACKWARD shoulder, joint 2, backward
elbow
ELBOW_FREE elbow, joint 3, free (robot picks best)
ELBOW_UP elbow, joint 3, up (away from base)
ELBOW_DOWN elbow, joint 3, down
wrist
WRIST_FREE joint 4 and joint 6, free (robot picks best)
WRIST_FLIP joint 4 and joint 6 rotated 180 degrees, and
joint 5 reversed
WRIST_NOFLIP no rotation or reversal
Failure < 0
Example stance_type_t mode = 0 ;; STANCE_REQUESTED
shoulder_t reach
elbow_t elbow
wrist_t wrist
stance_get( mode, reach, elbow, wrist )
if (reach != REACH_FREE || wrist != WRIST_FREE)
reach = REACH_FREE
wrist = WRIST_FREE
elbow = ELBOW_FREE
stance_set(reach, elbow, wrist)
else
;; Continue
end if
Result Returns the requested stance in the var variables reach, elbow,
wrist.
If the stance is not right sets the stance.
RAPL-II Similar to POSE
REACH FORWARD|BACKWARD|XFREE
ELBOW UP|DOWN|XFREE
WRIST NOFLIP|FLIP|XFREE
See Also stance_get gets the stance of the robot
Category Stance
startup
Description Initializes the pendant i/o in preparation for invoking menus. This command
MUST be called before other high-level commands are invoked.
This command differs from pendant_open() which prepares the pendant for
access and initializes it to defaults.
Library stp
Syntax export command startup()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example stp:startup()
RAPL-II Same as PENDANT ON
See Also pendant_open
Category Pendant
stat
Description Obtains information about a particular object in the file system.
Syntax command stat( var string[] path, var c_dirent buf )
Parameter path a string -identifies the device
buf c_dirent structure has the following fields:
string[32] de_name
int de_type
int de_links
mode_flags de_mode
int de_size
int de_mtime
int de_dev
int de_ident
The options for mode_flags type are:
M_READ readable
M_WRITE writable
M_EXEC executable *
Modes may be combined with the bitwise OR operator, represented by | (a single
vertical bar/pipe).
M_READ
M_READ | M_EXEC
M_READ | M_WRITE
M_READ | M_WRITE | M_EXEC
Returns Success >= 0 buf is packed with the data
Failure < 0
-ENOTDIR a component is not a directory
Example int fd, check
c_dirent dev_info
string[32] thisfifo = "this_device.txt"
open(fd, thisfifo, O_RDWR | O_CREAT, M_READ | M_WRITE)
...
check = stat(thisfifo, dev_info )
Result Fields of c_dirent type dev_info is packed with data
See Also statfs Gets information about mounted file system
statusnp Gets status of named pipe
statfs
Description Gets information about a mounted filesystem.
Syntax command statfs( var string[] path, var c_statfs buf )
Parameter path a string specifying the path to the file
buf a variable of type c_statfs - the struct to hold the information:
mount_type fs_type filesystem type code, one of:
MOUNT__MFS memory file system
MOUNT_CFS CROSnt file system
MOUNT_RFS remote file system
MOUNT_HOSTFS host file system
int fs_bsize size of 1 block, in bytes
int fs_free number of free blocks
Failure < 0
-EOK success
-ENOTDIR a component of the path was not a directory
-ENOENT the specified file was not found
Example .define PATHLEN 32
mount_type type = MOUNT_HOSTFS
string[PATHLEN] dir = "/app/this_app"
mount_flags flags = MOUNTF_RDONLY
c_statfs stat
int check
check = mount(type, dir, flags, NULL)
...
check = statfs(dir, stat)
Result c_statfs type stat is packed with the data
System Shell Application Shell mount
See Also mount mount a file system
statusnp
status named pipe
Description Returns the current status of a named pipe.
Also returns how far the pending operation has completed, or the completed
transfer length.
Syntax func int statusnp( int fd, var int nwords )
nwords the number of words: an int
Returns >0
the current status of the named pipe
NPIPE_OPENED 0x0001
NPIPE_CONNECTED 0x0002
NPIPE_CONNECT_PENDING 0x0100
NPIPE_READ_PENDING 0x0200
NPIPE_WRITE_PENDING 0x0400
NPIPE_TRANSACT_PENDING 0x0800
the number of words transferred thus far in the current i/o
operation
the number of words in the last i/o operation
=0 no previously pending i/o operation waiting for pick-up
<0 error
Example statusnp(pd, stat)
statusnp(NT_app_pipe, words)
See Also opennp opens a named pipe
Category Win 32
str_append
Description Takes string src and appends it onto string dst. String length of dst must be of
sufficient length to contain the string being appended.
Syntax sub str_append( var string[] dst, var string[] src )
Parameter dst a string the destination string
src string appended to string dst
Example string[20] dst = Name:
...
print ( dst, \n )
str_append( dst, J. Doe )
print ( dst, \n )
Result Name:
Name: J. Doe
str_chr_find
Description Finds the first occurrence of c in string src. Returns the index of the character.
If not found, returns -1.
Syntax func int str_chr_find( string[] src, int c )
Parameter src a string
c an int - the character to be found in string src.
Failure < 0
string[MAXLEN] indata, str, newstr
int cmd, outnum, outval,i
. .
cmd=str_chr_get(indata,0) ;; find command type
case cmd
of 'O': ;; O<outnum>,<state><lf> this will set outputs
i=str_chr_find(indata,',') ;; find position of ","
if i>=2 then
;; make new "str" with data <outnum>
str_substr(str,indata,1,i-1)
;;convert "str" to int outnum
str_to_int(outnum,str)
;; newstr is <state>
str_substr(newstr,indata,i+1,MAXLEN)
;; convert newstr to int
str_to_int(outval,newstr)
;; set output "outnum" to "outval"
output_set(outnum,outval)
end if
end case
Result Outputs set as defined in the command line input
RAPL-II STRPOS found substring (not character) in a string.
See Also str_chr_rfind
str_chr_get
Description Returns the ASCII value of the character indexed by index in string s. Reminder:
string indexes begin at 0.
Syntax func int str_chr_get( var string s, int index )
Parameters s a string
index an int - specifies the character in the string
Failure < 0
Example string[] s = str_chr_get example
...
print (Letter e has ASCII value )
ch = str_chr_get( s, 9 )
...
print (ch,\n)
Result Letter e has ASCII value 101
See Also str_chr_find
str_chr_rfind
str_chr_rfind
Description Finds the last occurrence of c in string src. Returns the index of the character.
If not found, returns -1.
Syntax func int str_chr_rfind( string[] src, int c )
Parameter src astring, searched for the int c
c an int, the character to be located in the string src
Returns Success >= 0 Returns the index of the last occurrence of the character c.
Failure < 0 -1 if character is not found
Example ;;Does a sentence end with proper punctuation "." or "?"
.define MAXLEN 128
string[MAXLEN] sentence
int i, length, j, count
;; prompt for sentence
printf("Enter a sentence (max 128 characters)\n")
;; Read sentence
count=readline(sentence,MAXLEN)
length = str_len(sentence) ;;sentence length starts from 0
i = str_chr_rfind(sentence, '.')
j = str_chr_rfind(sentence, '?')
if i == length-1 || j == length-1 ;; proper punctuation
printf("Good punctuation\n")
else
printf("Sentence punctuation incorrect\n")
end if
RAPL-II STRPOS found substring (not character) in a string
See Also str_chr-find
str_chr_set
Description Sets the value of the character indexed by index in string s to ch. Reminder:
string indexes begin with 0.
Syntax sub str_chr_set( var string[] s, int index, int ch )
Example string[] s = str_chr_set example
...
print (s, \n)
str_chr_set( s, 13, e )
...
print (s, \n)
Result str_chr_set example
str_chr_set eeample
See Also str_edit
str_chr_find
str_chr-rfind
str_cksum
Description Computes a 32-bit bytewise checksum of the characters of string, for characters
from start to start + len - 1.
Syntax func int str_cksum( var string[] s, int start, int len )
Parameters s string for which the cksum is calculated
start int the start character for the check sum
len the string length for the checksum
Failure < 0
string[MAXLEN] the_string = "What is the checksum of the_string?"
int len, check
len = sizeof(the_string)
check = str_cksum(the_string, 0, len)
printf("{} \nChecksum = {} \n", the_string, check)
Result What is the checksum of the_string
Checksum = 3145
str_dup
Description Allocates space for a string, copies it into the allocated space and returns a
pointer to the new string. This is principally useful for constructing dynamic
data structures.
Syntax func string[]@ str_dup(string[] str)
Parameter str the string to allocate space for and copy,
Returns a pointer to the new string. Raises an exception if the memory allocation fails.
Example string[]@sp
...
sp = str_dup(This is a test string...)
printf(The new string is {}\n, sp@)
Result The new string is This is a test string... is printed out.
See Also mem_alloc()
str_edit
Description Replaces the characters in dst at position start and len characters with the string
src. This subroutine can be used to both delete characters (if src == "") and
insert substrings (if len == 0, for example.) Note that if dst doesn't have a start
th
character, then src is simply appended to the end of dst.
Syntax sub str_edit( var string[] dst, string[] src, int start, int len
)
Parameter dst a string to be edited
src the string to be used to places in dst
start the start character index of dst
len the length (number) of characters to be replaced
Failure < 0
Example ;; Remove vowels from a string
string[128] sentence
int i = 0
int count = 0
int len
;; prompt for sentence
printf("Enter a sentence (max 128 characters)\n")
;; Read sentence
count=readline(sentence,128)
len = str_len(sentence) ;;sentence length starts from 0
;; find and remove vowels
while (i <= len)&& (count != NULL)
count= str_chr_get(sentence, i)
if count=='a'||count=='e'||count=='i'||count=='o'||count=='u'
str_edit(sentence,"",i,1)
else
i++
end if
end while
printf("\n{}\n", sentence)
Result Prints the string sentence with the vowels removed.
RAPL-II CUT deleted characters. PASTE inserted characters.
See Also str_chr_find
str_error
Description Returns a pointer to a string that describes a given error code specified in n.
A failed command or function returns a negative integer (error descriptor) which
corresponds to a particular error. The message strings, corresponding to the
error descriptor , are stored in a string array indexed by positive integers. The
negative return value of the failed command or function must be converted to a
positive value for str_error() to access the array.
Refer to the section Error Handling for a description of the error descriptor and
the error codes.
Syntax func string[]@ str_error( int n )
Parameters n an int error descriptor
Failure < 0
Example int t, fd
...
if (t < 0) ;; error
print(Error is:, str_error(-t), \n)
... exit(1)
end if
Result Error is: not found
See Also str_signal returns a pointer to a string describing a signal code
str_len
Description Returns the length of string s or 0 (zero) if no limit. Reminder: the length is
different from the initial declared size.
Syntax func int str_len( var string[] s)
Parameter s a string
positive, the size of the string
zero, no limit
Failure < 0
Example string[20] s = str_len example
int i
...
i = str_len(s)
print (i, \n)
Result 15
See Also str_limit Returns string limit
str_len_set
Description Sets the length of string s to len. This subroutine is equivalent to truncating a
string to length len, if s is longer than len and extending a string s to length len,
if s is shorter than len.
Length, len, of 0 (zero) allows any length. This is useful with dynamic allocation
where length is controlled by mem_alloc().
Syntax sub str_len_set( var string[] s, int len )
Example string[] s = str_len_set example
...
print (s, \n)
str_len_set( s, 11 )
print (s, \n)
Result str_len_set example
str_len_set
See Also str_len
str-limit
str_limit
Description Returns the limit on the length of a string.
Syntax func int str_limit( var string[] s)
Parameter s A string
Returns Success >= 0 Returns integer value of the string length limit.
Failure < 0
string[MAXLEN] sentence = "This is a string"
int length
length = str_limit(sentence)
printf("str_limit is {}\n",length)
Result str_limit is 128
See Also str_len actual string length
str_limit_set
Description Sets the limit on the length of a string.
Syntax sub str_limit_set( var string[] s, int len )
Parameter s A string
len an int the limit for the string
Failure < 0
string[MAXLEN] sentence = "This is a string"
int length =32
int len
str_limit_set(sentence, length)
len = str_limit(sentence)
printf("str_limit is {}\n",len)
Result str_limit is 32
See Also str_len
str_limit
str_scanf
string scan formatted
Description Parses (separates) the contents of string s according to fmt into a list of pointers
to variables. Returns the number of items matched. Scanning may stop before
the end of s if str_scanf() runs out of format specifiers.
Syntax command str_scanf ( var string[] s, var string fmt, ... )
Parameters The string fmt can contain:
field description
{}
(opening brace and
closing brace)
any item (float or int; not string) preceded
and followed by any amount of whitespace
{10F
}
fixed field of 10 characters wide (no extra
whitespace before or after)
{10}
an item of given maximum width (not fixed;
whitespace ignored)
(blank space) space means 0 or more spaces
\\
(two backslashes) means exactly 1 space
,
(comma) means exactly 1 comma
x
(any other character) means exactly 1 of that character
Failure < 0
Example 1 str_scanf ( buf, "{}{} {}", &intvar1, &intvar2, &floatvar )
will scan for:
any whitespace
an integer (stored in intvar1)
any whitespace
an integer (stored in intvar2)
any whitespace
a float (stored in floatvar)
any whitespace
Example 2 str_scanf ( buf, "{20}, {}", &stringvar, &intvar )
will scan for:
any whitespace
a non-whitespace string (first 20 chars stored in stringvar)
any whitespace
a comma
any whitespace
an integer (stored in intvar)
any whitespace
Example 3 str_scanf ( buf, "{10F},{10F},{20F} ", &floatvar, &intvar,
&stringvar )
will scan for:
exactly 10 characters to be converted to a float and stored in floatvar
exactly 1 comma
exactly 10 characters to be converted to an int and stored in intvar
exactly 1 comma
exactly 20 characters to be converted to a string and stored in stringvar
any amount of whitespace
str_signal
Description Returns a pointer to a string that describes a given signal code specified in n.
Valid signal codes are found in the Appendix.
Syntax func string[]@ str_signal( int n )
Parameter n an int specifies the signal number
Failure < 0
Example string[]@ sig_msg
...
sig_msg = str_signal( SIGHUP )
print (sig_msg,\n)
Result SIGHUP
See Also str_error returns a pointer to a string describing an error code
Signals
str_sizeof
Description Returns the number of words it takes to store a string of length n.
Syntax func int str_sizeof( int n )
Parameters n an int the size of the string (# of characters)
Returns Success >= 0. Returns 1 + ( (n + 3) >> 2 )
Failure < 0
Example int size, max_size
int words, max_words
string[128] gnirts = How much memory to store this string
size = str_len(gnirts)
max_size = str_limit(gnirts)
words = str_sizeof(size)
max_words = str_sizeof(max_size)
printf(memory for string is:{}\n, words)
printf(max memory for string is: {} \n, max_words)
Result memory for string is 10
max memory for string is 33
See Also str_limit
str_limit_set
Memory
str_substr
Description Copies the substring of src starting at the start
th
character and len characters
long into dst. Only as much of the substring as actually exists is copied.
Characters are numbered from 0.
Syntax sub str_substr( var string[] dst, string[] src, int start, int
len )
Parameter dst the destination string
src the source string
start an int the start point in the src string
len an int the length to be copied
Failure < 0
Example str_substr(d,s,0,10)
;; copies the first 10 characters of s into d.
See Also str_edit
str_subsys
Description The str_subsys function, given a specific error descriptor returns a string giving
the name of the subsystem origination the error. For details on the error
descriptor refer to the Error Handling section.
Syntax func string[]@ str_subsys(int descriptor)
Parameters descriptor an int - value returned when error occurs in subprogram
Returns Success >= 0 Returns a string with specifying the subsystem.
Failure < 0
if (t < 0) ;; error
err_des = -t...
printf(The error occurred in the {} subsystem \n,
str_subsys(err_des))
exit(1)
end if
Result The error occurred in the [kernel] subsystem
See Also err_get_subsys
str_error
String Manipulation
str_to_float
Description Converts an ASCII string in src to a floating point number and places the result
in dst. If the string is not a proper floating point number, the command fails.
Syntax command str_to_float( var float dst, var string[] src )
Parameters dst a float - the value of the string src
src a string - string to be converted to a float value
Failure < 0
Example string[] s = 12345.67
float f
...
str_to_float (f, s)
print (f, \n)
Result 12345.67
Math
str_to_int
Description Converts string src into a hexadecimal integer if there is a leading 0x or 0X, octal
integer if there is a leading 0, or decimal integer otherwise. Stores the result in
dst. LONG_MAX or LONG_MIN are stored if overflow occurred, depending on the
sign of the value.
Syntax command str_to_int( var int dst, var string[] src )
Parameters dst an int - the value of the string src
src a string - string to be converted to a integer value
Failure < 0
-EINVAL if error occurred during conversion.
Example string[] s = 12345
int i
...
str_to_int (i, s)
print (i,\n)
Result 12345
RAPL-II DECODE
Math
str_to_lower
Description For a string specified by the variable str, converts the letters in the string from
upper case to lower case. If a letter is already lower case, does not change it.
Syntax sub str_to_lower( var string[] str )
Parameter str the string to be converted: a variable length string
Example string[128] path = MY_DIRECTORY\\MY_FILE
. .
str_lower(path)
printf({}\n, path)
Result my_directory\my_file
See Also str_to_upper converts a string to upper case
chr_to_lower converts a character to lower case
str_to_upper
Description For a string specified by the variable str, converts the letters in the string from
lower case to upper case. If a letter is already upper case, does not change it.
Syntax sub str_to_upper( var string[] str )
Parameter str the string to be converted: a variable length string
Example sentence = "emphasis here"
str_to_upper(sentence)
. .
printf("{}\n",sentence)
Result EMPHASIS HERE
See Also str_to_lower converts a string to lower case
chr_to_upper converts a character to upper case
sync
Description Flushes all the file system buffers of their contents.
Syntax command sync()
Returns commands do not return a value
Example int fd
string[] buffer = sync test
...
open ( fd, filename, O_WRONLY, 0 );; Open file
fprint ( fd, buffer ) ;; Write value
sync() ;; Force writing
Memory
sysconf
Description Obtains system configuration information and places it in a struct (c_sysconf).
The data is a struct of ints, 32 bit numbers. The sc_items parameter must be
initialized to indicate how many items to transfer/accept.
The sysid_string() command is used to print the system identifier.
Syntax command sysconf( var c_sysconf scp )
Parameter scp the system configuration data: a struct of type c_sysconf
int sc_items number of entries to transfer/accept
int sc_sysid system identifier word
int sc_version version code, major.minor where
major == upper 16 bits
minor == lower 16 bits
int sc_click_size bytes per click
int sc_msec_per_tick milliseconds per scheduled tick
int sc_build
Returns Success >= -EOK success
Failure < 0
-EINVAL the argument was invalid (improperly initialized buffer)
Example c_sysconf sysconf_buf
int[4] datain
int[8] dataout
int value
...
sysconf_buf.sc_items = sizeof(sysconf_buf)
sysconf(sysconf_buf)
...
print("\nSystem type: '", sysid_string(sysconf_buf.sc_sysid),
"'\n")
print("Version: ", (sysconf_buf.sc_version >> 16), ".", \
(sysconf_buf.sc_version & 0xffff), ".", \
sysconf_buf.sc_build, "\n")
print("Click size: ", sysconf_buf.sc_click_size, "\n")
print("msec/tick: ", sysconf_buf.sc_msec_per_tick, "\n")
...
...
Category System Process Control: Operating System Management
sysid_string
Description Returns a string describing a specified system id.
Syntax func string[]@ sysid_string( int sysid )
Parameter sysid an int - specifies the system
Returns Success >= 0.
Returns 1 CROS on a C500
Returns 2 CROS on a C500B
Returns 3 CROS on a C600
Returns 4 CROS under Windows NT
Returns 5 CROS under MSDOS
Failure < 0
Example c_sysconf sysconf_buf
int[4] datain
int[8] dataout
int value
...
sysconf_buf.sc_items=sizeof(sysconf_buf)
sysconf(sysconf_buf)
...
print("\nSystem type: '", sysid_string(sysconf_buf.sc_sysid),
"'\n")
print("Version: ", (sysconf_buf.sc_version >> 16), ".",\
(sysconf_buf.sc_version & 0xffff), ".",\
sysconf_buf.sc_build, "\n")
print("Click size: ", sysconf_buf.sc_click_size, "\n")
print("msec/tick: ", sysconf_buf.sc_msec_per_tick, "\n")
Category System Process Control: Operating System Management
tan
Description Calculates the tangent of an angle. Takes an argument in degrees.
Syntax func float tan( float x )
Parameter x a float - angle in degrees
Returns Success >= 0. The tangent of the argument.
Failure < 0
Example float x = 65.0 ;; value is in degrees
float y
y = tan( x )
Result 2.144507
RAPL-II TAN
See Also cos calculates the cosine
sin calculates the sine
atan2 calculates the arc tangent
Category Math
teach_menu
Description Use this command to select and teach variables for an application. Note that you
cannot use this command unless there is an open v3 file.
Library stp
Syntax export sub teach_menu()
Parameter None
Failure < 0
Example stp:teach_menu()
Category Pendant
time
Description Returns the current calendar time, or -1 if the time is not available. The calendar
time is given as a 32 bit integer and represents the number of elapsed seconds
since the beginning of Jan. 1, 1970.
Syntax func int time()
Returns Success >= 0 Returns the time
Failure < 0 -1
Example int t
t = time()
print (t, \n)
Result 834539842
See Also time-set sets the current time
time_to_str converts a system time code to an ASCII string
time_set
Description Sets the current time to the calendar time contained in now. The calendar time
represents the elapsed number of seconds since the beginning of Jan. 1, 1970.
Syntax command time_set( int now )
Parameter now an int - calendar time
Failure < 0
-EOK success
Example int t
t = time() ;; Get the current system time
t = t - 24 * 3600 ;; Set the time back to
;; same time yesterday
time_set (t)
See Also time returns the current calendar time
time_to_str converts a system time code to an ASCII string
time_to_str
Description Converts a system time code to an ASCII string of the form:
Day Mth DD HH:MM:SS YYYY
For example, time = 836211600 returns
Mon Jul 1 09:00:00 1996
The result is stored in dst, which must have space for at least 25 characters.
Syntax command time_to_str(var string[] dst, int time)
Parameter dst a string for storing date and time
time an int the system time
Failure < 0
Example int check
int time = 836211600
string[128] time_date
check = time_to_str(time_date, time)
printf({}\n,time_date)
Result Mon Jul 1 09:00:00 1996
See Also set_time sets the current time
time returns the current calendar time
String Manipulation
tool_get
Description Gets the current tool transform, the redefinition of the origin point and the
orientation of the tool coordinate system.
The default origin is the centre of the surface of the mechanical interface (tool
flange). The transform has translational coordinates, x, y, and z, and rotational
coordinates, yaw, pitch, and roll. The data type used is a cloc which also has an
integer flag.
Syntax command tool_get(var cloc toolloc )
Parameter toolloc a cloc packed with the tool transform data
Returns Success >= 0 toolloc is packed with current transform data
Failure < 0
Example teachable cloc tool_trsfrm
cloc old_tool
tool_get(old_tool)
if old_tool != tool_trsform
tool_set(tool_trsform)
end if
Result Tool transform is set to the teachable cloc tool_trsfrm
RAPL-II Similar to TOOL
See Also tool_set re-defines the current tool offset
base_get gets the current base offset
tool_set
Description Sets a tool transform, a redefinition of the origin point and the orientation of the
tool coordinate system.
The default origin is the centre of the surface of the mechanical interface (tool
flange).
The tool_set() command has the capacity for a 6 degree-of-freedom
transformation. The origin can be re-defined by translational coordinates: x, y,
and z. The orientation can be re-defined by rotational coordinates: yaw, pitch,
and roll. A cloc data type is used which requires an integer constant flag followed
by float constant coordinates.
Syntax command tool_set( var cloc toolloc )
Parameter toolloc the transform with flag, x, y, z, yaw, pitch, roll information: a cloc
flag the *: an int
yaw the rotation around the Z axis, in degrees: a float
pitch the rotation around the Y axis, in degrees: a float
roll the rotation around the X axis, in degrees: a float
Failure < 0
Example tool_set( 0, 2.0, 0.0, 3.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 )
;; for a tool with a tool centre-point 2.0 units along the X axis
;; and 3.0 units along the Z axis from the default origin
tool( 0, 2.0, 0.0, 3.0, 0.0, 90.0, 0.0 )
;; for the same tool as the previous example oriented with
;; a 90 degree pitch
RAPL-II Similar to TOOL.
See Also tool_get gets the current tool offset
shift_t alters coordinate(s)/orientation(s) in the tool frame of reference
base_set re-defines the world coordinate system
tx
Alias jog_t ...
alias same as
tx(...) jog_t(TOOL_X, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, moves the tool centre point to the end point which
is a specified distance along the X axis, in current units (millimetres or inches).
The following table describes the positive X axis for each tool coordinate system.
arm position F3 coordinate system A465/A255 coordinate system
any (see below) X is perpendicular to (arises out of)
the tool flange.
ready X is vertical pointing down
parallel to negative world Z.
X is horizontal, pointing ahead,
past the front of the arm,
parallel to world X.
straight up X is horizontal, pointing ahead,
past the front of the arm
X is vertical pointing up
parallel to world Z.
This command, tx() is joint-interpolated. The tool centre point travels as a result
of various joint motions, not in a straight line.
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see txs().
Syntax command tx( float distance )
Parameters distance the distance of travel, in current units: a float
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
tx(200) ;; millimetres
See Also txs jogs like tx, but in straight line motion
jog_t alias of tx and moves along other axes
ty jogs like tx, but along Y axis
tz jogs like tx, but along Z axis
depart moves along approach/depart axis
jog_w jogs like tx, but in world frame of reference
Category Motion
txs
Alias jog_ts ...
alias same as
txs() jog_ts(TOOL_X, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, moves the tool centre point along the X axis by the
specified distance in current units (millimetres or inches).
The following table describes the positive X axis for each tool coordinate system.
any (see below) X is perpendicular to (arises out of)
the tool flange.
ready X is vertical pointing down
parallel to negative world Z.
X is horizontal, pointing ahead,
straight up X is horizontal, pointing ahead,
past the front of the arm
X is vertical pointing up
parallel to world Z..
This command, txs(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see tx()
Syntax command txs( float distance )
Parameters distance the distance of travel, in current units or degrees: a float
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
txs(200) ;; millimetres
See Also tx jogs like txs, but joint interpolated
jog_ts alias of txs and moves along other axes
tys jogs like txs, but along Y axis
tzs jogs like txs, but along Z axis
jog_ws jogs like txs, but in world frame of reference
Category Motion
ty
Alias jog_t ...
alias same as
ty(...) jog_t(TOOL_Y, ... )
is a specified distance along the Y axis, in current units (millimetres or inches).
The following table describes the positive Y axis for each tool coordinate system.
any (see below) (see below)
ready Y is horizontal, pointing out to
one side of the arm,
parallel to positive world Y.
Y is horizontal, pointing out to
straight up Y is horizontal, pointing out to
parallel to positive world Y
This command, ty() is joint-interpolated. The tool centre point travels as a result
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see tys().
Syntax command ty( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
ty(200) ;; millimetres
See Also tys jogs like ty, but in straight line motion
jog_t alias of ty and moves along other axes
tx jogs like ty, but along X axis
tz jogs like tx, but along Z axis
jog_w jogs like ty, but in world frame of reference
Category Motion
tys
Alias jog_ts ...
alias same as
tys(...) jog_ts(TOOL_Y, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, moves the tool centre point along the Y axis by the
The following table describes the positive Y axis for each tool coordinate system.
any (see below) (see below)
ready Y is horizontal, pointing out to
straight up Y is horizontal, pointing out to
parallel to positive world Y
This command, tys(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see ty()
Syntax command tys( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
tys(200) ;; millimetres
See Also ty jogs like tys, but joint interpolated
jog_ts alias of tys and moves along other axes
txs jogs like tys, but along X axis
tzs jogs like tys, but along Z axis
jog_ws jogs like tys, but in world frame of reference
Category Motion
tz
Alias jog_t ...
alias same as
tz(...) jog_t(TOOL_Z, ... )
is a specified distance along the Z axis, in current units (millimetres or inches).
The following table describes the positive Z axis for each tool coordinate system.
any Z is perpendicular to (arises out of)
the tool flange.
(see below)
ready Z is horizontal, pointing ahead,
Z is vertical pointing up,
parallel to positive world Z.
straight up Z is vertical pointing up,
Z is horizontal, pointing back,
parallel to negative world X.
This command, tz() is joint-interpolated. The tool centre point travels as a result
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see tzs().
Syntax command tz( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
tz(200) ;; millimetres
See Also tzs jogs like tz, but in straight line motion
jog_t alias of tz and moves along other axes
tx jogs like ty, but along X axis
ty jogs like ty, but along Y axis
jog_w jogs like tz, but in world frame of reference
Category Motion
tzs
Alias jog_ts ...
alias same as
tzs(...) jog_ts(TOOL_Z, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, moves the tool centre point along the Z axis by the
The following table describes the positive Z axis for each tool coordinate system.
any Z is perpendicular to (arises out of)
the tool flange.
(see below)
ready Z is horizontal, pointing ahead,
Z is vertical pointing up,
straight up Z is vertical pointing up,
Z is horizontal, pointing back,
parallel to negative world X.
This command, tzs(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see tz()
Syntax command tzs( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
tzs(200) ;; millimetres
See Also tz jogs like tzs, but joint interpolated
jog_ts alias of tzs and moves along other axes
txs jogs like tzs, but along X axis
tys jogs like tzs, but along Y axis
jog_ws jogs like tzs, but in world frame of reference
Category Motion
units_get
Description Gets the current setting of units of linear measure, either metric (millimetres) or
English (inches).
Syntax command units_get( var unit_type linear_measure )
Parameter linear_measure the variable
the parameter is loaded with one of:
UNITS_METRIC
UNITS_ENGLISH
Failure < 0
Example unit_type units
units_get(units)
if units == UNITS_METRIC
print(Using metric units)
else
print(Using English units)
end if
Result prints the current units
See Also units_set sets the current units
units_set
Description Sets current units to metric (millimetres) or English (inches).
Sets the system of measurement for linear distances. Does not affect the system
of measurement for rotational distances.
The default units are:
F3 Metric
A465, A255, earlier models English
If a cartesian location was taught in one system of units, it cannot be used in a
program with the other system of units. The units setting does not affect
precision locations.
Syntax command units_set( unit_type linear_measure )
Parameter linear_measure the system of units, of type unit_type, one of:
UNITS_METRIC
UNITS_ENGLISH
Failure < 0
Example unit_type units = UNITS_METRIC
...
units_set(units)
Result Configures robot for metric units
See Also units_get gets the current units
unlink
Description The unlink command removes a link to the file specified by path. If the link count
is zero, the file is deleted.
Syntax command unlink( var string[] path )
Parameter path A string defining the file and the path to the file
Failure < 0
-ENOTDIR a component is not a directory
-EISDIR tried to unlink a directory
-EBUSY the file is presently open
Example string[32] path =my_directory\\myfile
int check, fd
check = open(fd, path,O_RDWR, M_READ|M_WRITE)
if (check) =
;; continue ...
end if
...
unlink(path)
Result Opens the file path - deletes it later
System Shell Same as: rm, del.
RAPL-II DELETE, DPROG
See Also link
open
unlock
Description Unlocks a specified axis.
Syntax command unlock( int axis )
Parameter axis the axis to be unlocked: an int
Failure < 0
Example ;;Unlock joint 1, move robot, lock joint 1
unlock(1)
... robot motion
lock(1)
RAPL-II Same as UNLOCK
See Also lock
Category Motion
unmount
Description Unmounts a mounted filesystem from directory dir.
Syntax command unmount( var string[] dir )
Parameter dir the mount point of the CROS directory: a string of var length
Failure < 0
-EPERM must be a privileged process to unmount()
-ENOTDIR the mount point is not a directory
-EBUSY the mounted filesystem is busy
Example string[32] directory = my_directory
unmount(directory)
System Shell Same as unmount.
See Also mount mounts a file system on a directory
unsetenv
Description Deletes the selected environment string. (See the section on environ() for more
explanation.) (C500C only)
Syntax command unsetenv(string[] key)
Parameter There is one required parameter:
key The key (left hand side before the = character) of the string
to delete.
Returns Sucess: 0. (even if the key is not found, 0 is returned.)
Example ;; Delete MyString from the environment
unsetenv(MyString)
See Also environ(), getenv(), setenv()
utime
Description Changes the modification time of a filesystem object.
Library syslib
Syntax command utime(string [] path, int modtime)
path the path of the object to modify
modtime what time to reset the objects modification
time to.
Returns >= 0 Success
< 0 Failure
Possible failure return codes are:
-EINVAL Invalid argument
EBADF There is no open file corresponding to fd.
EACCESS Access denied
EIO I/O error
ENOTDIR a component was not a directory
ENOENT the object was not found
Example int t
t = time() ;; get the time NOW
...
utime(/tmp/xfile, t - 60) ;; reset the timestamp to one minute
ago
...
See Also mtime()
v3_save_on_exit
Description Sets the RAPL-3 interpreter so that when the program exits, all of its final v3
variable values will be saved to the specified v3 file. Note that the automatic save
will fail if the file is not a valid v3 file with entries corresponding to each
teachable variable in the current program.
The v3_save_on_exit() mechanism can be used to simulate persistent variables
like the RAPL-II language had.
Syntax command v3_save_on_exit(int fd)
Parameter fd -- file descriptor of the open v3 file (must be open for both reading and
writing.) If fd == -1, then the call cancels a previously requested save-on-exit.
Example int fd
open(fd, whatever.v3, O_RDWR, 0) ;; open my v3 file
v3_save_on_exit(fd)
Category v3 files
v3_vars_save
Description Writes the current programs teachable variables to the file open on fd. The
command will fail if the file is not a valid v3 file with entries corresponding to the
current programs teachable variables. Note that the file (fd) is always closed after
the command call whether the command succeeds or fails.
Syntax command v3_vars_save(int fd)
Parameter fd the file open
Returns Success =0
Failure < -ve error descriptor
Example int fd
open(fd, "myname.v3", O_RDWR, 0)
v3_vars_save(fd)
See Also vars_save
Category v3 Files
va_arg_get
Description Gets the next argument into dst (converting to vat if required), advances
va_next_ptr, and decrements va_count.
Used for subroutines and functions that have a variable number of arguments.
Syntax command va_arg_get(var int va_count, var void@ va_next_ptr, \
va_types vat, void@ dst)
Parameters va_count an int
va_next_ptr void pointer
vat one of
global typedef va_types enum
va_t_void, ;; void
va_t_int, ;; int
va_t_float, ;; float
va_t_string, ;; string[]; (can't happen)
va_t_ploc, ;; ploc
va_t_cloc, ;; cloc
va_t_gloc, ;; gloc
va_t_unknown, ;; unknown; (can't happen)
va_t_void_p = 0x10, ;; void@
va_t_int_p, ;; int@
va_t_float_p, ;; float@
va_t_string_p, ;; string[]@
va_t_ploc_p, ;; ploc@
va_t_cloc_p, ;; cloc@
va_t_gloc_p, ;; gloc@
va_t_ptr ;; other pointer type
end enum
dst void pointer
Failure < 0
-ERANGE if there are no arguments left to get
-EINVAL if there is a problem getting the type of argument
Category System Process Control: Operating System
va_arg_type
Description Returns a type descriptor for the next varargs argument.
Used for subroutines and functions that have a variable number of arguments.
Syntax func va_types va_arg_type(void@ va_next_ptr)
Parameters va_next_ptr void pointer
Returns Success >= 0. An enumeration constant (type va_types)
va_t_void ;; void
va_t_int ;; int
va_t_float ;; float
va_t_string ;; string[] (cant happen)
va_t_cloc ;; cloc
va_t_ploc ;; ploc
va_t_gloc ;; gloc
va_t_unknown ;; unknown (cant happen)
va_t_void_p ;; void@
va_t_int_p ;; int@
va_t_float_p ;; float@
va_t_string_p ;; string[]@
va_t_cloc_p ;; cloc@
va_t_ploc_p ;; ploc@
va_t_gloc_p ;; gloc@
va_t_ptr ;; other pointer type
Failure < 0
Example sub do_something( int a, ...)
int b
...
case va_count:
of 0:
b = 0 ;; default
else
if (va_type_arg(va_next_ptr) == va_t_int)
va_get_arg(va_count, va_next_ptr, va_t_int, &b)
else ;; wrong type passed
b = 0 ;; use default
end if
end case
...
end sub
Category System Process Control: Operating System
var_teach
Description Teach the variable whose name is name. Returns True if successful, False if
not correctly taught or negative if not found or otherwise in error. Refer also to
the var_teach_v command.
Library stp
Syntax export command var_teach(var string[] name, int index_1, int
index_2)
Parameter name name of the variable to be taught
index_1 first argument of an array
index_2 second argument in a two dimensional array
Returns Success >= 0 True if taught, False if not taught
Example ...
stp:var_teach(new_array,1,1)
...
See Also var_teach_v
Category Pendant
vars_save
Description Invokes the v3_vars_save() operation on the currently open application v3 file.
This presupposes that the calling program is open application and that the
variables in the open application are actually desired variables. If this
assumption is false the command will likely fail or do something unpredictable
(and NOT useful.).
Library stp
Syntax export command var_save()
Parameter No parameters
Returns Success >= 0 Returns 0 if successful
Failure < 0
-1 no application open
Returns error descriptor
Example int fd
open(fd, "myname.v3", O_RDWR, 0)
...
stp:vars_save()
...
Result Saves the open applications variables to file fd.
See Also v3_vars_save
Category Pendant
verstring_get
Description Gets the current kinematics version string.
Syntax command verstring_get( var string[] s )
Parameters s the string variable for the kinematics version
the variable is packed
Failure < 0
Category Status
Robot Configuration
waitpid
Description Waits for the child process wpid to complete. If wpid=W_ANY, waits for any child
process to complete. If status is not NULL, the child process status is stored in
status@..
Syntax func int waitpid( int wpid, int@ status, int options )
Parameters wpid an int - the child process
status pointer to an int
options
0
W_ANY waits for any child
W_NOHANG waitpid checks for child completion and returns immediately
positive pid the pid of the child, if the requested child terminated
0 (EOK) if W_NOHANG is in effect and no child has terminated
Failure < 0
-ESRCH no process with that pid exists
-ECHILD no child process exists
Example int pid
...
pid = split()
if pid == 0
;; Child process
execl(/bin/ls)
exit(0)
else
;; Parent waits for child
while waitpid( pid, NULL, 0 ) == 0
end while
;; Finish Code
end if
See Also WEXITSTATUS
WIFEXITED
WIFSIGNALED
WTERMSIG
WEXITSTATUS
Description If status is the child status returned by waitpid, then WEXITSTATUS returns the
actual exit code of the child process that exited. (This is simply the lower byte of
status.)
Syntax func int WEXITSTATUS( int status )
Parameter status an int - child status
Failure < 0
Example int status
...
status = WEXITSTATUS( status )
WIFEXITED
Description WIFEXITED returns 1 if status indicates that the child process exited, and
returns 0 otherwise.
Syntax func int WIFEXITED( int status )
Parameters status an int - child process status
Failure < 0
Example int status
...
if WIFEXITED( status )
;; Process exited
else
;; Process was signaled
end if
WIFSIGNALED
Description WIFSIGNALED returns 1 if the child process was signal-terminated, and returns
0 otherwise.
Syntax func int WIFSIGNALED( int status )
Parameters status an int - child process status
Failure < 0
Example int status
...
if WIFSIGNALED( status )
;; Process was signaled
else
;; Process exited
end if
See Also WTERMSIG returns the signal number
Signal Handling
world_to_joint
Description Converts a location from world coordinates to joint angles. Used if a location of
the program.
Syntax command world_to_joint( cloc world, var float[8] joint )
Parameters world the location in world coordinates: a cloc
joint the location in joint angles (an array of floats)
joint is packed
Failure < 0
Example float[8] joints1
...
world_to_joint(world1, joints1)
Result joint1 is packed with the appropriate joint data
See Also joint_to_world converts joint angles to world coordinates
world_to_motor converts world coordinates to motor pulses
world_to_motor
Description Converts a location from world coordinates to motor pulses. Used if a location of
the program.
Syntax command world_to_motor( cloc world, var ploc motor )
Parameters world the location in world coordinates: a cloc
motor the location in motor pulses: a ploc
motor is packed
Failure < 0
Example ploc motor1
...
world_to_joint(world1, motor1)
Result motor1 is packed with the appropriate joint coordinate data
See Also motor_to_world converts motor pulses to world coordinates
world_to_joint converts world coordinates to joint angles
write
Description Attempts to write nwords from buf to the file descriptor fd. If the number of
words specified in nwords cannot be written the command performs a blocking
write, unless the file descriptor was opened with mode O_NONBLOCK. After
writing, the file position is increased by the number of words written. This
provides a sequential move through the file.
write() handles 4-byte words. writes() handles characters.
Similar to send() which is used with sockets.
Syntax command write( int fd, void@ buf, int nwords )
Failure < 0
-EACCESS not open for writing
-ENOMEM (mfs only) out of memory
-EAGAIN (nonblocking I/O) not ready to write any bytes
Example int fd
int[10] buf
...
write ( fd, buf, sizeof(buf) )
See Also read read words from a file
writes write a string to a file
send write to a socket
writeread
Description Writes wlen number of words to the file descriptor fd and then reads at most rlen
number of words from the file descriptor fd.
This command may or may not block, depending on the flags (O_NONBLOCK)
used when opening the file descriptor fd and the device driver (which may not
support blocking or non-blocking modes). Many devices do not support this call,
and with those devices writeread() returns -ENODEV on invocation. For example,
all the file systems (MFS, NFS, etc.) do not support writeread().
Syntax command writeread( int fd, void@ wbuf, int wlen, void@ rbuf, int
rlen )
Returns Success >= 0 Returns the number of words read.
Failure < 0
-EACCESS not open for reading and writing
-ENODEV this is not a device that supports writeread().
See Also write write words from a buffer to the file
writes write a string to a file
read read words from a file
reads reads a string from a file
writes
Description Writes the string s to the file indicated by fd. This is different from the write
command in that a string is used, and the starting location start is the first
character of the string to be sent.
Syntax command writes( int fd, var string[] s, int start )
Returns Success >= 0 Returns the number of characters written to the file
Failure < 0 Returns a negative error code if the write fails.
Example string[] buf = only writes_test
int fd
open ( fd, /temp/writes_test, O_RDONLY, 0 )
;; Only write writes_test
writes ( fd, buf, 5 ) ;; start from the character w
See Also write write words to a file
WTERMSIG
Description Returns the actual signal number that terminated a WIFSIGNALED() process.
Syntax func signal_code WTERMSIG(int status)
Returns Success >= 0, one of:
SIGKILL = 1
SIGSEGV = 2
SIGILL = 3
SIGFPE = 4
SIGSYS = 5
SIGABRT = 6
SIGINT = 7
SIGALRM = 8
SIGHUP = 9
SIGPIPE = 10
SIGSOCK = 11
SIGRPWR = 12
SIG13 = 13
SIG14 = 14
SIG15 = 15
SIG16 = 16
SIGCHLD = 17
SIG18 = 18
SIG19 = 19
SIG20 = 20
SIG21 = 21
SIG22 = 22
SIG23 = 23
SIG24 = 24
Failure < 0
Signal Handling
wx
Alias jog_w ...
alias same as
wx(...) jog_w(WORLD_X, ... )
Description In the world frame of reference, moves the tool centre point to the end point
which is a specified distance along the X axis, in current units (millimetres or
inches). This command, wx() is joint-interpolated. The tool centre point travels as
a result of various joint motions, not in a straight line.
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see wxs().
Syntax command wx( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
wx(200) ;; millimetres
RAPL-II Similar to JOG and X, without straight line parameter.
See Also wxs jogs like wx, but in straight line motion
jog_w alias of wx and moves along other axes
wy jogs like wx, but along Y axis
wz jogs like wx, but along Z axis
jog_t jogs like wx, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
wxs
Alias jog_ws ...
alias same as
wxs(...) jog_ws(WORLD_X, ... )
Description In the world frame of reference, moves the tool centre point along the X axis by
the specified distance in current units (millimetres or inches). This command,
wxs(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see wx()
Syntax command wxs( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
wxs(200) ;; millimetres
RAPL-II Similar to JOG and X, with straight line parameter.
See Also wx jogs like wxs, but joint interpolated
jog_ws alias of wxs and moves along other axes
wys jogs like wxs, but along Y axis
wzs jogs like wxs, but along Z axis
jog_ts jogs like wxs, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
wy
Alias jog_w ...
alias same as
wy(...) jog_w(WORLD_Y, ... )
which is a specified distance along the Y axis, in current units (millimetres or
inches). This command, wy() is joint-interpolated. The tool centre point travels as
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see wys().
Syntax command wy( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
wy(200) ;; millimetres
RAPL-II Similar to JOG and Y, without straight line parameter.
See Also wys jogs like wy, but in straight line motion
jog_w alias of wy and moves along other axes
wx jogs like wy, but along X axis
wz jogs like wy, but along Z axis
jog_t jogs like wy, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
wys
Alias jog_ws ...
alias same as
wys(...) jog_ws(WORLD_Y, ... )
Description In the world frame of reference, moves the tool centre point along the Y axis by
wys(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see wy()
Syntax command wys( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
wys(200) ;; millimetres
RAPL-II Similar to JOG and Y, with straight line parameter.
See Also wy jogs like wys, but joint interpolated
jog_ws alias of wys and moves along other axes
wxs jogs like wys, but along X axis
wzs jogs like wys, but along Z axis
jog_ts jogs like wys, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
wz
Alias jog_w ...
alias same as
wz(...) jog_w(WORLD_Z, ... )
which is a specified distance along the Z axis, in current units (millimetres or
inches). This command, wz() is joint-interpolated. The tool centre point travels as
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see wzs().
Syntax command wz( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
wz(200) ;; millimetres
RAPL-II Similar to JOG and Z, without straight line parameter.
See Also wzs jogs like wz, but in straight line motion
jog_w alias of wz and moves along other axes
wx jogs like wz, but along X axis
wy jogs like wz, but along Y axis
jog_t jogs like wz, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
wzs
Alias jog_ws ...
alias same as
wzs(...) jog_ws(WORLD_Z, ... )
Description In the world frame of reference, moves the tool centre point along the Z axis by
wzs(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight line).
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see wz()
Syntax command wzs( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
wzs(200) ;; millimetres
RAPL-II Similar to JOG and Z, with straight line parameter.
See Also wz jogs like wzs, but joint interpolated
jog_ws alias of wzs and moves along other axes
wxs jogs like wzs, but along X axis
wys jogs like wzs, but along Y axis
jog_ts jogs like wzs, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
xpulses_get
Description Gets xpulses, the number of encoder pulses per revolution of a motor, for all
axes.
Syntax command xpulses_get( var int[8] pulses )
Parameter pulses the pulses of all axes: an array of ints
Returns Success >= 0.
The array pulses is packed.
Failure < 0
See Also xpulses_set sets the number of pulses per revolution for an axis
xpulses_set
Description For an axis, sets xpulses, the number of encoder pulses per revolution of the
motor.
Syntax command xpulses_set( int axis , int xpulses )
xpulses the number of pulses per revolution: an int
Failure < 0
Example xpulses_set(8,1000)
RAPL-II @XPULSES
See Also configaxis configures an axis including sets pulses
xpulses_get gets the number of pulses per revolution for all axes
xratio_get
Description Gets xratio, the ratio of the number of motor turns (revolutions) per unit of joint
displacement (degrees for robot joints and carousels, mm or inch for track).
Syntax command xratio_get( var float[8] ratio )
Parameter ratio the ratios for all axes: an array of up to 8 floats
Returns Success >= 0. the parameter is packed
Failure < 0
Example float[8] ratios
int check
;; get pulse to motion conversions
check = xratio_get(ratios)
See Also xratio_set sets the ratio of conversion
xratio_set
Description Sets xratio, the ratio of the number of motor turns (revolutions) per unit of joint
displacement (degrees for robot joints and carousels, mm or inch for track).
Syntax command xratio_set( int axis , float xratio )
xratio the ratio of conversion: a float
Failure < 0
Example xratio_set(8,11.5)
RAPL-II @XRATIO
See Also configaxis configures an axis including sets ratio
xratio_get gets the ratio of conversion
xrot
Alias jog_w ...
alias same as
xrot(...) jog_w(WORLD_XROT, ...
)
Description In the world frame of reference, rotates the tool around the X axis by the specified
degrees.
This command, xrot(), is joint-interpolated. The end-point is determined and the
tool travels to it as a result of various joint motions. The start point and end
the tool are different.
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see xrots().
Syntax command xrot( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
xrot(45) ;; rotate around world X axis
RAPL-II Similar to JOG, without straight line parameter.
Also similar to ROLL. In RAPL-II this name was used for a rotation in the world
frame of reference. In RAPL-3, the world rotation is called xrot and the tool
rotation is called roll.
See Also xrots like xrot, but in straight-line mode
jog_w like xrot and around and along all axes
yrot rotates around world Y axis
zrot rotates around world Z axis
jog_t jogs, but in tool frame of reference
Category Motion
xrots
Alias jog_ws ...
alias same as
xrots(...) jog_ws(WORLD_XROT, ...
)
Description In the world frame of reference, rotates the tool around the X axis by the specified
degrees.
This command, xrots(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight-line). The tool centre
point travels in a straight line along the axis to the end point.
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see xrot().
Syntax command xrots( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
xrots(45) ;; rotate around world X axis
RAPL-II Similar to JOG, with straight line parameter.
Also similar to ROLL. In RAPL-II this name was used for a rotation in the world
frame of reference. In RAPL-3, the world rotation is called xrot and the tool
rotation is called roll.
See Also xrot like xrots, but joint-interpolated
jog_w like xrots and around and along all axes
yrots rotates around world Y axis
zrots rotates around world Z axis
Category Motion
yaw
Alias jog_t ...
alias same as
yaw(...) jog_t(TOOL_YAW, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, rotates around the normal axis, by the specified
number of degrees.
motion axis
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
yaw normal X Z
This command, yaw(), is joint-interpolated. The end position is determined and
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see yaws().
Syntax command yaw( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example yaw(45)
yaw(-8.25)
Application Shell Same as yaw.
RAPL-II No equivalent. In RAPL-II, YAW performed a different motion. See zrot.
See Also yaws moves around the tool normal axis, but in straight line motion
pitch moves around the tool orientation axis
roll moves around the tool approach/depart axis
Category Motion
yaws
Alias jog_ts ...
alias same as
yaws(...) jog_ts(TOOL_YAW, ... )
Description In the tool frame of reference, rotates around the normal axis, by the specified
number of degrees.
motion axis
common name F3
coordinate
system
A465/A255
coordinate
system
yaw normal X Z
This command, yaws(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight-line) motion. The tool
the axis.
For joint-interpolated motion, see yaw().
Syntax command yaws( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
Example yaws(45)
yaws(-57.5)
Application Shell Same as yaws.
RAPL-II No equivalent. In RAPL-II, YAW performed a different motion. See zrots.
See Also yaw moves around the tool normal axis, but joint-interpolated
pitchs moves around the tool orientation axis in straight line motion
rolls moves around the tool approach/depart axis in straight line motion
Category Motion
yrot
Alias jog_w ...
alias same as
yrot(...) jog_w(WORLD_YROT, ...
)
Description In the world frame of reference, rotates the tool around the Y axis by the specified
degrees.
This command, yrot(), is joint-interpolated. The end-point is determined and the
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see yrots().
Syntax command yrot( float distance )
Parameter distance the distance of travel, in current units or degrees: a float
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
yrot(45) ;; rotate around world Y axis
Also similar to PITCH. In RAPL-II this name was used for a rotation in the world
frame of reference. In RAPL-3, the world rotation is called yrot and the tool
rotation is called pitch.
See Also yrots like yrot, but in straight-line mode
jog_w like yrot and around and along all axes
xrot rotates around world X axis
zrot rotates around world Z axis
Category Motion and Locations: Motion
yrots
Alias jog_ws ...
alias same as
yrots(...) jog_ws(WORLD_YROT, ...
)
Description In the world frame of reference, rotates the tool around the Y axis by the specified
degrees.
This command, yrots(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight-line). The tool centre
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see yrot().
Syntax command yrots( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
yrots(45) ;; rotate around world Y axis
Also similar to PITCH. In RAPL-II this name was used for a rotation in the world
frame of reference. In RAPL-3, the world rotation is called yrot and the tool
rotation is called pitch.
See Also yrot like yrots, but joint-interpolated
jog_w like yrots and around and along all axes
xrots rotates around world X axis
zrots rotates around world Z axis
Category Motion
zero
Description Sets all the current motor position registers to 0.
Syntax command zero()
Failure < 0
Example zero()
RAPL-II Same as @ZERO.
See Also here stores a location in a location variable
pos_get gets the position of the robot
pos_set sets the position of the robot to any value
Home
zrot
Alias jog_w ...
alias same as
zrot(...) jog_w(WORLD_ZROT,... )
Description In the world frame of reference, rotates the tool around the Z axis by the specified
degrees.
This command, zrot(), is joint-interpolated. The end-point is determined and the
For cartesian-interpolated (straight line) motion, see zrots().
Syntax command zrot( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
zrot(45) ;; rotate around world Z axis
Also similar to YAW. In RAPL-II this name was used for a rotation in the world
frame of reference. In RAPL-3, the world rotation is called zrot and the tool
rotation is called yaw.
See Also zrots like zrot, but in straight-line mode
jog_w like zrot and around and along all axes
xrot rotates around world X axis
yrot rotates around world Y axis
Category Motion
zrots
Alias jog_ws ...
alias same as
zrots(...) jog_ws(WORLD_ZROT, ...
)
Description In the world frame of reference, rotates the tool around the Z axis by the specified
degrees.
This command, zrots(), is cartesian-interpolated (straight-line). The tool centre
For joint-interpolated (not straight) motion, see zrot().
Syntax command zrots( float distance )
Returns Success = 0
Failure < 0
zrots(45) ;; rotate around world Z axis
Also similar to YAW. In RAPL-II this name was used for a rotation in the world
frame of reference. In RAPL-3, the world rotation is called zrot and the tool
rotation is called yaw.
See Also zrot like zrots, but joint-interpolated
jog_w like zrots and around and along all axes
xrots rotates around world X axis
yrots rotates around world Y axis
Category Motion
A P P E N D I C E S
Signals
Symbol Number Description Default Action
SIGKILL 1 Kill
(cannot be masked or modified)
Terminate
SIGSEGV 2 Segmentation violation Terminate
SIGILL 3 Illegal instruction Terminate
SIGFPE 4 Floating point exception Terminate
SIGSYS 5 Bad argument to system call Terminate
SIGABRT 6 Abort Terminate
SIGINT 7 Interrupt Terminate
SIGALRM 8 Alarm clock Terminate
SIGHUP 9 Hang up Terminate
SIGPIPE 10 Write to pipe,
but no process to read it
Terminate
SIGSOCK 11 Write to socket,
but no process to read it
Terminate
SIGRPWR 12 Robot power fail Terminate
SIG13 13 Undefined Terminate
SIGCHLD 17 Child process died Ignore
SIG18 18 Undefined Ignore
SIG23 23 Reserved for system use Ignore
(non-interruptible)
SIG24 24 Reserved for system use Ignore
(will interrupt a process blocked on
socket i/o)
Any signal interrupts msleep() or waitpid().
Signal <= 8, SIGKILL to SIGALRM, interrupts WAITIO, WAITSOCK, WAITSEM.
Signal 11, SIGSOCK, interrupts WAITSOCK.
WAITIO, WAITSOCK, and WAITSEM are states that a process can be in.
342

RAPL 3LanguageReferenceGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAPL 3LanguageReferenceGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAPL-3

Language Reference Guide

You might also like